EIA Report

Real Ispat and Power Limited
[Proposed Greenfield Project comprising of establishment of Iron ore beneficiation plant (2.0 MTPA),
Pellet Plant (1.6 MTPA), Sponge Iron Plant (7,60,000 TPA), Steel Melting Shop with CCM (Billets / Ingots /
Hot Billets) (7,50,000 TPA), Ladle Refining Furnace (7,50,000 TPA), Rolling Mill with Standby Reheating
Furnace 50 TPH (Rolled products / TMT Bars / Structural Steel) (7,00,000 TPA), Coal Gasifier + PCI for
Pellet Plant & Rolling Mill (80000 Nm3/hr), Ferro Alloy Plant 2 x 9 MVA (SiMn – 36,000 TPA / FeMn –
66,000 TPA / FeSi – 18,000 TPA / Pig Iron – 72,000 TPA),
WHRB based Power Plant – 66 MW & CFBC based Power Plant – 40 MW]
Category – A Project
at
Bakulahi & Dhourabhata Villages, Bhatapara Tehsil,
Balodabazar – Bhatapara District, Chhattisgarh
Final
Environmental Impact Assessment
Report
[Based on TOR letter issued by MoEF&CC, New Delhi vide
F.No. J-11011/411/2019-IA-II(I) dt. 20th January 2020]
Monitoring Period
October 2019 to December 2019
Laboratory
M/s. Global Enviro Labs, Hyderabad (MoEF&CC recognised Laboratory)
August 2021
UID: PELCPL/EIA/IND-1/2020/04 ISSUE-02

Prepared by
Accredited by
nd
2 Floor, A-Z Elite, Plot No. 197, Kavuri Hills, Madhapur, Hyderabad -500081
Ph.No. : 040-23114270: Email: info@pioneerenvirolabs.com
UNDERTAKING
I, Sanjay Yadav, Sr. Manager Environment of REAL ISPAT & POWER LTD. give this undertaking that
the EIA report has been prepared by M/s. Pioneer Enviro Laboratories & Consultants Pvt. Ltd.,
Hyderabad incorporating the Terms of Reference (ToRs) prescribed by MoEF&CC, New Delhi vide
letter no. . J-11011/411/2019-IA II (I) dated 20th January 2020 for our proposed Steel plant at
Bakulahi & Dhourabhata Villages, Bhatapara Tehsil, Baloda Bazar – Bhatapara District, Chhattisgarh.
It is here by confirmed that the data submitted are factually correct & owe the contents of this
report.
Date : 02-08-2021 For & behalf of REAL ISPAT & POWER LTD.
Place : Raipur
Sanjay Yadav
Sr. Manager (Env.)
Certificate of Plagiarism Check
Title of EIA Report Proposed Greenfield Project comprising of establishment

of Iron ore beneficiation plant (2.0 MTPA), Pellet Plant (1.6
MTPA), Sponge Iron Plant (7,60,000 TPA), Steel Melting
Shop with CCM (Billets / Ingots / Hot Billets) (7,50,000 TPA),
Ladle Refining Furnace (7,50,000 TPA), Rolling Mill with
Standby Reheating Furnace 50 TPH (Rolled products / TMT
Bars / Structural Steel) (7,00,000 TPA), Coal Gasifier + PCI
for Pellet Plant & Rolling Mill (80000 Nm3/hr), Ferro Alloy
Plant 2 x 9 MVA (SiMn – 36,000 TPA / FeMn – 66,000 TPA /
FeSi – 18,000 TPA / Pig Iron – 72,000 TPA), WHRB based
Power Plant – 66 MW & CFBC based Power Plant – 40 MW
by M/s. Real Ispat & Power Ltd.
Name of Accredited Organization Pioneer Enviro Laboratories & Consultants Pvt. Ltd.
Unique Identification Number PELCPL/EIA/IND-1/2020/04 ISSUE-02
Name of EIA Coordinator (EC) Y. Maheshwara Reddy
Name of the Software www.duplichecker.com website
Date of Check 14th August 2021
Time of Check 3:30 PM
Declaration by the Head of the accredited consultant organization/ authorized person:
I hereby certify that this EIA Report has been evaluated using online software viz., www.
duplichecker.com website. The report produced has been analyzed by the system and based on it;
I certify that the EIA report produced in accordance with good scientific practice.
Date and Sign of EIA Coordinator:
Name: Y. Maheshwara Reddy
Designation: Managing Director
Date and Sign of Head of Accredited Organization:
Name of the EIA Consultant Organization: Pioneer Enviro Laboratories & Consultants
Pvt. Ltd.
NABET Certificate No. & Issued Date: NABET/EIA/1922/RA 0149 issued on 22nd
Jan. 2020
Bakulahi & Dhourabhata Villages, Bhatapara (T),
Baloda Bazar - Bhatapara (D), Chhattisgarh
INDEX
S.No. Contents Page No.
TOR LETTER
TOR COMPLIANCE i to xvii
Chapter – 1 : Introduction
1.1 Purpose of the Report 1.1
1.2 Identification of Project & Project Proponent 1.2
1.3 Brief Description 1.5
1.3.1 Nature of the Project 1.5
1.3.2 Size of the Proposed Project 1.6
1.3.3 Location of the Project 1.6
1.3.4 Importance of Project 1.7
1.4 Scope of the Study 1.8
Chapter – 2 : Project Description

2.1 Type of Project 2.1
2.2 Need for the Project 2.1
2.3 Location of the Project 2.3
2.3.1 Geo - Coordinates of the qProject Site 2.3
2.3.2 Environmental Setting Within 10 Km. Radius of the Project Site 2.8
2.3.3 List of industries within 10 km. Radius of the project site 2.11
2.4 Details of Land 2.11
2.5 Size / Magnitude of Operation 2.14
2.6 Proposed Schedule for Approval and Implementation 2.15
2.7 Project Cost 2.16
2.8 Technology & Process Description 2.16
2.8.1 Raw Materials 2.16
2.8.2 Raw Material Transport, Storage & Handling 2.18
2.8.3 Material Balance 2.19
2.8.4 Manufacturing Process 2.21
2.8.4.1 Process of Iron Ore Beneficiation 2.21
2.8.4.2 Process of Iron Ore Pelletisation 2.22
2.8.4.3 Process of Sponge Iron Manufacturing 2.26
2.8.4.4 Process Description of Steel making in Steel Melt Shop 2.30
2.8.4.5 Manufacturing of Rolled Products through Rolling Mill 2.34
2.8.4.6 Ferro Alloys Manufacturing through Submerged Electric Arc Furnace 2.36
2.8.4.7 Power Generation 2.37
2.8.4.8 Producer Gas Generation Through Gasifier 2.41
2.8.5 Stack Emissions 2.43
2.8.6 Water Requirement 2.44
2.8.7 Power Requirement 2.45
2.8.8 Manpower Requirement 2.45
2.8.9 Energy Conservation Measures 2.46
2.9 Environmental Mitigation Measures 2.47
2.9.1 Air Emission Control 2.47
EIA Report - Index
1
2.9.1.1 Dust Extraction and Dust Suppression System 2.50

2.9.1.2 Sources Of Air Pollution (DRI Kilns) 2.50
2.9.1.3 Technical Specifications of Control Systems 2.52
2.9.2 Wastewater Management 2.56
2.9.3 Noise Level Management 2.58
2.9.4 Solid Waste Management 2.58
2.9.5 Green Belt Development 2.61
2.10 Assessment of new & Untested Technology for the Risk of technological 2.61
Failure
Chapter – 3 : Description of Environment

3.1 Baseline Environmental Status 3.1
3.2 Air Environment 3.1
3.2.1 Meteorology 3.1
3.2.2 Meteorological Data Recorded at Project Site 3.2
3.2.3 Air Quality 3.6
3.2.3.1 Selection of Sampling Stations 3.6
3.2.3.2 Parameters Monitored 3.6
3.2.3.3 Sampling & Analytical Techniques, Instruments used For Sampling 3.7
3.2.4 Bar diagrams showing the summary of Ambient Air Quality Data 3.11
3.2.5 Interpretation Of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring 3.12
3.3 Noise Environment 3.13
3.3.1 Reconnaissance 3.14
3.3.1.1 Background Noise 3.14
3.3.1.2 Sources of Noise 3.14
3.3.2 Community Noise 3.15
3.3.2.1 Occupational Exposure 3.15
3.3.3 Methodology Adopted for Noise Level Observation 3.16
3.3.4 Noise Level Observations in the Study Area 3.17
3.3.5 Bar diagram showing the summary of the Noise Level Monitoring data 3.18
3.3.6 Interpretation of Noise level monitoring 3.18
3.4 Water Quality Impacts 3.20
3.4.1 Surface Water Quality 3.20
3.4.2 Interpretation of Surface Water Quality 3.24
3.4.3 Ground Water Quality 3.24
3.4.4 Interpretation of Ground Water Quality Analysis 3.35
3.5 Land Environment 3.35
3.5.1 Geological & Hydrogeological Status of the Area 3.35
3.5.2 Mineral Reserves 3.38
3.5.3 Seismic Effect 3.38
3.5.4 Land Use Pattern 3.38
3.5.5 Soil Environment 3.42
3.5.6 Interpretation of Soil quality analysis 3.45
3.6 Biological Environment 3.46
3.6.1 Objectives Of The Study 3.46
3.6.2 Methodology Of The Floral And Faunal Study 3.46
EIA Report - Index

2
3.6.3 Description of the Project Site & Study Area 3.47

3.6.4 Details of Flora in The Study Area 3.48
3.6.5 Details Of Fauna in The Study Area 3.50
3.6.6 Interpretation Of Biological Environment Study 3.52
3.7 Socio Economic Environment 3.54
CHAPTER – 4 : Anticipated Environmental Impacts & Mitigation Measures

4.1 Introduction 4.1
4.2 Air Environment 4.1
4.2.1 Impact on Topography and Climate 4.2
4.2.1.1 Impact on Topography 4.2
4.2.1.2 Impact on Climate 4.2
4.2.2 Predictions of Impact on Air Environment 4.2
4.2.3 Stack Height Calculation 4.4
4.2.4 Incremental Ground Level Concentrations 4.9
4.3 Prediction of Impacts on Water Environment 4.21
4.3.2 Wastewater Generation 4.23
4.3.3 Impact on Surface Water Bodies 4.24
4.4 Prediction of Impacts due to Noise 4.25
4.4.1 Prediction of Impact Due to the Proposed Activity 4.25
4.4.2 Prediction of Impacts on Community 4.26
4.4.3 Prediction of Impact on Occupational Health 4.26
4.5 Prediction of Impacts on Land Environment 4.26
4.6 Prediction of Impacts Due to Vehicular Movement 4.27
4.7 Prediction Of Impacts On Flora & Fauna 4.30
4.8 Prediction of Impacts on Socio Economic Environment 4.30
CHAPTER – 5 : Analysis of Alternatives [Technology & Site]

5.1 Alternative Technologies 5.1
5.2 Alternative Sites 5.1
CHAPTER – 6 : Environmental Monitoring Programme

6.1 Technical Aspects 6.1
6.1.1 Methodology 6.1
6.1.2 Frequency & Locations of Environmental Monitoring 6.2
6.1.3 Data Analysis 6.3
6.1.4 Reporting Schedule 6.3
6.1.5 Emergency Procedures 6.3
6.1.6 Detailed Budget & Procurement Schedules 6.4
CHAPTER – 7 : Additional Studies

7.2 Public Consultation 7.1
7.2.1 Proceeding of Public Hearing 7.1
7.2.2 Public Hearing Notice in News Paper 7.2
EIA Report - Index

3
7.2.3 Public Hearing Photographs 7.3

7.2.4 Management Response for the Issues Raised During Public Hearing & 7.4
Action Plan
7.2.5 Activities Proposed Under Social Development Activities Based on Public 7.7
Hearing / Consultation
7.3 Risk Assessment 7.8
7.3.1 Introduction 7.8
7.3.2 Scope of Study 7.8
7.3.3 Fire Protection System 7.8
7.3.4 Methodology of MCA Analysis 7.9
7.3.5 Fire & Explosion and Toxicity Index 7.9
7.3.6 Assessment of Risk at M/s. Real Ispat & Power Limited 7.10
7.3.7 Risk & Consequence Analysis of Fire 7.28
7.3.7.1 Methodology 7.29
7.4 Disaster Management Plan 7.30
7.4.1 Disasters 7.30
7.4.2 Objectives of Disaster Management of Plan 7.30
7.4.3 Emergencies 7.31
7.4.3.1 General, Industrial, Emergencies 7.31
7.4.3.2 Specific Emergencies Anticipated 7.31
7.4.3.3 Emergency Organization 7.32
7.4.3.4 Emergency Communication 7.32
7.4.3.5 Emergency Responsibilities 7.32
7.4.3.5.1 Site Controller 7.33
7.4.3.5.2 Incident Controller 7.33
7.4.3.5.3 Emergency-Coordinator, Rescue, Fire Fighting 7.34
7.4.3.5.4 Emergency-Coordinator, Medical, Mutual Aid, Rehabilitation, Transport 7.35
and Communication
7.4.3.5.5 Emergency-Coordinator, Essential Services 7.35
7.4.3.5.6 General Responsibilities of Employees during an Emergency 7.36
7.4.3.6 Emergency Facilities 7.36
7.4.3.6.1 Emergency Control Centre 7.36
7.4.3.6.2 Emergency Power Supply 7.37
7.4.3.6.3 Fire Fighting Facilities 7.37
7.4.3.6.4 Location of Wind Sock 7.37
7.4.3.6.5 Emergency Medical Facilities 7.37
7.4.3.7 Emergency Actions 7.37
7.4.3.7.1 Emergency Warning 7.37
7.4.3.7.2 Emergency Shutdown 7.38
7.4.3.7.3 Evacuation of Personnel 7.38
7.4.3.7.4 All Clear Signal 7.38
7.5 Occupational Health and Surveillance 7.38
7.5.1 Occupational Health 7.38
7.5.2 Construction & Erection 7.39
7.5.3 Operation & Maintenance 7.39
7.5.4 Occupational Health Hazards 7.39
7.6 Safety Plan 7.42
EIA Report - Index
4
7.6.1 Safety Organization 7.43

7.6.1.1 Construction and Erection Phase 7.43
7.6.1.2 Operation & Maintenance Phase 7.43
7.6.1.3 Safety Circle 7.44
7.6.2 Safety Training 7.44
7.6.3 Health and Safety Monitoring Plan 7.44
7.7 Social Impact Assessment Study 7.44
7.7.1 Legislative & Regulatory Considerations 7.44
7.7.2 Objective 7.45
7.7.3 Scope 7.45
7.7.4 Approach & Methodology 7.46
7.7.5 Study Area 7.47
7.7.6 Project Impact Zones 7.47
7.7.7 Baseline Data And Analysis of Surveyed Villages 7.49
7.7.7.1 Desktop Review / Research 7.49
7.7.7.2 Field Survey 7.51
7.7.7.3 Data Analysis & Its Interpretation 7.51
7.7.8 Socio Economic Status based on Field observation 7.56
7.7.9 Interpretation on Socio Economic Study 7.60
7.7.10 Conclusion 7.63
7.8 R & R Action Plan 7.64
CHAPTER – 8 : Project Benefit

8.1 Physical Infrastructure 8.1
8.2 Socio Infrastructure 8.1
8.3 Employment Potential 8.1
8.4 Socio-Economic Developmental Activities Proposed 8.2
CHAPTER – 9 : Environmental Cost Benefits

9.0 Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis 9.1
CHAPTER – 10 : Environmental Management Plan

10.2 Management during Construction phase 10.2
10.2.1 Site Preparation 10.2
10.2.2 Water Supply & Sanitation 10.2
10.2.3 Fuel & Rest Rooms Facility 10.2
10.2.4 Noise 10.2
10.2.5 Maintenance of Vehicles 10.3
10.2.6 Waste 10.3
10.2.7 Storage of Hazardous Material 10.3
10.2.8 Land Environment 10.3
10.3 Post Construction Phase 10.3
10.3.1 Air Emission Management 10.3
10.3.1.1 Dust Extraction and Dust Suppression System 10.4
10.3.1.2 Technical Specifications of Control Systems 10.6
EIA Report - Index

5
10.3.2 Action Plan for Control and Monitoring of Fugitive Emissions 10.9
10.3.2.1 Control of Fugitive Emissions from Sponge Iron Plant 10.11
10.3.2.2 Dust Suppression System 10.12
10.3.2.3 Internal Roads 10.12
10.3.2.4 Interlocking System 10.12
10.3.3 Compliance on CREP Recommendations 10.12
10.3.4 Wastewater Management 10.12
10.3.5 Solid Waste Generation & its Disposal 10.15
10.3.6 Noise Level Management 10.17
10.3.8 Measures for Improvement of Ecology 10.18
10.3.8.1 Green Belt Development 10.19
10.3.9 Rainwater Harvesting 10.21
10.3.10 Energy & Water Conservation 10.22
10.4 Post Project Monitoring Strategy 10.23
10.5 Cost for Environmental Protection 10.23
10.6 Corporate Environment Policy 10.26
CHAPTER – 11 : Summary
11.1 Project Description 11.1
11.1.1 Environmental Setting Within 10Km.radius of the plant site 11.3
11.1.2 Plant Configuration and Production capacity 11.3
11.1.3 Raw Materials Requirement 11.4
11.1.4 Manufacturing Process 11.6
11.1.4.1 Iron Ore Beneficiation 11.6
11.1.4.2 Pelletization 11.7
11.1.4.3 Manufacturing of Sponge Iron (DRI) 11.7
11.1.4.4 Steel Melting Shop 11.8
11.1.4.5 Manufacturing of Rolled products through Rolling Mill 11.8
11.1.4.6 Manufacturing of Ferro Alloys through SEAF 11.8
11.1.4.7 Producer Gas plant (Gasifier) 11.8
11.1.4.8 Power Generation 11.9
11.1.6 Wastewater Generation 11.10
11.1.7 Wastewater Characteristics 11.11
11.2 Description of Environment 11.11
11.2.1 Ambient air quality 11.11
11.2.2 Water Quality 11.11
11.2.2.1 Surface Water Quality 11.11
11.2.2.2 Ground Water Quality 11.12
11.2.3 Noise levels 11.12
11.3 Anticipated Environmental Impacts and mitigation Measures 11.12
11.3.1 Prediction of impacts on air quality 11.12
11.3.2 Prediction of impacts on Noise Quality 11.13
11.3.3 Predicted of impacts on water environment 11.13
11.3.4 Prediction of impacts on land environment 11.14
EIA Report - Index

6
11.3.5 Socio – Economic Environment 11.14

11.4 Environmental Monitoring Programme 11.14
11.5 Additional Studies 11.15
11.6 Project Benefits 11.15
11.7 Environment Management plan 11.15
11.7.1 Air Environment 11.15
11.7.2 Water Environment 11.16
11.7.3 Noise Environment 11.17
11.7.5 Greenbelt Development 11.19
11.7.6 Cost for Environment Protection 11.19
11.7.7 Implementation of CREP recommendations 11.19
CHAPTER – 12 : Disclosure of Consultant

12.0 Disclosure of Consultant Engaged 12.1
List of Annexures
Annexure Documents
Minutes of Meeting 50th meeting of State Water Resource Utilization
Annexure – 1
Committee, Chhattisgarh
Annexure – 2 AAQ One season data
Annexure – 3 Letter for Utilization of Fly Ash
Annexure – 4 Letter for Utilization of Slag
Annexure – 5 Consent for supply of Iron Ore
Annexure – 6 MOU for supply of Imported Coal
Annexure – 7 Public Hearing Proceeding (Hindi & Authenticated English translated)
EIA Report - Index

7
TORs COMPLIANCE
Compliance made on TOR issued by Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEF&CC) Vide letter No. J-11011/411/2019-IA II (I)
dated 20th January 2020
Specific TORs
TOR No. TOR point raised TOR Compliance
i. No dumping of char is permitted. We do here by confirm the that we will not dump the
Dolochar/Char in open area. It is will be stored in designated
storage yard with pucca platform and later will be utilised in the
proposed FBC based power plant as fuel.
ii. Provision for industrial vacuum cleaner to control the fugitive emissions We have provided budget provision for 3 no.s of Industrial
shall be made. Vaccum Cleaners / Mechanical Dust Sweepers under
Environment Management Plan budget to control the fugitive
emissions.
iii. No tailing pond is allowed. No Tailing pond is proposed in the proposed project.
Tailing will be taken to filter press & recovered the water. Cake
of tailing will be stored in tailing yard & it will given to M/s.
Ambuja Cement Ltd. for utilisation in their cement
manufacturing unit.
iv. Briquetting of the dust shall be carried out. We do here by confirm that, we will install briquetting plant of
capacity 200 Kg/hr, for briquetting of dust generated from the
proposed project.
v. Air-cooled condenser shall be installed in the power plant. While applying for grant of TOR for the proposed project, we
have proposed Water cooled condenser for the Power Plant,
with total water required for 13,255 KLD. However committee
suggested to opt for Air Cooled Condenser for Power Plant in
view of water conservation. Accordingly TOR has been
stipulated.
EIA report – TOR Compliance

i

Subsequently Air Cooled condeser are proposed in the power
plant in the proposed project. Hence total water consumption
is revised to 5640 KLD.
vi. Closed loop system in the producer gas plant shall be provided. Effluent from Gasifier will have mainly phenolic compounds
and will be used in After Burning Chamber of DRI kilns for
quenching and to regulate the temperature of the hot flue gas
in accordance with inlet requirement of waste heat recovery
Boiler. Hence no effluent will be discharged.
vii. Particulate emissions from the stacks shall be less than 30 mg/Nm3 with bag Kindly refer to page no. 2.47 of Chapter # 2 of EIA report for Air
house as APCD. Emission from ESP shall be less than 50 mg/Nm3. Emission Management details.
viii. 100 % solid waste utilization shall be adopted. Kindly refer to page no. 2.58 of Chapter # 2 of EIA report for
Solid waste generation, utilization and its disposal.
ix. Traffic management plan to avoid congestion on the roads shall be Major raw materials will be transported through railway rakes
furnished. as the proposed Railway siding is at 0.5 Kms. from the Site and
then to the site through road by covered trucks. Hence, the
Vehicular traffic will be minimized due to Rail transportation.
x. Explore the possibility of railway siding for transportation of raw materials/ Major raw materials will be transported through railway rakes
finished products and the outcomes shall be submitted as part of the EIA as the proposed Railway siding is at 0.5 Kms. from the Site and
report. then to the site through road by covered trucks. Hence, the
Vehicular traffic will be minimized due to Rail transportation.
Kindly refer to page no. 4.27 of Chapter # 4 of EIA report for
Traffic Study.
xi. Explore the possibility of reducing no. of DRI kilns while maintaining the Earlier we have proposed 2x650 TPD, 2x350 TPD & 2x100 TPD
same production level. of DRI kilns.
Now it is proposed to install 1x200 TPD DRI Kilns instead of
2x100 TPD DRI kilns.
Kindly refer to page no. 2.14 of Chapter # 2 of EIA report.
xii. No Ferro-Chrome shall be manufactured without clearance from MoEF&CC. We do here by assure that No Ferro-Chrome shall be
manufactured without clearance from MoEF&CC.
xiii. Fourth hole extraction system shall be installed in SAF.
ii

We do here by assure to install 4th Hole extraction system for
Submerged Electric Arc Furnace.
Kindly refer to page no. 2.45 of Chapter # 2 of EIA report for Air
Emission Management details.
xiv. Public Hearing is to be conducted by the concerned State Pollution Control Public Hearing for proposed proposal was conducted on 4th
Board. The issues raised during the public hearing and commitment of the February 2021 at 11:00 AM at Project site, Bakulahi &
project proponent to address the same shall be compiled and submitted in Dhourabhata Villages, Bhatapara Tehsil, Baloda Bazar –
a time bound action plan. The action plan shall, inter alia, contain the year- Bhatapara District, Chhattisgarh.
wise activities with corresponding financial allocations. Kindly refer to page no. 7.4 of Chapter # 7 of EIA report for
issues raised during the public hearing and management
reposnse for the issues raised.
Kindy refer to Annexure - 7 for Public Hearing proceedings.
GENERIC TORs IN RESPECT OF INDUSTRY SECTOR

1. Executive Summary Kindly refer to Chapter # 11 of EIA report
2. Introduction
i. Details of the EIA Consultant including NABET accreditation Kindly refer to Chapter # 12 of EIA report
ii. Information about the project proponent Kindly refer to page no. 1.4 of Chapter # 1 of EIA report.
iii. Importance and benefits of the project Kindly refer to page no. 1.7 of Chapter # 1 of EIA report.
3. Project Description
i. Cost of project and time of completion. Kindly refer to page no. 2.16 & 2.17 of Chapter # 2 of EIA
report.
ii. Products with capacities for the proposed project. Kindly refer to page no. 2.15 of Chapter # 2 of EIA report.
iii. If expansion project, details of existing products with capacities and The proposed project is a Greenfield project.
whether adequate land is available for expansion, reference of
earlier EC if any. Total land envisaged for the entire project is 156.909 Acres
(63.52 Ha.).

iii

land details for proposed Greenfield project.
iv. List of raw materials required and their source along with mode of Kindly refer to page no. 2.16 of Chapter # 2 of EIA report.
transportation
v. Other chemicals and materials required with quantities and storage Maximum quantity of HFO (Heavy Fuel Oil), LDO (Light
capacities Diesel Oil) stored at site will be 1 x 25 m3 & 2 x 100 m3
capacity respectively
vi. Details of Emission, effluents, hazardous waste generation and their Kindly refer to page no. 2.43 of Chapter # 2 of EIA report for
management Stack emission details.
Air Emission Management details.
effluent generation and its management details.
hazardous waste generation and is management.
vii. Requirement of water, power, with source of supply, status of Water required for the proposed project will be 5640 KLD
approval, water balance diagram, man-power requirement (regular and same will be sourced from Silva Anicut of Shivnath River
and contract) which is at 7.8 Kms. from the project site.
Water allocation has been recommended from Selva Anicut
of Shivnath River from Water Resource Department, Govt.
of Chhattisgarh, vide 50th meeting of State Water Resource
Utilization Committee, Chhattisgarh dt. 13.07.2021 and
same is enclosed as Annexure - 1
Water will be stored in Reservoir, which will be formed in
the additional land proximate to the project site for
utilisation of water during lean season to the plant water
requirement.

iv

Kindly refer to page no. 4.21 & 4.22 of Chapter # 4 EIA
report for detailed water requirement breakup and water
balance diagram.
Power required for the proposed project will be sourced
majorly from captive power generation & partly from
nearby Grid. Kindly refer to page no. 2.45 of Chapter # 2 of
EIA report Power requirement to each unit.
Kindly refer to page 2.45 of Chapter # 2 of EIA report for

Man power requirement (regular & contract)
viii. Process description along with major equipment’s and machineries, Kindly refer to page no. 2.21 to 2.43 of Chapter # 2 of EIA
process flow sheet (quantitative) from raw material to products to report for process description.
be provided
ix. Hazard identification and details of proposed safety systems Kindly refer to Page no. 7.8 to 7.29 of Chapter # 7 of EIA
report
x. Expansion / modernization proposals
a. Copy of all the Environmental Clearance(s) including Amendments Earlier MoEF&CC has accorded EC for the Steel Plant vide
thereto obtained for the project from MOEF/SEIAA shall be attached letter no. J-11011 / 170 / 2009 – IA II (I) dated 25th March
as an Annexure. A certified copy of the latest Monitoring Report of 2010 in the same location with 300 Acres of land.
the Regional Office of the Ministry of Environment and Forests as
per circular dated 30th May, 2012 on the status of compliance of Project could not be implemented due to delay in land
conditions stipulated in all the existing environmental clearances acquisition & sluggish industrial scenario.
including Amendments shall be provided. In addition, status of
compliance of Consent to Operate for the ongoing /existing EC validity of 7 years has been expired on 25th March 2017
operation of the project from SPCB shall be attached with the EIA- and could not submit the request letter to MoEF&CC for
EMP report. Extension of validity of EC before the expiry of validity
period.

v

Now fresh proposal has been submitted to MOEF&CC for
grant of EC as per the provisions of EIA notification dated
14-09-2006 and its amendments thereof.
For the present proposal (with revised plant configuration)

156.909 Acres of land is envisaged and is already acquired
by the Project Authorities.
Hence Not Applicable.

b. In case the existing project has not obtained environmental Not applicable
clearance, reasons for not taking EC under the provisions of the EIA
Notification 1994 and/or EIA Notification 2006 shall be provided.
Copies of Consent to Establish/No Objection Certificate and Consent
to Operate (in case of units operating prior to EIA Notification 2006,
CTE and CTO of FY 2005-2006) obtained from the SPCB shall be
submitted. Further, compliance report to the conditions of consents
from the SPCB shall be submitted.
4. Site Details
i. Location of the project site covering village, Taluka/Tehsil, District Kindly refer to page no. 2.3 of Chapter # 2 of EIA report for
and State, Justification for selecting the site, whether other sites location of the project site.
were considered.
Environmental Setting within 10 Km. radius of the project
site.

Justification for selecting the site.
ii. A toposheet of the study area of radius of 10 km and site location Kindly refer to page no. 2.10 of Chapter # 2 of EIA report.
on 1:50,000/1:25,000 scale on an A3/A2 sheet, (including all eco-
sensitive areas and environmentally sensitive places)

vi

iii. Co-ordinates (lat-long) of all four corners of the site. Kindly refer to page no. 2.3 of Chapter # 2 of EIA report for
coordinates of the project site.
iv. Google map-Earth downloaded of the project site. Kindly refer to page no. 2.5 of Chapter # 2 of EIA report for
Google Earth map showing location of the project site.
v. Layout maps indicating existing unit as well as proposed unit The proposed project is a Greenfield project.
indicating storage area, plant area, greenbelt area, utilities etc. If Kindly refer to page no. 2.13 of Chapter # 2 for Plant layout
located within an Industrial area/Estate/Complex, layout of showing proposed units including storage area, plant area,
Industrial Area indicating location of unit within the Industrial greenbelt area, utilities etc.
area/Estate.
vi. Photographs of the proposed and existing (if applicable) plant site. Kindly refer to page no. 2.6 & 2.7 of Chapter # 2 of EIA
If existing, show photographs of plantation/greenbelt, in particular. report.
vii. Landuse break-up of total land of the project site (identified and Kindly refer to page no. 2.11 of Chapter # 2 of EIA report.
acquired), government/private - agricultural, forest, wasteland,
water bodies, settlements, etc shall be included, (not required for
industrial area)
viii. A list of major industries with name and type within study area Kindly refer to page no. 2.11 of Chapter # 2 of EIA report for
(10km radius) shall be incorporated. major industries within 10 Km radius of the project site.
Land use details of the study area Kindly refer to page no. 3.38 of Chapter # 3 of EIA report for
land use details of the study area.
ix. Geological features and Geo-hydrological status of the study area Kindly refer to page no. 3.35 of Chapter # 3 of EIA report.
shall be included.
x. Details of Drainage of the project upto 5km radius of study area. If There are no major river within 1Kms. radius of the project.
the site is within 1 km radius of any major river, peak and lean
season river discharge as well as flood occurrence frequency based Shivnath River which is at 5.9 Kms. from the project site.
on peak rainfall data of the past 30 years. Details of Flood Level of
the project site and maximum Flood Level of the river shall also be However kindly refer to page no. 3.37 of Chapter # 3 for
provided, (mega green field projects) Drainage pattern map of the Study area.

vii

xi. Status of acquisition of land. If acquisition is not complete, stage of The total land envisaged for the proposed project is under
the acquisition process and expected time of complete possession possession of the management. Kindly refer to page no.
of the land. 2.11 of Chapter # 2 of EIA report for land details.
xii. R & R details in respect of land in line with state Government policy Not applicable as there are no habitation in the land
envisaged for the proposed project.
5. Forest and Wildlife related issues (if applicable)
i. Permission and approval for the use of forest land (forestry Not applicable, as there is no forest land involved in the
clearance), if any, and recommendations of the State Forest proposed project site.
Department, (if applicable)
ii. Landuse map based on High resolution satellite imagery (GPS) of the Kindly refer to page no. 3.38 & 3.41 for Satellite imagery and
proposed site delineating the forestland (in case of projects LULC map.
involving forest land more than 40 ha)
iii. Status of Application submitted for obtaining the stage I forestry Not applicable, as there is no forest land involved in the
clearance along with latest status shall be submitted. proposed Project site.
iv. The projects to be located within 10 km of the National Parks, Not applicable, as there no National Parks, Sanctuaries,
Sanctuaries, Biosphere Reserves, Migratory Corridors of Wild Biosphere Reserves, Migratory Corridors of Wild Animals
Animals, the project proponent shall submit the map duly within 10 Km. radius of the project site.
authenticated by Chief Wildlife Warden showing these features vis-
a-vis the project location and the recommendations or comments of
the Chief Wildlife Warden-thereon
v. Wildlife Conservation Plan duly authenticated by the Chief Wildlife Not applicable, as there are no Schedule- I fauna exists in
Warden of the State Government for conservation of Schedule I the study area.
fauna, if any exists in the study area
vi. Copy of application submitted for clearance under the Wildlife Not applicable
(Protection) Act, 1972, to the Standing Committee of the National
Board for Wildlife
6. Environmental Status
i. Determination of atmospheric inversion level at the project site and Kindly refer to page no. 4.2 of Chapter # 4 of EIA report.
site-specific micro-meteorological data using temperature, relative
humidity, hourly wind speed and direction and rainfall; Kindly refer to page no. 3.2 of Chapter # 3 of EIA report.
viii

ii. AAQ data (except monsoon) at 8 locations for PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx, Kindly refer to page no. 3.6 to 3.13 of Chapter # 3 of EIA
CO and other parameters relevant to the project shall be collected. report.
The monitoring stations shall be based CPCB guidelines and take into
account the pre-dominant wind direction, population zone and
sensitive receptors including reserved forests.
iii. Raw data of all AAQ measurement for 12 weeks of all stations as per Kindly refer to ANNEXURE # 2
frequency given in the NAQQM Notification of Nov. 2009 along with
-min., max., average and 98% values for each of the AAQ parameters
from data of all AAQ stations should be provided as an annexure to
the EIA Report.
iv. Surface water quality of nearby River (60m upstream and Kindly refer to page no. 3.20 to 3.24 of Chapter # 3 of EIA
downstream) and, other surface drains at eight locations as per report.
CPCB/MoEF&CC guidelines.
v. Whether the site falls near to polluted stretch of river identified by No, proposed site does not falls near to polluted stretch of
the CPCB/MoEF&CC. river identified by CPCB/MoEFCC.
vi. Ground water monitoring at minimum at 8 locations shall be Kindly refer to page no. 3.24 to 3.35 of Chapter # 3 of EIA
included. report.
vii. Noise levels monitoring at 8 locations within the study area. Kindly refer to page no. 3.17 to 3.19 of Chapter # 3 of EIA
report.
viii. Soil Characteristic as per CPCB guidelines Kindly refer to page no. 3.42 to 3.45 of Chapter # 3 of EIA
report.
ix. Traffic study of the area, type of vehicles, frequency of vehicles for Kindly refer to page no. 4.27 to 4.29 of Chapter # 4 of EIA
transportation of materials, additional traffic due to proposed report for Traffic Study.
project, parking arrangement etc.
x. Detailed description of flora and fauna (terrestrial and aquatic) Kindly refer to page no. 3.46 to 3.54 of Chapter # 3 of EIA
existing in the study area shall be given with special reference to report for detailed description of flora and fauna (terrestrial
rare, endemic and endangered species. If Schedule-I fauna are and aquatic) existing in the study area.
found within the study area, a Wildlife Conservation Plan shall be
prepared and furnished.

ix

xi. Socio-economic status of the study area Kindly refer to page no. 3.54 to 3.74 of Chapter # 3 of EIA
report for details Socio economic profile of the study area.
Kindly refer to page no. 7.44 to 7.64 of Chapter # 7 of EIA
report for details Socio Economic Study.
7. Impact Assessment and Environment Management Plan
i. Assessment of ground level concentration of pollutants from the Kindly refer to page no. 4.2 to 4.13 of Chapter # 4 of EIA
stack emission based on site-specific meteorological features. In report.
case the project is located on a hilly terrain, the AQIP Modelling shall
be done using inputs of the specific terrain characteristics for Kindly refer to page no. 4.13 to 4.20 for Ground level
determining the potential impacts of the project on the AAQ. concentrations & Air Quality isopleths.
Cumulative impact of all sources of emissions (including
transportation) on the AAQ of the area shall be well assessed.
Details of the model used and the input data used for modeling shall
also be provided. The air quality contours shall be plotted on a
location map showing the location of project site, habitation nearby,
sensitive receptors, if any.
ii. Water Quality modelling - in case, if the effluent is proposed to be  There will be no effluent discharge from the I/O ore
discharged in to the local drain, then Water Quality Modelling study beneficiation, Pellet Plant, DRI plant, SMS & Ferro Alloy
should be conducted for the drain water taking into consideration unit as closed-circuit cooling system will be adopted.
the upstream and downstream quality of water of the drain.  Air Cooled condensers will be provided in the power
plant, which will be reduce the water consumption
significantly. Hence wastewater generation will also be
minimized.
 Thickener overflow from I/ O beneficiation process will
be recycled along with makeup water. Thickener under
flow will be taken to slime pond & will be treated in
settling tank and reused in process.
 Effluent from Rolling Mill will be sent to settling tank &
will be recycled through closed circuit cooling system.

x

 Effluent from power plant will be treated in ETP and after
ensuring compliance with SPCB norms, it will be utilized
for dust suppression, ash conditioning and for greenbelt
development.
 Sanitary wastewater will be treated in STP and the
treated sewage will be utilized for dust suppression, ash
conditioning and for greenbelt development.
 Zero effluent discharge will be maintained.
 Garland drains will be provided around all the raw
material stacking areas.
iii. Impact of the transport of the raw materials and end products on Kindly refer to page no. 4.27 of Chapter # 4 of EIA report.
the surrounding environment shall be assessed and provided. In this
regard, options for transport of raw materials and finished products
and wastes (large quantities) by rail or rail-cum road transport or
conveyor-cum-rail transport shall be examined.
iv. A note on treatment of wastewater from different plant operations, Kindly refer to page no. 10.13 to 10.15 of Chapter # 10 of
extent recycled and reused for different purposes shall be included. EIA report.
Complete scheme of effluent treatment. Characteristics of
untreated and treated effluent to meet the prescribed standards of
discharge under E(P) Rules.
v. Details of stack emission and action plan for control of emissions to Kindly refer to page no. 2.43 of Chapter # 2 of EIA report for
meet standards. Stack emission details.
Kindly refer to page no. 10.3 of Chapter # 10 of EIA report
for control of emissions to meet standards.
vi. Measures for fugitive emission control Kindly refer to page no.10.9 of Chapter # 10 of EIA report.
vii. Details, of hazardous waste generation and their storage, utilization Kindly refer to page no. 2.58 of Chapter # 2 of EIA report.
and disposal. Copies of MOU regarding utilization of solid and
hazardous waste shall also be included. EMP shall include the Kindly refer to ANNEXURE – 3 for expression of Intrest
concept of waste-minimization, recycle/reuse/recover techniques, letters from M/s. Ambuja Cement for utilisation of Ash.
Energy conservation, and natural resource conservation.
xi

Kindly refer to ANNEXURE – 4 for expression of Intrest
letters for utilisation of Slag & Tar.
viii. Proper 'utilization of fly ash shall be ensured as per Fly Ash Kindly refer to ANNEXURE – 3 for expression of Intrest
Notification, 2009. A detailed plan of action shall be provided. letters from M/s. Ambuja Cement for utilisation of Ash
ix. Action plan for the green belt development plan in 33 % area i.e. Kindly refer to page no.10.19 to 10.21 of Chapter # 10 of
land with not less than 1,500 trees per ha. Giving details of species, EIA report.
width of plantation, planning schedule etc. shall be included. The
green belt shall be around the project boundary and a scheme for
greening of the roads used for the project shall also be incorporated.
x. Action plan for rainwater harvesting measures at plant site shall be Kindly refer to page no.10.21 of Chapter # 10 of EIA report.
submitted to harvest rainwater from the rooftops and storm water
drains to recharge the ground water and also to use for the various
activities at the project site to conserve fresh water and reduce the
water requirement from other sources.
xi. Total capital cost and recurring cost/annum for environmental Kindly refer to page no.10.24 of Chapter # 10 of EIA report.
pollution control measures shall be included.
xii. Action plan for post-project environmental monitoring shall be Kindly refer to page no.10.23 of Chapter # 10 of EIA report.
submitted.
xiii. Onsite and Offsite Disaster (Natural and Man-made) Preparedness Kindly refer to page no. 7.8 to 7.38 of Chapter # 7 of EIA
and Emergency Management Plan including Risk Assessment and report.
damage control. Disaster management plan should be linked with
District Disaster Management Plan.
8. Occupational Health
i. Details of existing Occupational & Safety Hazards. What are the The proposed project is Greenfield project. Hence there no
exposure levels of above mentioned hazards and whether they are existing Occupational & Safety Hazards arise.
within Permissible Exposure level (PEL). If these are not within PEL, Anticipated Occupational & Safety Hazards & measures
what measures the company has adopted to keep them within PEL taken to protect the health of workers are furnished in page
so that health of the workers can be preserved, no. 7.38 to 7.42 of Chapter # 7 of EIA report.
ii. Details of exposure specific health status evaluation of worker. If the NOT APPLICABLE AS IT IS A GREENFIELD PROEJCT.
workers' health is being evaluated by pre designed format, chest x
xii

rays, Audiometry, Spirometry, Vision testing (Far & Near vision, However Medical records of each employee will be
colour vision and any other ocular defect) ECG, during pre- maintained separately and will be updated as per finding
placement and periodical examinations give the details of the same. during monitoring. Age, sex wise, department wise data on
Details regarding last month analyzed data of abovementioned the above parameters will be maintained and submitted to
parameters as per age, sex, duration of exposure and department the ministry.
wise.
Medical records of the employee at the end of his / her term
will be updated.
Please refer to page no. 7.38 to 7.42 of Chapter # 7 of EIA
report.
iii. Annual report of health status of workers with special reference to NOT APPLICABLE AS IT’S A GREENFIELD PROEJCT.
Occupational Health and Safety.
iv. Plan and fund allocation to ensure the occupational health & safety Kindly refer to page no. 7.27 of Chapter # 7 & page no.
of all contract and casual workers. 10.23 of Chapter # 10 of EIA report.
9. Corporate Environment Policy

i. Does the company have a well laid down Environment Policy approved The company has well laid down Environment Policy,
by its Board of Directors? If so, it may be detailed in the EIA report. approved by Managing Director. Plant Head will be
authorized by the Board to sign, issue & modify the
Environment Policy.
ii. Does the Environment Policy prescribe for standard operating process The organization has developed procedure detailing
/ procedures to bring into focus any infringement / deviation / violation compliance with all aspects of Environmental norms
of the environmental or forest norms / conditions? If so, it may be including the process of corrective actions for its
detailed in the EIA. improvement.
The policy provides a framework for setting and reviewing
environmental objectives, which includes a commitment to
fulfil its compliance obligations, to the protection of the
environment, including prevention of pollution and other
specific commitment(s) relevant to the context of the
organization.
xiii

iii. What is the hierarchical system or Administrative order of the company An Environmental Officer will look all the environmental
to deal with the environmental issues and for ensuring compliance with issues and ensure the compliance with Environmental
the environmental clearance conditions? Details of this system may be Clearance conditions and will report to the Head of
given. Department, who will report to the Plant Head and ultimate
reporting would be to the Managing Director. Subsequently
it will be discussed in the Board meeting.
iv. Does the company have system of reporting of non-compliances / An Environmental Officer will look all the environmental
violations of environmental norms to the Board of Directors of the issues and ensure the compliance with Environmental
company and / or shareholders or stakeholders at large? This reporting Clearance conditions and will report to the Head of
mechanism shall be detailed in the EIA report Department, who will report to the Unit Head and ultimate
reporting would be to the Managing Director. Subsequently
it will be discussed in the Board meeting.
Kindly refer to page No. 10.26 to 10.28 of Chapter # 10 of

EIA report.
10. Details regarding infrastructure facilities such as sanitation, fuel, restroom Kindly refer to page no. 10.2 of Chapter # 10 of EIA report.
etc. to be provided to the labour force during construction as well as to the
casual workers including truck drivers during operation phase.
11. Enterprise Social Commitment (ESC)
i. To address the Public Hearing issues, an amount as specified under Kindly refer to page no. 8.2 to 8.8 of Chapter # 8 of EIA
Ministry’s Office Memorandum vide F.No. 22-65/2017-IA.III dated report for detailed ESC
1st May 2018 amounting to Rs. ............crores, shall be earmarked by
the project proponent, towards Corporate Environment
Responsibility (CER). Distinct CER projects shall be carved out based
on the local public hearing issues. Project estimate shall be prepared
based on PWD schedule of rates for each distinct Item and schedule
for time bound action plan shall be prepared. These CER projects as
indicated by the project proponent shall be implemented along with
the main project. Implementation of such program shall be ensured
by constituting a Committee comprising of the project proponent,

xiv

representatives of village Panchayat & District Administration.
Action taken report in this regard shall be submitted to the
Ministry’s Regional Office. No free distribution/donations and or
free camps shall be included in the above CER budget
12. Any litigation pending against the project and / or any direction / order No litigation is pending against the project and / or any
passed by any Court of Law against the project, if so, details thereof shall direction / order passed by any Court of Law against the
also be included. Has the unit received any notice under the Section 5 of project.
Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 or relevant Sections of Air and Water
Acts? If so, details thereof and compliance / ATR to the notice(s) and
present status of the case.
13. A tabular chart with index for point wise compliance of above TORs Noted
14. The TORs prescribed shall be valid for a period of three years for submission Noted
of the EIA-EMP reports along with Public Hearing Proceedings (wherever
stipulated).
ADDITIONAL TORS FOR INTEGRATED STEEL PLANTS – [ANNEXURE - 2]

TOR No. TOR Points TOR Compliance
1. Iron ore / coal linkage documents along with status of Environment MoU for supply of Iron Ore is enclosed as ANNEXURE # 5
Clearance of Iron ore mines and Coal mines
MoU for supply of Imported Coal is enclosed as ANNEXURE # 6.
2. Quantum of production of coal and iron ore from coal & iron ore Kindly refer to page No. 2.17 of Chapter # 2 of EIA report for source
mines and the projects they cater to. Mode of transportation to the of Raw material & quantity required.
plant and its impact. Kindly refer to page no. 4.27 of Chapter # 4 of EIA report for Impact
of the transport of the raw materials and end products.
3. For Large ISPs, a 3-D view i.e. DEM (Digital Elevation Mode) for the Not applicable, as proposed project is Mini Steel Plant.
area in 10 Km radius from the proposal site MRL details of the
project site and RL of nearby sources of water shall be indicated.

xv

4. Recent land use map based satellite imagery. High-resolution Kindly refer to page no. 3.38 to 3.41 of Chapter # 3 of EIA report for
satellite image data having 1m-5m spatial resolution like quickbird, land use map & satellite imagery.
Ikonos, IRS P-6 pan sharpened etc. for the 10 Km. radius area from
proposed site. The same shall be used for land used/land cover
mapping of the area.
5. PM (PM10 and PM2.5) present in the ambient air must be analysed Kindly refer to page no. 3.5 to 3.13 of Chapter # 3 of EIA report.
for sources – natural dust/RSPM generated from plant operation
(trace elements) of PM10 to be carried over.
6. All stock piles will have to be on top of a stable liner to avoid All the raw material required for the proposed steel plant will be
leaching of materials to ground water. stored on pucca platform above ground level.
Kindly refer to page No. 2.18 of Chapter # 2 of EIA report.
Solid wastes such as dolochar, accretion slag, granulated slag will be

stored in designated storage yard. Ash generated will be stored in
silos only. There will not be any open storage of fly ash. All other
storage yards will be on top of stable liner to avoid leaching of
material to ground water.
Kindly refer to page no. 10.16 of Chapter # 10 of EIA report.
7. Plan for the implementation of the recommendations made for the Kindly refer to page no. 10.12 of Chapter # 10 of EIA report.
steel plants in the CREP guidelines.
8. Plan for slag utilization Kindly refer to page no. 2.58 of Chapter # 2 of EIA report.
9. Plan for utilization of energy in off gases (coke oven, blast furnace) Not applicable, as coke oven and blast furnace are not envisaged in
the proposed project. However gases from DRI Kilns will be utilized in
the WHRB to generate power. Kindly refer to page no. 2.38 of
Chapter # 2 of EIA report.
10. System of coke quenching adopted with justification Not applicable, as coke oven is not envisaged in the proposed project
11. Trace metals Mercury, Arsenic and Fluoride emission in the raw The Trace metals such as Mercury, Arsenic in Imported coal are Below
material Detectable Levels (BDL).
12. Trace metals in waste material especially slag Trace metal analysis & TCLP analysis of Slag will be carried out upon
commencement of production. Slag disposal will be in accordance
xvi

with the MOEF&CC/CPCB/CECB norms. However, general
Composition of SMS Slag is furnished in page no. 2.58 of Chapter # 2
of EIA report.
13. Trace metals in water Kindly refer to page no. 3.24 of Chapter # 3 of EIA report.
14. Details of proposed layout clearly demarcating various units within Kindly refer to page no. 2.14 of Chapter # 2 of EIA report.
the plant
15. Complete process flow diagram describing each unit, it processes Kindly refer to page no. 2.21 to 2.43 of Chapter # 2 of EIA report for
and operations, along with material and energy inputs and outputs process flow diagram of each unit, it processes and operations.
(material and energy balance) Kindly refer to page no. 2.19 to 2.20 of Chapter # 2 of EIA report for
material balance.
Kindly refer to page no. 2.44 of Chapter # 2 of EIA report for Energy
balance.
16. Details on design and manufacturing process for all the units Kindly refer to page no. 2.22 to 2.43 of Chapter # 2 of EIA report for
design and manufacturing process for all the units proposed.
17. Details on environmentally sound technologies for recycling of Kindly refer to page no. 10.22 of Chapter # 10 of EIA report.
hazardous material, as per CPCB Guidelines, may be mentioned in
case of handling scrap and other recycled materials.
18. Details on requirement of energy and water along with its source Kindly refer to page no. 2.45 of Chapter # 2 of EIA report for Energy
and authorization from the concerned department. Location of requirement. Power requirement for plant will be sourced majorly
water intake and outfall points (with coordinates) from Captive Power generation and the remaining power will be
sourced from state grid.
Water required for the proposed project will be sourced from Silva
Anicut of Shivnath River which is at 5.9 Kms. from the project site..
Water allocation has been recommended from Selva Anicut of

Shivnath River from Water Resource Department, Govt. of
Chhattisgarh, vide 50th meeting of State Water Resource Utilization
Committee, Chhattisgarh dt. 13.07.2021 and same is enclosed as
Annexure - 1
xvii

Water will be stored in Reservoir to be formed in the additional land
proximate to the project site for utilisation of water during lean
season to the plant water requirement.
Kindly refer to page no. 4.21 & 4.23 of Chapter # 4 EIA report for
detailed water requirement breakup and water balance diagram.
Outfall point is not applicable as the proposal is zero discharge plant.

19. Details on toxic metal content in the waste material and its Trace metal analysis & TCLP analysis of Slag will be carried out upon
composition and end use (particularly of slag) commencement of production. Slag disposal will be in accordance
of EIA report.
20. Details on toxic content (TCLP), composition and end use of slag Trace metal analysis & TCLP analysis of Slag will be carried out upon
commencement of production. Slag disposal will be in accordance
of EIA report.

xviii
Baloda Bazar-Bhatapara (D), Chhattisgarh
CHAPTER – 1
INTRODUCTION
1
1.1 PURPOSE OF THE REPORT
Environmental management plays a vital role in sustainable development of a country.
Recognizing its importance, the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change,
Government of India had formulated policies and procedures governing the industrial and
other developmental activities to prevent indiscriminate exploitation of natural resources
and to promote integration of environmental concern in developmental projects.
Ministry of Environment, Forest & Climate Change (MoEF&CC) has made prior Environmental
Clearance (EC) for certain developmental projects mandatory through its notification issued
on 14th September 2006 and its subsequent amendment.
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is systematic process to identifying, predicting,

evaluating and mitigating the biophysical, social and other relevant environmental effects
due to the proposed developmental project. It plays a vital role in providing information for
decision-making on the environmental consequences of proposed projects. It promotes
environmentally sound and sustainable development through the identification
appropriate enhancement and mitigation measures.
The proposed project activity has both positive and negative impacts on the environment.
The negative impacts include environmental degradation and adverse socio economic
changes. It is the responsibility of the company to document the associated positive and
negative impacts, so that the attempts can be made to minimize the effects due to the
negative impacts and maximize the benefits due to the positive impacts. In this regards,
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) and Environmental Management Plan (EMP) have
been considered as the most important documentation in understanding the environmental
implications and safeguarding the environment.
EIA report – Chapter 1

1.1
1.2 IDENTIFICATION OF PROJECT & PROJECT PROPONENT

Steel is considered the backbone of national economical development. A vibrant steel
industry has historically been the foundation of a nation’s rapid industrial development and
is considered a yardstick for the improving standard of living of the people in a country. From
a small capacity of 22 million tons in FY 1991-92 prior to deregulation, India has become the
third largest producer of steel in the world with a production of over 100 million tons in FY
2017-18. However per capita steel used in the country is still very low at 69 Kg against the
world average of 218 Kg.
The current pace of growth and capacity creation in the country is in line with latest National
Steel Policy 2017. The Steel Policy envisages creation of a capacity of 300 million tons by
2030 from a current installed capacity of 125 million tons by end of 2017. Steel industry is
contributing about 2% of the country’s GDP. Its multiplier factor of growth is 1.4% on GDP
and has an employment generation multiplier factor of 6.8%. The new policy reflects long
term vision of Indian Government and focuses on enhancing domestic consumption to a
robust per capita consumption of 158 Kgs by 2030-31, through intensive development all over
the country in Infrastructure, Construction, Engineering & Fabrication, Automotive, Railways
Packaging, Energy, Ship Building, Oil & Gas and Defence Sectors.
Infrastructure & Construction Sector is the largest consumer of steel with 62% of total
steel consumption followed by 22% by Engineering & Fabrication Sector, 10% by
Automotive Sector, 3% by other Transport Sector & balance 3% by other end users.
TMT Bars & wire rods will be used for Infrastructure & Construction Sector. Wire rods will be
used for Automobile Sector, Railway Wagon Industry & white goods manufacture.
About the Project

Real Ispat & Power Limited has proposed to establish Steel Plant, a Greenfield Project, at
Bakulahi & Dhourabhata Villages, Bhatapara Tehsil, Baloda Bazar – Bhatapara District,
Chhattisgarh.
• Earlier MoEF has accorded EC for the Integrated Steel Plant vide letter no. J-11011 /
170 / 2009 – IA II (I) dated 25th March 2010 in the same location with 300 Acres of land.
• Project could not be implemented due to delay in land acquisition & sluggish industrial
scenario.

1.2
• EC validity of 7 years has been expired on 25th March 2017 and could not submit the
request letter to MoEF&CC for Extension of validity of EC before the expiry of validity
period.
• Now fresh proposal has been submitted to MoEF&CC for grant of EC as per the
provisions of EIA notification dated 14-09-2006 and its amendments thereof.
• For the present proposal (with revised plant configuration) 63.52 ha. (156.909 Acres)
of land is envisaged and same is already acquired by the Project Proponent.
Present proposal of Greenfield project comprises of establishment of Iron ore beneficiation

plant (2.0 MTPA), Pellet Plant (1.6 MTPA), Sponge Iron Plant (7,60,000 TPA), Steel Melting
Shop with CCM (Billets / Ingots / Hot Billets) (7,50,000 TPA), Ladle Refining Furnace (7,50,000
TPA), Rolling Mill with Standby Reheating Furnace 50 TPH (Rolled products / TMT Bars /
Structural Steel) (7,00,000 TPA), Coal Gasifier + PCI for Pellet Plant & Rolling Mill (80000
Nm3/hr), Ferro Alloy Plant 2 x 9 MVA (SiMn – 36,000 TPA / FeMn – 66,000 TPA / FeSi – 18,000
TPA / Pig Iron – 72,000 TPA), WHRB based Power Plant – 66 MW & CFBC based Power Plant
– 40 MW. Total land envisaged for the proposed project 63.52 ha. (156.909 Acres).
As per the Ministry of Environment, Forests & Climate Change, New Delhi, EIA notification
dated 14th September, 2006 & its subsequent amendments, all Primary metallurgical
processing industries are listed under S.No. 3(a), under Category ‘A’.
In order to obtain Environmental Clearance for the proposed Steel plant, Form-I, proposed
TOR along with Pre-Feasibility Report were submitted to the Honourable Ministry of
Environment, Forests & Climate Change (MoEF&CC), New Delhi on 27th November 2019 vide
Proposal no. IA/CG/IND/127880/2019. Presentation was made before the 14th meeting of the
Re-Constituted Expert Appraisal Committee (Industry - 1) held on 23rd December 2019 for the
approval of TOR (Terms of Reference) for EIA study. Subsequently TOR letter was issued vide
letter No. J-11011 / 411 / 2019 – IA II (I), dated 20th January 2020. Draft EIA report has been
prepared incorporating the Terms of Reference & submitted to Chhattisgarh Environment
Conservation Board (CECB) for conducting Public hearing / consultation. Public Hearing /
Consultation was conducted on 4th February 2021 by Chhattisgarh Environment Conservation
Board (CECB). Final EIA report has been prepared incorporating reply to issued raised in Public
Hearing / Consultation by the Management.
1.3
Pioneer Enviro Laboratories & Consultants Private Limited, Hyderabad, which is accredited by
NABET, Quality Council of India, vide certificate No. NABET/ EIA/ 1922/ RA 0149, for preparing
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) report for Metallurgical Unit, have prepared EIA
report for the proposed project.
This report furnishes the details of location of Site, Description of the project, prevailing
baseline status w.r.t Air Environment, Water Environment, Noise Environment, Land
Environment, Flora & Fauna and Socio-economic environment. This report also helps in
identification of environmental impacts and suggesting mitigation measures to be followed
during Construction and Operation of the proposed project as a part of Environmental
Management Plan. This report also acts as guidance manual for the proponent for following
the Environmental Management Plan (EMP) and for adopting post project Environmental
Monitoring Program as per statutory norms.
About Project Proponent [Gen. ToR # 2 (ii)]

Real Ispat and Power Limited is an integrated manufacturing firm and one of the fastest
growing companies with a strong presence in the steel and power sector. The company’s
success story is backed by an extraordinary history. The growth of the company has always
been ahead of the curve. A dream of creating a world-class company that pushes the
boundaries of manufacturing technology through innovation, disruption and a unique
management style was seeded a long time ago. The following are the Board of Directors of
the company.
Mr. Umesh Agrawal : Director
Mr. Basant Agrawal : Director
Mr. Shiv Agrawal : Director
Mr. Ritesh Jindal : Director
Real Ispat and Power Limited entered the steel sector in the year 2000 and has slowly and
steadily increased its contribution in the same ever since. The company has always believed
in stabilizing and perfecting the existing set-up before moving on to the next step and it is this
approach that has become our signature for success. RIPL caters to its clients through
unparalleled quality, personalized service and development of a bond unmatched by any

1.4
other. The multiple plants under the RIPL umbrella are all well versed with the latest
technologies and are led by teams that cease to surprise in terms of commitment, dedication
and creativity. These traits, which are valued quite highly and are a source for inspiration and
motivation, are reflected in our products and services.
Real Ispat and Power Limited true identity is imbedded in its contribution towards society.
The company is well known for its CSR activities that span through every aspect of human life
and the world we live in. We take immense pleasure in knowing that our efforts are helping
build a greener environment, a developed society and a much more sustainable future.
1.3 BRIEF DESCRIPTION

1.3.1 NATURE OF THE PROJECT
Real Ispat and Power Limited proposing to establish an Integrated Steel plant at Bakulahi &
Dhourabhata Villages, Bhatapara Tehsil, Baloda Bazar – Bhatapara District, Chhattisgarh. The
proposed Steel Plant will produce the following products:
Unit : Description
Iron ore beneficiation : Manufacturing of Iron ore concentrate using Iron ore fines as
raw materials
Pellet plant : Manufacturing of Pellet using Iron ore concentrate, Bentonite,
Limestone, Coke breeze as raw material.
Sponge Iron : Production of Sponge Iron from Iron Ore Pellets, Coal &
Dolomite. The waste flue gases from the kiln will pass through
WHRB and Power will be generated.
Induction Furnace : Manufacturing of MS and SS Ingots/ billets/ blooms using
Sponge Iron, Scrap, Ferro Alloys, Pig Iron as raw materials
Rolling Mill : Manufacturing of Rolled products / TMT Bars / Structural Steel
using MS Ingots / Steel Billets as raw materials.
Gasifier + PCI : Producer Gas + PCI generation utilizing Coal as raw material
for supplying fuel for Pellet Plant & Rolling Mill.
Submerged Electric : Manufacturing of Ferro Alloys using Manganese Ore, Quartz,
Arc Furnace Scrap, LAM coke, Electrode paste, etc. as raw materials.
Power Generation : The waste flue gases from the kiln will pass through WHRB for
Power Generation and through FBC Power Plant using Coal &
Dolochar as fuel.

1.5
1.3.2 SIZE OF THE PROPOSED PROJECT

The proposed Steel Plant envisages manufacturing of the following products
Table No. 1.3.1: Proposed Plant Configuration & Production Capacities
S.No. Unit (Products) Unit Configuration Production Capacities
1. Iron ore Beneficiation 2.0 MTPA 2.0 MTPA
(Beneficiated ore)
2. Pellet Plant 2 x 0.8 MTPA 1.6 MTPA
(Pellet)
3. Coal Gasifier + PCI For Pellet Plant & Rolling 10 x 8000 Nm3/hr 80,000 Nm3/hr
Mill
4. DRI Kilns 2 x 650 TPD + 7,60,000 TPA
(Sponge Iron) 2 x 350 TPD
+ 1 x 200 TPD *
5. Steel Melt Shop with CCM 5 x 30 T + 7,50,000 TPA
(Billets / Ingots / Hot Billets) 5 x 20 T +
twin Caster
6. Ladle Refining Furnace (LRF) 2 x 25 T & 1 x 35 T 7,50,000 TPA
(Billets / Ingots / Hot Billets)
7. Rolling Mill with Standby Reheating Furnace 2 x 3,50,000 TPA 7,00,000 TPA
50 TPH
(Rolled products / TMT Bars / Structural Steel)
8. Ferro Alloys Unit 2 x 9 MVA FeSi- 18,000 TPA /
(FeSi / FeMn / SiMn / Pig Iron) FeMn- 66,000 TPA /
SiMn- 36,000 TPA /
Pig Iron – 72,000 TPA
9. Power Plant WHRB 66 MW 66 MW
CFBC 40 MW 40 MW
MTPA stands for Million Tons per Annum
WHRB : Waste Heat Recovery Boiler
CFBC : Circulating Fluidized Bed Combustion
It is proposed to install briquetting plant of capacity 200 Kg/hr.
Note :
* as per Specific ToR (xi), instead of 2 x 100 TPD DRI Kilns it is proposed to install only 1 x 200 TPD Kiln
to reduce no. of Kilns in the proposal.
1.3.3 LOCATION OF THE PROJECT

Real Ispat and Power Limited proposing to establish an steel plant at Bakulahi & Dhourabhata
Villages, Bhatapara Tehsil, Baloda Bazar – Bhatapara District, Chhattisgarh. Total land
envisaged for the proposed project is 63.52 ha. (156.909 Acres). The entire project area will
fall in the Survey of India Topo sheet no. 64 G/13,G/14, K/1 & K/2.

1.6
1.3.4 IMPORTANCE OF PROJECT [Gen. ToR # 2 (iii)]

 Steel has been regarded as the most useful product for mankind.
 It reaches every home, and has a wide range of applications from a small pin to the
manufacture of automobiles, building of the railway systems, ships, big construction
projects, housing, oil rigs, nuclear power stations and so on.
 All these products play a key role in the growth of a country's more important sectors like
construction, power, oil and gas, engineering, railway and road transportation, port,
irrigation etc.
Benefits :
 Developmental activities will be carried out in the villages under CSR activities.
 The proposed project will generate lot of employment opportunities for the local people
apart from several indirect benefits.
 During the construction of the plant it is expected that about 1000 persons will get an
employment directly or indirectly whereas during operation about 1000 persons will be
benefited.
1.4 SCOPE OF THE STUDY

The scope of work includes a detailed characterization of the environment in an area of 10
Km. radius of the project site for various environmental parameters like Air, Water, Noise,
Land, Biological and Social-economic aspects.
The EIA Report is prepared in accordance with the Terms of Reference issued vide F.No. IA-J-
11011 / 411 / 2019 – IA II (I), dated 20th January 2020 by the Honourable Ministry of
Environment, Forests & Climate Change, New Delhi.
Generic Structure of the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) report as per the EIA
notification of the MoEF&CC, GoI dated 14th September 2006 and its subsequent
amendments is detailed below:
Ch. No. Heading

1. Introduction
2. Project Description

1.7
3. Description of the Environment

4. Anticipated Environmental Impact & Mitigation Measures
5. Analysis of Alternatives (Technology & Site)
6. Environmental Monitoring Program
7. Additional Studies
8. Project Benefits
9. Environmental Cost – Benefit Analysis
10. Environmental Management Plan (EMP)
11. Summary & Conclusion
12. Disclosure of Consultant engaged

1.8
CHAPTER – 2
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
2
2.1 TYPE OF PROJECT
Real Ispat and Power Limited proposing to establish an steel plant at Bakulahi & Dhourabhata
Villages, Bhatapara Tehsil, Baloda Bazar – Bhatapara District, Chhattisgarh. The proposed Steel
Plant will produce the following products:
Unit : Description
Iron ore beneficiation : Manufacturing of Iron ore concentrate using Iron ore fines as
raw materials
Pellet plant : Manufacturing of Pellet using Iron ore concentrate, Bentonite,
Limestone, Coke breeze as raw material.
Sponge Iron : Production of Sponge Iron from Iron Ore Pellets, Coal &
Dolomite. The waste flue gases from the kiln will pass through
WHRB and Power will be generated.
Induction Furnace : Manufacturing of Hot Billets / MS Billets / Ingots using Sponge
Iron, Scrap, Ferro Alloys, Pig Iron as raw materials
Rolling Mill : Manufacturing of Rolled products / TMT Bars / Structural Steel
using Hot Billets /MS Billets / Ingots as raw materials.
Gasifier + PCI : Producer Gas + PCI generation utilizing Coal as raw material
for supplying fuel for Pellet Plant & Rolling Mill.
Submerged Electric : Manufacturing of Ferro Alloys using Manganese Ore, Quartz,
Arc Furnace Scrap, LAM coke, Electrode paste, etc. as raw materials.
Power Generation : The waste flue gases from the kiln will pass through WHRB for
Power Generation and through FBC Power Plant using Coal &
Dolochar as fuel.
2.2 NEED FOR THE PROJECT
GLOBAL SCENARIO
 In January-July 2019, the world crude steel production reached 1083.95 million tonnes
(mt) and showed a growth of 4.6% over January-July 2018.
 China remained world’s largest crude steel producer in same period (577.06 mt) followed
by India (66.19 mt), Japan (59.47 mt) and the USA (51.83 mt).
 World Steel Association has projected Indian steel demand to grow by 7.1% in 2019 while
globally, steel demand has been projected to grow by 1.3% in 2019. Chinese steel use is
projected to show 1.0% growth in 2019.

2.1
 Per capita finished steel consumption in 2018 was 224.5 kg for world and 590.1 kg for
China (Source: World Steel Association). The same for India was 73.3 kg in 2018 (Source:
JPC).
DOMESTIC SCENARIO
 The Indian steel industry has entered into a new development stage, post de-regulation,
riding high on the resurgent economy and rising demand for steel.
 Rapid rise in production has resulted in India becoming the 2nd largest producer of crude
steel during 2018, from its 3rd largest status in 2017. The country is also the largest
producer of Sponge Iron or DRI in the world and the 3rd largest finished steel consumer in
the world after China & USA.
 In a de-regulated, liberalized economic/market scenario like India the Government’s role
is that of a facilitator which lays down the policy guidelines and establishes the institutional
mechanism/structure for creating conducive environment for improving efficiency and
performance of the steel sector.
 In this role, the Government has released the National Steel Policy 2017, which has laid
down the broad roadmap for encouraging long term growth for the Indian steel industry,
both on demand and supply sides, by 2030-31. The Government has also announced a
policy for providing preference to domestically manufactured Iron & Steel products in
Government procurement.
Source: https://steel.gov.in
PRODUCTION
 Production Steel industry was de-licensed and de-controlled in 1991 & 1992 respectively.
 India is currently the 2nd largest producer of crude steel in the world.
 In 2018-19, production of total finished steel (alloy/stainless + non alloy) was 101.287
million tonnes (mt).
 Production of Pig Iron in 2018-19 was 6.414 mt, a growth of 11.9% over last year.
 India is the largest producer of Sponge Iron in the world. The coal based route accounted
for 79% of total Sponge Iron production (34.71 mt) in the country in 2018-19.
In the light of the above scenario, REAL ISPAT & POWER LTD. (RIPL) has proposed to set up an
steel plant.

2.2
2.3 LOCATION OF THE PROJECT [Gen. ToR # 4 (i)]

Real Ispat & Power Ltd. proposing to establish an steel plant at Bakulahi & Dhourabhata
Villages, Bhatapara Tehsil, Baloda Bazar – Bhatapara District, Chhattisgarh. Total land
envisaged for the proposed project is 63.52 ha. (156.909 Acres). The entire project area will
fall in the Survey of India Topo sheet no. 64 G/13,G/14, K/1 & K/2.
2.3.1 GEO - COORDINATES OF THE PROJECT SITE [Gen. ToR # 4 (iii)]

The Coordinates of the project site are following:
Table No. 2.3.1 – Coordinates of the project site
S.No. Point Coordinates S.No. Point Coordinates
1 Point # 1 21°48'02.55"N 82°02'54.19"E 18 Point # 18 21°48'05.03"N 82°02'13.23"E
2 Point # 2 21°47'47.51"N 82°02'49.10"E 19 Point # 19 21°48'07.74"N 82°02'14.19"E
3 Point # 3 21°47'47.23"N 82°02'49.28"E 20 Point # 20 21°48'07.18"N 82°02'15.87"E
4 Point # 4 21°47'49.15"N 82°02'43.20"E 21 Point # 21 21°48'09.72"N 82°02'16.45"E
5 Point # 5 21°47'57.88"N 82°02'45.32"E 22 Point # 22 21°48'15.47"N 82°02'17.10"E
6 Point # 6 21°47'57.68"N 82°02'39.73"E 23 Point # 23 21°48'20.33"N 82°02'19.38"E
7 Point # 7 21°47'59.94"N 82°02'32.67"E 24 Point # 24 21°48'20.47"N 82°02'26.44"E
8 Point # 8 21°47'52.07"N 82°02'29.65"E 25 Point # 25 21°48'17.54"N 82°02'26.73"E
9 Point # 9 21°47'54.30"N 82°02'25.92"E 26 Point # 26 21°48'15.02"N 82°02'32.99"E
10 Point # 10 21°47'55.48"N 82°02'21.41"E 27 Point # 27 21°48'18.68"N 82°02'34.99"E
11 Point # 11 21°48'00.13"N 82°02'23.22"E 28 Point # 28 21°48'17.69"N 82°02'36.45"E
12 Point # 12 21°48'01.46"N 82°02'19.86"E 29 Point # 29 21°48'14.56"N 82°02'35.92"E
13 Point # 13 21°48'00.50"N 82°02'19.61"E 30 Point # 30 21°48'12.08"N 82°02'34.85"E
14 Point # 14 21°48'01.42"N 82°02'16.75"E 31 Point # 31 21°48'10.71"N 82°02'38.20"E
15 Point # 15 21°48'02.19"N 82°02'16.91"E 32 Point # 32 21°48'12.25"N 82°02'39.19"E
16 Point # 16 21°48'02.43"N 82°02'16.34"E 33 Point # 33 21°48'06.69"N 82°02'40.66"E
17 Point # 17 21°48'04.33"N 82°02'16.72"E

2.3
Figure: 2.1 – Coordinates of the Project Site on topo map [Gen. TOR # 4 (iii)]

2.4
Figure: 2.2 – Google Earth Image showing Project Site [Gen.TOR # 4 (iv)]

2.5
Figure: 2.3 – Photographs showing Project Site [Gen.TOR # 4 (iv)]
02.08.2021 02.08.2021

2.6
02.08.2021 02.08.2021

2.7
2.3.2 ENVIRONMENTAL SETTING WITHIN 10 Km. RADIUS OF THE PROJECT SITE
[Gen. TOR # 4 (i)]

Table No. 2.3.2 - Environment Setting within 10 Kms. radius of the site
S.No. Salient Features / Environmental features Distance w.r.t. site / Remarks
1. Type of Land Private Barren Uncultivated land
2. Type of Land (Study Area) As per LULC the land use within 10 Km. is as follows:
Settlements – 3.9 %; Industrial Area-1.1%; Tank /
River, etc. – 6.3 %; Single crop – 72.4 %; Double
crop – 7.2 %; Land with scrub – 4.1%; Land without
scrub – 4.6 %; Aquaculture – 0.4%
3. National Park/ Wild life sanctuary / Nil
Biosphere reserve / Tiger Reserve /
Elephant Corridor / migratory routes for
Birds
4. Historical places / Places of Tourist Nil
importance / Archeological sites
5. Critically polluted area as per MoEF&CC None
Office Memorandum dated 13th January And also the Plant area does not fall in the areas
2010 given in Hon’ble NGT order issued vide dated 10th
July 2019.
6. Defence Installations Nil
7. Nearest village Bakulahi (0.15 Kms. – SE direction) & Dhourabhata
(0.35 Kms. – NW direction)
8. No. of Villages in the Study Area 51 nos.
9. Nearest Hospital Mopka – 2.0 Kms.(SEE direction)
10. Nearest School Mopka – 1.9 Kms.(SEE direction)
11. Forests Nil with in 10 Km. radius
12. Water body Shivnath River (5.9 Kms. - NW Direction), Jamuniya
Nadi (5.8 Kms. - SSE Direction), Bhatapara Branch
of Mahanadi Canal (0.18 Kms. – SSE Direction)
13. Nearest Highway SH # 10 (Bhatapara to Baloda Bazar) – 9.0 Kms.
(South Direction) - Aerial Distance
14. Nearest Railway Station Nipania Railway Station (2.3 Kms. – North
Direction) – Aerial Distance
15. Nearest Port facility Nil
16. Nearest Airport Nil
17. Nearest Interstate Boundary Nil
18. Seismic zoneas per IS-1893 Seismic zone – II
19. R&R There is no rehabilitation and resettlement issue,
as there are no habitations present in the site area.
20. Litigation / court case is pending against the Nil
proposed project / proposed site and or any
direction passed by the court of law against
the project

2.8
Figure: 2.4 – General location of the Project Site

2.9
Baloda Bazar (D), Chhattisgarh
Figure: 2.5 – Topa Map (10 Kms. radius) [Gen.TOR # 4 (ii)]

2.10
2.3.3 LIST OF INDUSTRIES WITHIN 10 Km. RADIUS OF THE PROJECT SITE [Gen.ToR # 4 (viii)]
Following is list of industries (Major) presently located within 10 Km radius of the site:
Table No. 2.3.3 – List of Industries within 10 Kms. radius of the project site
S.No. Name of Industry Type of Industry
1. M/s. Nova Iron And Steel Sponge Iron plant
2. M/s. Bhatia Wine Merchants Pvt. Ltd. Beverage Plant
2.4 DETAILS OF LAND [Gen. TOR # 3 (iii), 4 (vii) & 4 (xi)]

 Real Ispat and Power Limited proposed to establish a Integrated Steel Plant & Captive
Power Plant at Bakulahi & Dhourabhata Villages, Bhatapara Tehsil, Baloda Bazar –
Bhatapara District, Chhattisgarh.
 Khasra No. of Bakulahi Village are 2, 27/6, 27/4, 27/12, 27/13, 27/14 comprising of 29.617
Ha. (73.154 acres) of land & Khasra No. of Dhourabhata Village are 379, 380/2, 381, 409/2,
409/3, 409/6, 409/7, 409/8, 417/1, 417/2, 417/3, 417/4, 417/5, 417/6, 417/7, 417/8,
417/9, 417/10 comprising of 33.909 Ha. (83.755 acres) of land.
 Total land envisaged for the proposed project is 63.52 Ha. (156.909 Acres) of land and
same is in possession of management.
 Out of the total land, 43.969 Ha. (108.65 Acres) of land is already converted for Industrial
Purposed and remaining is under process.
Table No. 2.4.1: Land Use Classification of Project Area
S.No. Type of land Area (in Ha.) Area (in Acres)
1. Private Land 19.551 48.349
2. Govt. Land Nil Nil
3. Industrial Land 43.969 108.65
(Converted)
4. Forest Land Nil Nil
Total land 63.52 156.909
Table No. 2.4.2: Land Use Statement of Plant Area

S.No. Land Use for Area in Ha. Area in Acres
1. Bulit-up area including Admin 19.4 48.000
2. Internal roads 6.5 16.000
3. Raw Material & Product Storage Area 10.000
4.0
including coal handling area
4. Solid waste storage 2.2 5.500
5. Tailing storage area 0.5 1.200

2.11

6. Water Reservoir 1.2 3.000
7. Greenbelt area 21.1 52.000
8. Switch Yard 0.2 0.500
9. Truck Parking 2.0 5.000
10. Misc. areas (i.e. Store room, Open areas 15.709
6.4
etc.)
Total 63.5 156.909
Figure: 2.6 – Pie diagram showing Land use break
The Plant Lay-out showing proposed units indicating storage area, plant area, greenbelt area,
utilities etc of the project site is shown as fig. 2.5.

2.12
Figure: 2.7 – Plant Layout [Gen.TOR # 4 (v)] & Add. TOR # 14

Gen. TOR # 4 (v) & Addl. ToR # 14
Fig. 2.5

2.13
2.5 SIZE / MAGNITUDE OF OPERATION [Gen. TOR # 3 (ii)] & Spec.ToR # (xi)]
Following is Plant configuration & Production Capacity of the proposed project:
(Beneficiated ore)
(Pellet)
3. Coal Gasifier + PCI For Pellet Plant & Rolling 10 x 8000 Nm3/hr 80,000 Nm3/hr
Mill
4. DRI Kilns 2 x 650 TPD + 2 x 350 TPD 7,60,000 TPA
(Sponge Iron) + 1 x 200 TPD *
5. Steel Melt Shop with CCM 5 x 30 T + 5 x 20 T + 7,50,000 TPA
(Billets / Ingots / Hot Billets) twin Caster
7. Rolling Mill with Standby Reheating Furnace 2 x 3,50,000 TPA 7,00,000 TPA
50 TPH
(Rolled products / TMT Bars / Structural Steel)
(85 % Hot charging with Hot Billets and
remaining 15% through RHF with LDO as fuel)
8. Ferro Alloys Unit 2 x 9 MVA FeSi- 18,000 TPA / FeMn- 66,000 TPA /
(FeSi / FeMn / SiMn / Pig Iron) SiMn- 36,000 TPA / Pig Iron – 72,000 TPA
CFBC 40 MW 40 MW
Note :
* as per Specific ToR (xi), instead of 2 x 100 TPD DRI Kilns it is proposed to install only 1 x 200 TPD Kiln to reduce no. of Kilns in the
proposal.

2.14
2.6 PROPOSED SCHEDULE FOR APPROVAL AND IMPLEMENTATION [Gen. TOR # 3(i)]
Table No. 2.6.1 – Proposed implementation schedule
Duration From the Date of receipt of EC &
Plant Production Financial Closure
S.No. Unit st nd rd
Configuration Capacity 1 2 3 4th 5th 6th 7th
Year Year Year Year Year Year Year
1. Iron Ore Beneficiation 2.0 mtpa 2.0 mtpa
2. Pelletisation Plant 2 x 0.8 mtpa 1.6 mtpa
3. DRI kilns (Sponge Iron) 1 x 200 TPD 69,000 TPA
4. DRI kilns (Sponge Iron) 2 x 350 TPD 2,42,000 TPA
5. DRI kilns (Sponge Iron) 2 x 650 TPD 4,49,000 TPA
6. Power Plant (WHRB) 66 MW 66 MW
7. Power Plant (CFBC) 40 MW 40 MW
Induction Furnace with LRF +CCM 5 x 30 Tons 4,50,000 TPA
8. (Hot metal / MS Ingots/ billets)
Induction Furnace with LRF + CCM 5 x 20 Tons 3,00,000 TPA
9. (Hot metal / MS Ingots/ billets)
Ladle Refining Furnace (LRF) 2 x 25 T & 7,50,000 TPA
10. 1 x 35 T
Rolling Mill (Rolled Products / 1 x 1050 TPD 3,50,000 TPA
11.
Structural Steels / TMT bars l)
Rolling Mill (Rolled Products / 1 x 1050 TPD 3,50,000 TPA
12.
Structural Steels / TMT bars l)
Gasifier + PCI for Pellet Plant & 80000 Nm3/Hr 10 x 8000
13.
Rolling Mill Nm3/Hr
14. Ferro alloys 2 x 9 MVA 2 x 9 MVA

2.15
2.7 PROJECT COST [Gen. TOR # 3(i)]

The project cost envisaged for the proposed project is Rs. 930.68 Crores.
Table No.2.7.1: Break-Up of Project Cost
S.No. Unit Project Cost
(Rs. in Crores)
1. Iron Ore Benefication Plant (2.0 MTPA) 20.00
2. Pellet Plant (1.6 MTPA) 161.68
3. Coal Gasifier + PCI For Pellet Plant & Rolling Mill (10 x 8000 Nm3) 10.00
4. Sponge Iron Plant (7,60,000 TPA) 200.00
5. Power Plant (WHRB: 66 MW & CFBC : 40 MW) 318.00
6. Steel Melt Shop With Ccm (7,50,000 TPA) 80.00
7. Ladle Refining Furnace (LRF) (7,00,000 TPA) 30.00
8. Rolling Mill (2 x 3,50,000 TPA) With Standby Reheating Furnace 50 TPH 80.00
9. Ferro Alloys Plant (2 x 9 MVA) 30.00
10. For Occupationsl Health & Risk Assessment 1.00
TOTAL 930.68
2.8 TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESS DESCRIPTION
2.8.1 RAW MATERIALS [Gen.TOR # 3 (iv) & Addl. ToR # 2]

The following will be the raw material requirement for the proposed project:
Table No.2.8.1 – Raw material requirement, source & mode of transportation
S.No. Raw Material Quantity (TPA) Sources Mode of Transport
1. For Iron Ore beneficiation plant (2.0 MTPA – throughput capacity)
a) Iron ore fines 20,00,000 Chhattisgarh/ Orissa By Rail & Road
(through covered trucks)
2. For Pellet Plant (Pellets) - 1.6 MTPA
a) Iron ore Concentrate 17,00,000 Own generation Covered Conveyor
b) Bentonite 21,000 Gujarat By Rail & Road

c) Lime Powder 22,500 Chhattisgarh/ MP By Rail & Road
d) Coke breeze 54,000 Indonesia / South By Sea, Rail & Road
Africa / Australia (Covered trucks)
e) Coal (Gasifier) Indian 1,67,200 SECL/ Orissa By Rail & Road
40,000 NM3) (through covered trucks)
+ PCI Imported 97,280 Indonesia / South By Sea, Rail & Road
f) LDO 30,300 KL Chhattisgarh By Road
through tanker
3. For DRI Kilns (Sponge Iron) – 7,60,000 TPA
a) Iron Ore Pellets 11,40,000 Own generation Covered Conveyor

2.16

b) Dolomite 38,000 Chhattisgarh By Road
c) Coal Indian 9,88,000 SECL/ Orissa By Rail & Road
Imported 6,32,350 Indonesia / South By Sea, Rail & Road
4. For Steel Melting Shop (MS Billets/ Ingots/Hot Billets) – 7,50,000 TPA
a) Sponge Iron 7,60,000 Own generation Covered Conveyor
b) Pig Iron 72,000 Own generation Covered Conveyor
c) Scrap 38,000 Chhattisgarh By Road
d) Ferro Alloys 37,500 Own generation Covered Conveyor
5. For Rolling Mill through Hot charging (Rolled Products / TMT bars / Structural Steel) – 7,00,000 TPA
a) Billets / Ingots 7,50,000 Own generation Covered Conveyor
b) Coal for Indian 1,29,600 Chhattisgarh/ Orissa By Rail & Road
Gasifier (through covered trucks)
(40000 Nm3)+ Imported 83,000 Indonesia / South By Sea, Rail & Road
PCI Africa / Australia (Covered trucks)
c) LDO 35,100 KL Chhattisgarh By Road through tanker
6. For Ferro Alloys : 2 x 9 MVA (FeSi / SiMn / FeMn / Pig Iron)
6. (i) For manufacturing Ferro Silicon – 18,000 TPA
a) Quartz 27,360 Chhattisgarh/ Andra By Rail & Road
Pradesh (through covered trucks)
b) Mill Scale 14,040 Own generation Covered Conveyor
c) M.S. Scrap 630 Chhattisgarh By Road
d) LAM Coke 10080 Chhattisgarh By Road
e) Bag filter dust 1080 Own generation Pipeline
6. (ii) For manufacturing Silico Manganese - 36,000 TPA
a) Manganese Ore 58680 MOIL / OMC By Rail & Road
b) FeMn Slag 22248 Own generation Covered Conveyor
c) LAM Coke 13860 Chhattisgarh By Road
d) Quartz 7200 Chhattisgarh/ Andra By Rail & Road
6. (iii) For manufacturing Ferro Manganese – 66,000 TPA
b) LAM Coke 27375 Chhattisgarh By Road
c) Quartz 2250 Chhattisgarh/ Andra By Rail & Road
d) Bag filter dust 12,750 Own generation Pipeline

2.17

6. (iv) For manufacturing Pig Iron – 72,000 TPA
a) HG Iron ore 1,06,200 Chhattisgarh/ Orissa By Rail & Road
b) LAM Coke 35,280 Chhattisgarh By Road
c) Lime stone 29,520 Chhattisgarh/ MP By Rail & Road
7. For FBC Boiler [Power Generation 1 x 40 MW]
a) Indian Coal (100%) 2,48,400 SECL Chhattisgarh / By Rail & Road
MCL Odisha (through covered trucks)
OR
b) Imported Coal (100 %) 1,58,980 Indonesia / South By Sea, Rail & Road
OR
c) Dolochar Dolochar 1,52,000 Own Generation By Covenyers
+ Indian 1,72,400 SECL Chhattisgarh / By Rail & Road
Indian Coal Coal MCL Odisha (through covered trucks)
OR
d) Dolochar + Dolochar 1,52,000 Own Generation By Covenyers
Imported Coal Imported 1,10,340 Indonesia / South By Sea, Rail & Road
Coal Africa / Australia (Covered trucks)
Note: Railway siding is proposed at 0.5 Kms. from the Project Site, connecting Nipaniya RS.
2.8.2 RAW MATERIAL TRANSPORT, STORAGE & HANDLING [Addl. ToR # 6]

 Major raw material will be brought to the plant site by Rail, through proposed Railway
Siding at 0.5 Kms. (at Nipania Railway Station) from the project site & from their by the
road through covered trucks and other raw material will be brought by covered trucks
upto the site.
 All the trucks used for the transport of raw materials, products and wastes will be
completely covered with tarpaulin and ensured no spillage during transportation.
 Total no. of trucks required for transportation of raw materials, products & Solid wastes
during the operation of the proposed project are 832 trucks/day through Road only.
during the operation of the proposed project are 310 trucks/day through both Rail &
Road.
 Internal roads will be made pucca.
 All the raw material required for the proposed steel plant will be stored on pucca
platform above ground level
2.18
 All the raw material yards are equipped with water sprinkling system so as to avoid
fugitive emission during the material handling.
2.8.3 MATERIAL BALANCE [Addl. ToR # 15]

Table No. 2.8.2: Material Balance - IRON ORE BENEFICIATION [2.0 MTPA]
INPUTS OUTPUTS
S.No. Item Quantity (TPA) Item Quantity (TPA)
1. Iron ore fines 20,00,000 Iron ore concentrate 17,00,000
Tailing 3,00,000
Total 20,00,000 Total 20,00,000
Table No. 2.8.3: Material Balance - PELLETIZATION UNIT [1.6 MTPA]

INPUTS OUTPUTS
1. Iron ore concentrate 17,00,000 Pellets 16,00,000
2. Bentonite 17,000 Ash/Dust 48,000
3. Lime Powder 22,500 Flue gases with dust 1,45,500
4. Coke Breeze 54,000
Total 17,93,500 Total 17,93,500
Table No. 2.8.4: Material Balance - SPONGE IRON UNIT [7,60,000 TPA]
INPUTS OUTPUTS
1. Iron Ore Pellets 11,38,500 Sponge Iron 7,60,000
2. Coal (Indian) 9,88,000 Dolochar 1,52,000
3. Dolomite 38,000 Ash / Dust from Bag filters 1,36,620
4. Wet Scraper sludge 34,915
5. Accretion slag 6,830
6. Flue Gases 10,74,535
Total 21,64,500 Total 21,64,500
Table No. 2.8.5: Material Balance - INDUCTION FURNACE UNIT [7,50,000 TPA]
INPUTS OUTPUTS
Hot Billets / MS Billets /
1. Sponge Iron 7,60,000 7,50,000
Ingots
2. MS Scrap / Pig iron 1,10,000 Slag 75,000
3. Ferro Alloys 37,500 Flue Gases / Dust 82,500
Total 9,07,500 Total 9,07,500
Table No. 2.8.6: Material Balance - ROLLING MILL (7,00,000 TPA with Hot charging)

2.19
INPUTS OUTPUTS
Hot Billets / MS Billets
1 7,50,000 Rolled Products 7,00,000
/ Ingots
Mill scales 14,000
End cuttings 21,000
Gases / Dust 15,000
Total 7,50,000 Total 7,50,000
Table No 2.8.7: Material Balance - POWER PLANT [40.0 MW]

i. With 100 % Indian Coal
INPUTS OUTPUTS
S.No. Item Quantity Item Quantity
1. Coal (Indian) 2,48,400 TPA Electricity 40.0 MW
2. Ash 1,11,780 TPA
Flue Gases 1,36,620 TPA
Total 2,48,400 TPA Total 2,48,400 TPA
Note: Ash in Indian coal is considered max. of 45%
ii. With 100 % Imported Coal

INPUTS OUTPUTS
1. Coal (Imported) 1,58,980 TPA Electricity 40.0 MW
2. Ash 19,080 TPA
Note: Ash in Imported coal is considered Max. of 12%
iii. Indian Coal with combination of Dolochar

INPUTS OUTPUTS
1. Coal (Indian) 1,72,400 TPA Electricity 40.0 MW
2. Dolochar 1,52,000 TPA Ash 1,68,780 TPA
Note: Percentage of Ash in Indian coal is considered as 45% & 60 % in Dolochar
iv. Imported Coal with combination of Dolochar

INPUTS OUTPUTS
1. Coal (Imported) 1,10,340 TPA Electricity 40.0 MW
2. Dolochar 1,52,000 TPA Ash 1,04,440 TPA
Note: Ash in Imported coal is considered as 12% & 60 % in Dolochar

2.20
2.8.4 MANUFACTURING PROCESS [Gen. TOR # 3 (viii) & Addl. ToR # 15, 16]
2.8.4.1 Process of Iron Ore Beneficiation
Beneficiation is a process, which removes the gangue particle like Alumina, Silica from the Iron Ore.
Basically, it separates Fe2O3 or Fe3O4 from other impurities in the iron ore. In this process the Fe
content is improve to maximum possible extent. The highest can be 70% i.e. purest form.
Process Description
Iron ore fines reclaimed from the blending stockpile shall be conveyed into a surge bin within the
beneficiation plant building. Ore drawn from the surge bin by a belt weigh feeder is fed to a spiral
screw type classifier.
Washed ore from spiral classifier is screened for +4 mm and -4 mm fractions over a scalping screen.
Undersize fraction of -4 mm is pumped to sizing screens for screening off -1 mm fraction. Oversize
fractions of +4 mm from the scalping screen and +1 mm from the sizing screens are ground in a
primary ball mill in closed circuit with sizing screens to get 100% -1 mm solids suitable for gravity
separation in spirals.
Washed sizing screen underflow fraction of -1 mm is pumped to dewatering cyclones. Underflow of

dewatering cyclones is beneficiated by gravity separation through two stage spirals viz., rougher
and cleaner spirals. Concentrate from spirals circuit is ground to a size consistency of 100% passing
100 mesh and ~70% passing 325 mesh in secondary ball mills in closed circuit with classifying
cyclones. Ground concentrate from the classifying cyclones overflow as well as the overflow from
dewatering cyclones ahead of spirals are pumped to concentrate thickener. Concentrate thickener
underflow is thereafter filtered to get a product with 8% moisture max. The filter cake is conveyed
to stockpile.
Tailings from the spirals circuit is pumped to a linear screen to ensure a 100% -1 mm size solids in
the slurry being fed to high gradient magnetic separators to recover feebly magnetic Fe units.
Concentrate from high gradient magnetic separators is diverted to secondary ball mill discharge
pump box for grinding along with spiral concentrate, to desired fineness.
Tailings from high gradient magnetic separators is fed to tailings thickener.
Spiral classifier overflow is pumped to de-sliming cyclones. Overflow from these de-sliming cyclones
is fed to the tailings thickener. Underflow from de-sliming cyclones is diverted to spiral tailings
pump box in turn to high gradient magnetic separators to recover Fe units as much as possible.

2.21
Tailings thickener underflow is pumped to tailings settling pond. Clear water from concentrate
thickener, tailings thickener and tailings settling pond flows by gravity back into the process water
sump for recirculation. Process flow diagram showing Beneficiation of Iron Ore is shown as Fig. 2.8.
Figure 2.8 : Schematic diagram showing Beneficiated

I/O manufacturing process
2.8.4.2 Process of Iron Ore Pelletisation

The process of pelletization enables converting Iron Ore Fines into “Uniformed Sized Iron
Ore Pellets” that can be charged into the blast furnaces or for Production of Direct Reduced
Iron (DRI). Pellets are uniform size, with purity of 63%- 65% contributing to faster reduction
and high metallization rates.Pellets with their high, uniform mechanical strength and high
abrasive strength increase production of sponge iron by 25% to 30% with same amount of
fuel.
The iron ore pelletization unit comprises of following sections:

a) Drying & Prepn. of Iron Ore Fines

2.22
b) Grinding
c) Mixing and Blending
d) Pelletization
e) Screening
f) Travel Grate Furnace
g) Rotary Kiln
h) Cooler
i) Stacking
j) Recovery of Dust and Spillage
a. Drying & Preparation of Iron ore Fines:

Generally Iron Ore Fines, Lime Stone and Dolomite fines available, contain more than 6-
7% moisture and require drying before grinding. The drying is carried out in Rotary Drum
Dryer. The moisture content in the dry material is controlled. The low grade Iron Ore
Fines is feed in a screen for separation. Oversize/ under size moves to the primary
grinding circuit.
b. Grinding
Iron Ore Fines, Dolomite and Lime Stone are mixed in required proportion and fed into
a Ball Mill. The fineness of the product is controlled as may be necessary for particular
ore and Pellet quality.
c. Mixing and Blending

Iron Ore powder blended with Bentonite and other binding materials in desired
proportion. Small quantity of water is added during blending operation. This raw mix is
ready for Pellet making and store in feed hopper.
d. Pelletization
Controlled quantity of raw mix is fed on disc Pelletizer. Some amount of water is
sprinkled for producing Pellets. These Pellets are passed through oversize and undersize
screens. Sized Pellets are then sent to sintering section.
e. Screening
Pellets produce in Pelletization sections are passed through oversize and undersize
screens. Rejects Pellets are sent back to raw mix silos sized Pellets are fed in to
Indurations Furnace.

2.23
f. Travel Grate Furnace

A Travel Grate Furnace is used for indurations of Pellets. This is divided into 3 sections
(Drying–Preheating–Heating). Hot Pellets at around 850ºC to 1000ºC from this Travel
Grate are dropped into the Kiln for further strengthening.
g. Rotary Kiln
Rotary Kiln receives Pellets from the Indurations Furnace where Pellets have to
withstand at high temperature approx. 1250ºC – 1350ºC. Here the Pellets gain more
hardness due to high temperature. Furnace Oil / Producer Gas is used as a fuel inside
the Kiln. After the Kiln the Pellets are passed to the Grate Cooler.
h. Cooler
Grate Cooler receives hot Pellet with temperature up to 1300ºC coming from Rotary Kiln.
Cooler has its own blowers to blast the air from bottom. The hot air from the first zone
is used as a combustion air in kiln. The hot blast of the second zone is used in the pre-
heating zone-1 of travel grate and the air from the 3rd zone is discharged to the
atmosphere through chimney as its dust concentration is well within the permissible
limits of pollution norms. Volume of cooling air in all the three zones is regulated
automatically through the temperature control loops as per the requirement. Cold
Pellets at about 100ºC are discharged on conveyors and they are quenched by the cold
water for further cooling and then conveyed to the stock pile/ loading hoppers.
i. Stacking
The screened Pellets of required size duly cooled at air cooler and subsequently natural
cooling are transported to Bunkers.
j. Recovery of Dust and Spillage

Spillage from drying zone and preheating zone of traveling grate, dust from the wind box
of traveling grate and dust collected through de-duster of technological process shall
meet and will be sent to dust bin via belt conveyor, after they are ground together with
iron ore concentrate at grinding mill. Spillage (dry Pellets) produced at the discharge end
of traveling grate will be fed into the kiln from the feed chute of the kiln feed end by
bucket elevation. Almost all the dust and spillage are re-circulated and recovered.

2.24
k. A Pulverized Coal Preparation & Injection System:

A Pulverized Coal Preparation & Injection System (PCPIS) will be provided to prepare the
fuel for the palletization process. The fuel used will be anthracite coal. The PCPIS consists
of coal crushing, drying, grinding and pulverizing system. For the purpose of drying,
furnace oil will be used in burners to feed the hot air needed. The PCIPIS will inject the
pulverized coal from the discharge end of the Kiln.
l. Waste Gas System:
To achieve the fuel economy, an efficient and environment friendly technology will be
adopted wherein the waste heat of the pelletization process will be used for successive
drying of the green balls and also as heat source required in the kiln & different stages
of Travel Grate furnace. The waste gases from Pre-heating zone-1, Up draught & Down
draught drying zone will be cleaned in ESP and released to the atmosphere through a
stack. The same ESP will be used for pre-heating zone-2 waste gases before cleaning the
gases in cyclones. The outlet particulate emission will not exceed 30 mg/Nm 3.
Process flow diagram of manufacturing process of Pellets is shown as Fig.2.8.
Figure 2.8 :Schematic Diagram showing Pellet Manufacturing Process

2.25
2.8.4.3 Process of Sponge Iron Manufacturing

It is a coal based plant for converting Iron Ore to Iron through direct reduction. The Oxide
Ore Fe2O3 (Hematite) is reduced to ‘Fe' by using Carbon at reductant. The process can take
place at 900-1000°C. Coal provides the heat as well as reducing gases. Dolomite chips of
size (-3 mm) are used as flux to Scavenge Sulphur content from coal and preventing the
combining of this impurity with iron. The process is carried out in a Rotary Kiln. Brief
features of the process are as follows:
• Kiln process of DRI production involves tumbling of iron ore with select grade of
non-coking coal and dolomite in a rotary kiln.
• The kiln is supported on roller stations and rotated by means of a variable
speed AC motor and girth gear mechanism. Refractory lined rotary kiln of
suitable size is placed on two or four support stations and is kept inclined at 2.5
% slope.
• The transport rate of materials through the kiln can be controlled by varying its
speed of rotation. There are inlet and outlet cones at opposite ends of the kiln
that are cooled by individual fans.
• The kiln shell is provided with small sampling ports, large ports for rapid
removal of the contents in emergency or for lining repairs. Longitudinal
positioning of the kiln on its riding rings is controlled hydraulically.
• The coal and iron ore are metered into the high end of the inclined kiln. A
portion of the coal in pulverized form is also injected pneumatically from the
discharge end. The burden first passes through a pre-heating zone where coal
devolatilisation takes place and iron ore is heated to pre-heating temperature
for reduction.
• Temperature and process control in the kiln are carried out by installing suitable
no. of air injection tubes made of heat-resistant steel. These are spaced evenly
along the kiln length and countercurrent to the flow of iron ore. Tips of the air
tubes are equipped with special internal swirlers to improve uniformity of
combustion.
• A central burner located at the kiln discharge end is used with LDO for heating
the cold kiln. After initial heating, the fuel supply is turned off and the burner is
used to inject air for coal combustion.

2.26
• The kiln temperatures are measured with fixed thermocouples and Quick
Response Thermocouples (QRT). Fixed thermocouples are located along the length
of the kiln to monitor temperature profile of kiln. Fixed thermocouples, at times,
may give erratic readings due to coating with ash, ore or accretion. In such a case
QRT are used to monitor the kiln temperatures.
• The product (DRI) is discharged from the kiln at about 1000°C. An enclosed
chute at the kiln discharge end is used to transfer the hot DRI to a rotary
cooler. The cooler is a horizontal revolving cylinder of appropriate size, wherein
DRI is cooled indirectly by water spray on the cooler upper surface. The cooling
water collected in troughs below is pumped to the cooling tower for recycling
along with make-up water.
• DRI is cooled to about 100°C without exposure to atmospheric air. A grizzly in
the chute removes accretions that are large enough to plug up or damage the
cooler discharge mechanisms.
• The product is screened to remove the plus 30 mm DRI. The undersize - a mix of
DRI, dolo-char and coal ash are screened into +/- 3 mm fractions. Each fraction
passes through a magnetic separator. The non-magnetic portion of the plus 3 mm
fraction is mostly char and can be recycled to the kiln if desired.
• The nonmagnetic portion of -3mm fraction, mostly spent lime, ash and fine char is
discarded.
• Magnetic portion of each fraction is DRI. Of this the +3mm fraction can be used
directly for steel making and the finer fraction is either briquetted or collected in
bags.
• The kiln waste gases leave at about 850-900°C. These are passed through dust
settling chamber where heavier particles settle down due to sudden decrease in
velocity of gases. The flue gases are then passed through an After Burning
Chamber (ABC) where un-burnt combustibles are burnt by blowing excess air.
• The temperature of the after burner chamber, at times, is controlled by water
sprays.
• Burnt gases are passed through a down duct into an evaporation cooler where its
temperature is brought down and balance dust particles are separated through
the pollution control equipment namely ESP. The gas is let off into the atmosphere

2.27
through stack via ID fan.

• The thermal energy in outgoing flue gases is recovered through Waste Heat
Recovery Boiler (WHRB) where sensible heat of the gases is extracted and then let
off into the atmosphere after passing through pollution control equipment like
ESP, ID fan and stack.

2.28
Figure 2.9: Schematic Diagram showing Sponge Iron Manufacturing Process with WHRB
Pellets

2.29
2.8.4.4 Process Description of Steel making in Steel Melt Shop

Steel Making through Melting in Induction Furnace (IF), secondary refining in a Ladle
Furnace (LF) and Slab Casting in a Continuous Casting Machine has been selected as the
process route of converting the charge mix of Sponge Iron and Scrap to Slabs required the
Hot Strip Rolling Mill.
Provision shall be made in the Caster to produce billets also in case of market demand.
The proposed process is well established for the last four decades and is most
environment friendly and energy efficient. The Slabs from the Caster shall be hot
charged to the Rolling Mill Reheating Furnace to reduce fuel consumption.
i) IF Melting
a. The Charge-Mix shall comprise « 44% Sponge Iron, 50% Scrap & 6% Pig
Iron.
b. The material shall be charged to the IF through a Vibro Feeder at desired
rate matching the melting rate in crucible.
c. The Scrap is melted first to create a molten bath. Sponge Iron is then
charged continuously through Vibro-Feeder. Slag formed is removed
periodically.
d. After the completion of charging and melting, a sample will be drawn to
determine the composition of the liquid steel. Adjustment in composition
is made by adding right quality of scrap or petroleum coke for achieving
the necessary carbon content in the bath.
e. After achieving the desired melt analysis, the temperature is raised to the
required tapping temperature and the furnace is then tilted rapidly to
discharge the liquid steel into a preheated refractory lined ladle.
Advantages of IF melting are:
♦ Better yield of liquid steel from charge as no oxygen is used.
♦ Better homogenization of temperature and composition due to

stirring effect of eddy currents.
♦ Less fume generation.
♦ Low operating cost as expensive graphite electrodes are not used.

2.30
ii) Ladle Furnace

a. The Molten Steel Ladle shall be transferred to a Ladle Car for carrying out
secondary refining in the Ladle Furnace.
b. The Ladle has a porous refractory plug at the bottom to purge Argon gas
to keep the molten metal in vertical stirring movement.
c. The Ladle is covered by a water cooled roof which has openings for three
graphite electrodes, a fume outlet connected to FES system and a door for
charging fluxes & alloying elements. Electric heating is done by arcing
under the reducing slag.
d. Lime is used as flux for refining the steel.
e. Ferro Alloys are added to achieve de-oxidation and required composition
of steel.
Aims of LF Treatment are:
♦ De-sulfurization of steel
♦ De-oxidation of steel
♦ Inclusion removal to slag by floating through argon purging.
♦ Achieving right composition and temperature required for casting at CCM.
♦ Act as a buffer for achieving sequence casting.
Fumes generated during the process are sucked through a collection hood is IF are sucked
through a cyclone-cum-spark arrestor and LF fumes sucked through its roof outlet enter a
pulse-jet type bag filter to remove the dust particles. ID Fans installed after the bag filter
are used for suction of fumes and discharge the clean gas into atmosphere through a stack.
Dust content at Stack outlet will not exceed 30 mg/Nm3.
iii) Slab Caster
Liquid Steel Ladle after Ladle Furnace secondary refining is taken to the Continuous Casting
Machine. The Ladle is raised and placed onto a ladle stand above the Tundish. Liquid
metal flows out of the Ladle Slide gate into the Tundish and then into the water cooled
oscillating copper mould. Solidification begins in the mould, and continuous through the
secondary water spray cooled zone having strand guide rollers. The strand is then
straightened by withdrawal rolls, torch cut and then discharged for
intermediate storage or hot charged for rolling.

2.31
♦ The Slab Caster shall have two (2) Strands with 9/18 m radius. Provision
is kept for casting of square billets range from 100x100mm to 160 x 160mm size to
meet any market demand.
♦ The Caster shall be complete with Ladle Stand, Two (2) Nos. Tundish Cars, Mould
Assemblies and Oscillation-Device, Strand Guide Segments & Supports, Withdrawal &
Straightening System, Mould & Strand Cooling System, Cut-off equipment including
length measuring device, dummy bar system and slab discharging bed & hot charging
rolled table etc.
♦ The complete machine shall have PLC controls.
Process Flow for Steel Making is shown in figure 2.8.

2.32
Figure 2.10: Schematic Diagram showing Hot Billets Manufacturing Process through IF

2.33
2.8.4.5 Manufacturing of Rolled Products through Rolling Mill

A) Through Conventional Rolling mill using Re-heating furnace
A pusher type furnace has been envisaged for the heating of Ingots/Billets. The furnace will be
end charging and side discharging. It will have single row as well as double row charging facility.
The furnace will be heated with FO/Producer Gas. The furnace combustion system will comprise
of air blowers, FO storage, supply and preheating system and other associated facilities. The
product of combustion will leave the furnace at charging end and exhausted through
underground flue tunnel and passed through a metallic tubular recuperator before finally let off
to a self-supporting steel chimney of sufficient height. A set of instrument will be used for
smooth operation of the furnace.
Bar and Round mill

A cross country type mill has been envisaged for the plant. The stands have been grouped into
roughing, intermediate and finishing groups. Roughing group will have 4 (four) stands,
intermediate group will have 8 (eight) stands and finishing mill will have 8 (eight) stands.
Roughing group of stands will be driven by one motor. 4 nos. of intermediate stands will be
driven by two motors and balance 4 nos. will be driven by a separate motor. Each stand of
finishing group will be driven by single motor. Necessary guides and troughs will be provided at
entry and exit of mill stands.
One wire rod outlet has been provided in the mill. The wire rod line will have 4 stand blocks
driven by a single motor through gear box. Coil forming and handling of coil is provided.
Automated tilting, drop type tilter and feeding arrangement will be provided in roughing group
of stands. Repeaters have been provided in roughing / intermediate stands as necessary.
Design provision has been made for introduction of slit rolling facility in future to roll 8 mm, 10
mm & 12 mm rebars in two strands. The rebars discharged from the mill will pass through a
water cooling system comprising cooling pipes with high pressure water nozzles for rapid water
quenching. At the cooling pipes the bar skin temperature will be reduced to about 600 oC. The
core of the bar still remains hot. This entrapped heat tempers the bar. This thermo-mechanical
treatment of the bars increases tensile strength without adversely effecting weldability and
elongation properties. This process eliminates requirement of cold twisting of bars for
production of rebars.
2.34
A dividing shear, to cut the products to cooling bed length, will be located immediately after the
water cooling system. This shear will divide all products to cooling bed lengths. Rake type
cooling beds have been envisaged to receive the rolled product. Cooling bed will be provided
with incoming and outgoing roller tables. One cold shear has been provided to cut the bars
coming out of cooling bed into commercial length of 6 to 12 m. The bar products will be formed
into bundles and will be strapped by strapping machine manually.
The finished products will be removed by overhead EOT crane and stored in the storage area or
dispatched through road vehicles.
B) Through Direct Hot Rolling / Hot Charging

Raw Material i.e. Billet coming from LRF in red hot condition is cut either by automatic hot billet
Shearing Machine. In the proposed plant automatic hot billet shear machines are going to be
installed with each strand. The gas cutting facility will be maintained as a backup to the hot billet
shearing machine.
After the Billet is cut into required length, then pushed out to rolling stands for re-rolling. Steel
Pieces are rolled through all stands in order to get required shape of finished goods i.e. MS Strips
and other rerolled product etc.
Figure 2.11: Schematic Diagram showing Rolled product manufacturing process

2.35
2.8.5.6 Ferro Alloys Manufacturing through Submerged Electric Arc Furnace

Ferro Alloys will be smelted at about 1350 – 1500 deg.C Temperature. This will be achieved by a
conventional, Open Submerged Electric Arc Furnace. The three carbon Electrodes, partially
submerged in the charge, are supported on hydraulic cylinders for upward and down ward
movements to maintain the desired electrical conditions.
The body of the furnace is cylindrical in shape, and is lined with firebricks, silicon carbide bricks
and carbon tamping paste. Three tap – holes are provided at 120 degree apart for drawing out
both the molten alloy and Slag. During the repair works one of the tap – holes the other will
function as stand by.
The weighed raw materials will be thoroughly mixed in the proper proportion before charging
into the furnace, through Skip, Telfer hoist and charging chutes. The charge will be pushed near
to electrodes on Furnace top by a Charging Stoker
As the charge enters the smelting zone, the alloy formed by chemical reactions of the oxides and
the reductants, will be heavy, and gradually settles at the bottom. At regular intervals the
furnace will be tapped. The tap hole will be opened by Oxygen lacing pipe and after tapping is
completed, it will be closed by clay plugs.
The liquid alloy and Slag will be collected in a Ladle and Slag will be over flowed to sand beds. The metal
being retained in the ladle having a Nozzle at bottom which allows metal flows on to C.I. Pans. After
solidification the cakes will be broken manually to required lump size.
SILICO MANGANESE & FERRO MANGANESE PROCESS:

Manganese ore is in the form of MnO, SiO2, FeO, Al2O3, MgO and other Oxides. MnO is reduced
to Mn and FeO is reduced to Fe taking Carbon from Coke / Coal and the product is produced as
Si Mn /Fe Mn. The other oxides are simultaneously removed as Slag along with metal. The Slag
and Metal are separated by virtue of its self-differential gravities after collecting in the ladle. The
ladle will have a nozzle in the bottom portion through which the metal flows in to C.I. Pans.
Chemical Composition of Si Mn
Sl. No. Constituent Percentage

1. Mn 60 – 65%
2. Si + 15%
3. C 2% / 0.1% / 0.5%
4. S&P 0.03% Max
Chemical Composition of Fe Mn

2.36
1 Mn 70 – 85%
2 Si + 1.5%
3 C 7 - 8% / 1.5% / 0.5%
4 S 0.05%
5 P 0.04%
FERRO SILICON PROCESS:

Ferro Silicon is a Slag less process. Quartz is the main raw material which contains 99% of SiO 2.
Charcoal and a small percentage of Coal is used as reductants. Mill Scale / Iron Ore is added to
obtain Ferro Silicon. Fe O is reduced to Fe and Si O2 is reduced to Si Combining with Carbon and
produced as Fe Si.
1 Si 70 – 75%
2 C 7 - 8%
3 S 0.05%
4 P 0.4%
The way of dosing and charging of raw material:
Controlled raw material feeding through chutes and dozing by forklifts.
Figure 2.12: Schematic Diagram showing process flow diagram of Ferro Alloys

2.37
PIG IRON PROCESS THROUGH SEAF

Pig Iron will be produced in SEAF using HG Iron Ore, Limestone & Coke as Raw Materials. Once
pig iron is produced, it is teemed or poured into Induction Furnace either to produce an ingot or
into a continuous caster to produce a slab, billet or bloom.
2.8.4.7 POWER GENERATION (WHRB & CFBC)
Waste Heat Recovery Boiler (WHRB) [Addl. ToR # 9]

The hot flue gases from proposed 2x650 TPD, 2x350 TPD & 1x200 TPD of DRI kilns will pass
through waste heat recovery Boiler to recover the heat and to generate 66 MW (2x20 MW, 2x10
MW & 1x6 MW) electricity.
It is proposed to install 2x80 TPH of Waste Heat Recovery Boiler to generate 2x20 MW of Power
from the hot flue gases produced from 2 x 650 TPD capacity DRI Rotary Kilns.
2x40 TPH of Waste Heat Recovery Boiler to generate 2x10 MW of Power from the hot flue gases
produced from 2 x 350 TPD capacity DRI Rotary Kilns.
24 TPH of Waste Heat Recovery Boiler to generate 6.0 MW of Power from the hot flue gases
produced from 1 x 200 TPD capacity DRI Rotary Kiln.
The flue gases after Post Combustion Chamber (PCC) will be taken to unifired furnace chamber
and then flow over banks of super heater, convective evaporator and economizer before being
discharged to atmosphere through ESP, ID fan and stack. After heat recovery the flue gases will
be treated in a high efficiency ESP to bring down the particulate matter in the gases to less than
30 mg/Nm3and discharged through a stack of adequate height.
Circulated Fluidized Bed Combustion (CFBC) based Power Plant

Fluidized bed combustion is a “Clean Technology for a better tomorrow” where technology and
economy have been interwoven harmoniously in quest of a better environment. The proposed
CFBC boiler will be designed to deliver steam at 160 tph; 110 ata; 540°C with a feed water
temperature of 210°C. 160 TPH of steam CFBC boiler will be provided to generate 40 MW of
Power.
The environmentally friendly perspective of CFBC technology is as follows:
 The modern CFBC boilers can capture Sulphur dioxide upto 95% by addition of limestone
in the furnace.
 The concentration of SOx will be in the order of 1500 mg/Nm³. The concentration of SOx
after lime addition will be 100 mg/Nm³.
2.38
 The Sulphur capture efficiency required will be 93.3%

 The CFBC combustor will be designed with a Sulphur capture efficiency of >95%.
 The leading boiler makers like ISGEC John Thomson, Thyssen Krupp and Thermax are
supplying CFBC boilers with a guarantee of SOx less than 100mg/Nm³ @ 6% O 2.
 The furnace temperature in the CFBC combustor is maintained below 875°C by
maintaining the solid circulation rate. Hence, the NOx concentration will be <100mg/Nm³
@ 6% O2.
POWER GENERATION PROCESS

The Steam Generator would be semi-outdoor type, natural circulation, and balanced draft, Single drum,
designed for firing different grades of coal & Combned fuel such as Coal with Dolochar. The Boiler is of
bubbling fluidised bed type to handle even high ash coal. Capacity of FBC coupled with adjacent WHRB
has been selected to ensure adequate margin over the requirement of turbine at 100% MCR. FBC would
be designed to operate with “The HP heaters out of service” condition (resulting in lower feed water
temperature at Economizer inlet) and deliver Steam to meet the Turbo-Generator requirement at 100%
MCR. Economizer section of the Boiler would be non-Steaming type. Super heater sections would be
convection type and designed so as to maintain rated Steam temperature of 540°C (:i: 5°C) at super
heater outlet over the control range of 60% to 100%, MCR. Attemperator is provided at the outlet of
convection super heater for temperature control at Steam Generator outlet. The Boiler furnace and flue
gas passages would be designed for appropriate low velocities in order to minimize erosion. Suitable
balanced draft System would be provided for the Steam Generator with one forced draft and one induced
draft fans. Each of these fans would be capable of meeting the air requirement at 100% Boiler MCR load.
The forced draft fans would be radial type with inlet vane control for regulation of airflow. The induced
draft fans would be radial type with multi louver damper control the regulation. The forced draft fans
would control total air flow to Boiler and the induced draft fan would control furnace draft of the Boiler
through automatic control loops. In addition to the FD fan, one primary air fan of 100% capacity shall be
provided for transportation of fuel. The Boiler would be top supported type and would be provided with
all supporting Steel platforms, galleries and stairways for easy approach and Maintenance of the Unit.
Adequate weather protection would be provided for instruments and operating personnel. Necessary
insulation along with skin casing to limit outside surface temperature to the safe level would be provided.

2.39
Steam Turbine Generators and Auxiliaries

Steam Turbine
The Steam Turbine will be of condensing type. The set will be complete with Condenser, Air Evacuation
System, 100% Condensate Extraction Pumps, Generator Cooling, System, Gland Sealing with Gland Vent
Condenser, Lube Oil System, LP & HP Re-generative Feed Heaters, etc.
Excitation System
The Excitation System envisaged will be brush-less type. The Excitation System shall be capable of
Supplying the Excitation Current of the Generator under all condition of Operation of Load, Voltage and
Power. Rated current and Voltage of the Exciter shall be at least 120% of normal Excitation Current and
at least 110% of no Load Excitation Voltage with maximum of 140% ceiling. The Exciter response ratio
shall be greater than 1.5. The Field Breaker and Field Suppression System will also be part of Exciter
System. Automatic high speed Thyristorised, Auto Manual AVR capable of maintaining Steady State
Terminal Voltage within :I: 0.5% of the present Value under all Operating Conditions and capable of
smooth and continuous running over the Operating Range. The Generators shall be provided with
Temperature Detector embedded at different location, i.e. Stampings, Stator Windings, etc.
40 MW power will be generated through CFBC Boiler. The steam generated from both the WHRB
and CFBC boilers will drive the steam turbine through a common steam header. The flue gases
will pass over various heat transfer surfaces to ESP and then finally discharged into chimney by
ID fan. The flue gases will be treated in a high efficiency ESP to bring down the particulate matter
in the gases to less than 30 mg/Nm3 and discharged through a stack of adequate height. Process
flow diagram of CFBC based Power Plant is shown as Fig:2.13.

2.40
Figure 2.13: Schematic diagram showing Power Generaiton (CFBC)
2.8.4.8 PRODUCER GAS GENERATION THROUGH GASIFIER

Producer gas plant is proposed to be established for supply fuel to Pelletization Plant & Rolling
Mill units. Coal is lifted to the coal storage bin by lifting system; the coal is added in the
carbonation stage of two-stage coal gasifier by a programmable control feeding system. Air is
blown in the bottom of furnace by air blower, at the same time, low pressure steam goes through
the blending bin and blends with air, becomes the gasification agent, which will carry on the
gasification reaction with 1200 Celsius degree semi coke in the gasification stage.
Producer gas is made by the gasification agent, which is mixture of steam and air, which goes
through red-hot fixed burning bed. The oxygen content in the air and steam react with the
carbon in the fuel; generating the producer gas which has ingredients like CO, CO2, H2, CH4, C2H4,
N2 etc.
Reaction of steam and carbon is endothermic reaction:
C + H2O= CO + H2
When oxygen and carbon react, and then heat output:
2C + O2 =2CO
C + O2 = CO2
Some steam here reacts with carbon monoxide:
CO + H2O = CO2 + H2

2.41
In the reducing zone, quick reaction is occurred when the temperature is below 1200 Celsius
degree
CO2 + C = 2CO and
H2O + C=H2 + CO
When the coal gas goes through the reducing zone, flammable gas content raises rapidly, carbon
dioxide and steam content decrease. Across the reducing zone, a part of coal gas is withdrawn
through a series of vents in the gasifier walls and is called “DOWN STAGE GAS”. Its temperature
is around 300-400 Celsius degree and contain dust and ash particles.
This down stage gas is treated in the cyclone to remove the dust particles, and is then cooled
through a heat exchanger. In this heat exchanger the heat is given to the water in the steam
drum. The gas is further cooled in a wind cooler, where natural air cools the gas to a lower
temperature. The thickness of the slag should be kept 200-400 mm and when the layer thickness
increases the de-slagging of the slag should be carried out with the help of stroker.
In the carbonation stage, the coal added in the gasifier are dried, preheated and carbonated,
generate steam, tar and coal gas, exported from the top of gasifier together, this part of gas is
called “up-stage coal gas”, its temperature is around 100-120 Celsius degree.
The Upstage and downstage coal gas are mixed in the entrance of indirect cooler, the
temperature after mixing and cooling in the indirect cooler is 35-40 Celsius degree. The coal gas
pressure adder increases the pressure of the coal gas to the desired value and then connects to
the transmitting coal gas pipelines, which take the gas to the equipment. Process flow chart is
given as Fig: 2.11.

2.42
PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM

(PRODUCER GAS)
Figure: 2.14 - Schematic diagram showing process flow for producer gas
2.8.5 STACK EMISSIONS [Gen.TOR # 3 (vi) & 7 (v)]

Following is the Stack emission details from various unit in the proposed project:
Table No. 2.8.8: STACK EMISSIONS
Temp. Velocity of
Dia Height Flow rate PM SO2 NOx
S.No Stack attached to of flue flue gas
(m) (m) (m3/sec) (g/s) (g/s) (g/s)
gas (oC) (m/sec)
1. Pellet Plant 4.0 61 5.5 83.3 22.1
(per (2 140 12 150.8 (per (per (per
stack) nos.) stack) stack) stack)
2. De-dusting System
attached to I/O 1.5 30 50 15 26.5 0.7 -- --
Beneficiation
3. DRI kiln with WHRB 3.1 4.0 58.7 16.2
93
(2 x 650 TPD) # (per 160 15 115.6 (per (per (per
Combined Stack flue) flue) flue) Flue)
(2 x 350 TPD) # (per 77 160 15 62.2 (per (per (per
Combined Stack flue) flue) flue) flue)
5. DRI kiln with WHRB
1.8 60 170 15 35.6 1.2 18.1 5.0
(1 x200 TPD) #

2.43
Temp. Velocity of
(m) (m) (m3/sec) (g/s) (g/s) (g/s)
gas (oC) (m/sec)
6. Induction Furnace 1.8 0.9 6.2
45
(3x 30 T) (per 100 15 38.0 (per --- (per
Combined Stack flue) flue) flue)
(2x 30 T) (per 45 100 15 38.0 (per --- (per
(3x 20 T) (per 35 100 15 25.4 (per --- (per
(2x 20 T) (per 35 100 15 25.4 (per --- (per
10. Re-heating
2.2 48 1.2 38 7.9
Furnaces attached
(per (3 180 15 59.1 (per (per (per
to Rolling Mill (3 x
50 TPH)
11. CFBC Power plant
3.2 83 170 15 120 2.5 8.2 8.2
(40 MW)
12. 0.4 4.1
SEAF’s (2x9 MVA)
1.2 30 150 15 16.7 (per --- (per
Combined Stack
flue) flue)
* Emission calculation are based on emission standards notified by MoEF&CC vide S.O. no. 3305 (E) dated 7 th
December 2015.
# In DRI & CFBC boiler SO2 emission is considered after Lime Absorption.
2.8.6 WATER REQUIREMENT

The water requirement for the proposed project will be 5,640 KLD. This includes Make-up water
for I/O Beneficiation, Pellet Plant, DRI Kiln, Induction Furnace, Rolling Mill, Ferro Alloy Plant,
Power Plant & for Domestic purpose.
Water required for the proposed project will be sourced from Silva Anicut of Shivnath River
which is at 7.8 Kms. from the project site.
Water allocation has been recommended from Selva Anicut of Shivnath River from Water
Resource Department, Govt. of Chhattisgarh, vide 50th meeting of State Water Resource
Utilization Committee, Chhattisgarh dt. 13.07.2021 and same is enclosed as Annexure - 1
Water will be stored in Reservoir to be formed in the additional land proximate to the project
site for utilisation of water during lean season to the plant water requirement.
Air cooled condensers will be provided to FBC Power plant.
Table No.2.8.9: Water Requirement Breakup
S.No. Water required for Quantity (in KLD)
1. I/O beneficiation Plant 700

2.44

2. Pellet Plant 500
3. Sponge Iron Plant 900
4. Steel Melting Shop 1200
5. Rolling Mill 850
6. Coal Gasifier 350
7. Ferro Alloys 250
8. Power Plant (WHRB & CFBC) 800
 Cooling tower makeup 636
 Boiler make up 134
 DM plant Regeneration 30
9. Domestic consumption 90
Total 5640
2.8.7 POWER REQUIREMENT [Gen. TOR # 3 (vii) & Addl. ToR # 15, 18]
Power required for the proposed project during construction will be taken from Chhattisgarh
State Power Distribution Company Limited. Power required for the proposed project during
operation will be 136.2 MW and same will be met from 106 MW of Captive Power Plant and 30
MW will be souced from State Grid.
Table No. 2.8.10: Power Requirement
S.No. Unit Power Consumption Power Requirement
(in MW)
1. Iron Ore Beneficiation & Pelletisation 60 Kwh/ton 16.7
2. DRI Kiln 75 Kwh/ton 6.9
3. Induction Furnace with LRF & CCM 760 Kwh/ton 69.7
4. Rolling Mill 150 Kwh/ton 13.3
5. Gasifier for Pellet Plant & Rolling Mill 60 Kwh/ton 1.5
6. Ferro alloys 3000 to 8000 Kwh/ton 17.5
7. Power Plant – WHRB Aux. Consumption @ 10% 6.6
8. Power plant – CFBC Aux. Consumption @ 10% 4.0
Total 136.2
2.8.8 MAN POWER REQUIREMENT [Gen. TOR # 3 (vii)]

The local areas will be benefited by way of generation of employment opportunities, increased
demand for local products and services. There will be an overall improvement in the income
level of the local people.
The proposed project will generate direct employment 1000 nos. which will be employed
officials, staff, skilled, semi -skilled labour & 1000 nos. indirectly employed in contract works &
transport.

2.45
Top priority will be given to locals for Semi-Skilled and Unskilled jobs. With the development of
this Plant there will be lot of scope for more ancillary development, which in turn will benefit
the nation.
Table No. 2.8.11: Man Power Requirement
S.No. Department Manager Supervisor Skilled Un-skilled Total
1 I/O beneficiation plant 5 10 30 80 125
2 Pellet plant 10 20 50 80 160
3 DRI Plant 10 20 40 50 120
4 Captive Power Plant 10 20 40 50 120
5 Steel melt shop 6 10 50 80 146
6 Rolling mills 6 10 60 100 176
7 Coal Gasifier + PCI 3 5 5 10 23
8 Ferro Alloy unit 5 10 20 40 75
9 General Administration 10 5 20 20 55
Total 65 110 315 510 1000
2.8.9 ENERGY CONSERVATION MEASURES [Add. ISP TOR # 9]

 In the proposed project, flue gases generated from DRI kilns will be taken to WHRB and after
heat recovery it will be used for Power Generation. A total of 66 MW will be generated
through flue gases from the proposed DRI units.
 Unburnt Coal (DoloChar) generated from the DRI Plant will be used as fuel in the CFBC Boiler.
 Instead of making billets separately and cooling then and again reheating in RHF followed by
rolling, we are proposing to adopt Direct Hot Charging route in which hot billets are directly
taken to Rolling Mill without reheating Furnace.
 Air cooled condensers will be provided to Power Plant which reduces the water consumption
significantly.
 Rooftop Solar Panel, Solar Powered Street Lights etc. will be installed wherever possible.
 In the proposed project regenerative type burners will be installed in reheating furnaces.
 It is proposed to provide LED lights in the offices and common areas.
 Energy Efficient Motors as per NEMA Premium® Efficiency Electric Motor specification or
equivalent classifications will be provided.
 All Electrical Motor of 3 KW or above will be provided with Variable Frequency Drive (VFD).

2.46
2.9 ENVIRONMENTAL MITIGATION MEASURES
2.9.1 AIR EMISSION CONTROL [Gen.TOR # 3 (vi), 7 (v) & Spec. ToR (vii) & (xiii)]
i. Pellet Plant
Air emissions from the Iron Ore Beneficiation, Pelletization manufacturing process & from
Producer Gas plant are particulate matter, oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and Sulphur dioxide (SO 2).
 Air emission control equipments such as ESP, Bag filters will be provided to Pellet Plant
to maintain the dust concentration in the exhaust gases below 30 mg/Nm3. Then the
treated gases will be let out through a combined stack (twin flues) of 80 m height for
effective dispersion.
 Air emission control equipments such as De-dusting System such as Bag filters will be
provided to I/O beneficiation plant to maintain the dust concentration in the exhaust
gases below 30 mg/Nm3.
 The dust and tar laden gas from Coal Gasifier is first treated in a Scrubber using water as
a scrubbing media to remove major amount of dust and tar. The outlet particulate
emission will be less than 30 mg / Nm3.
 All conveyers will be covered with GI sheets.
 Dust suppression system will be provided at raw material unloading areas.
 Dust extraction system with bagfilters will be provided at material transfer points and
other dust emanating areas.
 All internal roads will be pucca.
ii. Sponge Iron (DRI)

 Covered trucks will be used for transport of Raw materials.
 Stock piles will be provided with Dust Suppression system.
 Coal screen House, Crusher House, Junction houses and surge hopper, Iron ore screen
house and bins, Product discharge, Junction House & SMS bins will be provided with dust
extraction system with bagfilters.
 Dust extraction system with Bagfilters will be provided at material transfer points, crusher
area, cooler discharge, product separation area, etc. to control dust emission. All the
material handling systems will be connected with de dusting system. All the discharge
points and feed points wherever the possibility of dust generation is there a de dusting
suction point will be provided to collect the dust.

2.47
 Water sprinklers will be provided for dust suppression during unloading of raw materials.
 All conveyors will be covered with GI sheets to prevent the fugitive dust.
 Post Combustion Chamber (PCC) will be provided to eliminate the CO emissions.
 Covered shed for storage of Raw materials.
 In the proposed plant the exhaust gases from the rotary kilns will pass through a Waste
Heat Recovery Boiler (WHRB) and after heat recovery the gases will pass through high
efficiency Electro Static Precipitator to bring down the particulate matter in the exhaust
gases to less than 30 mg/Nm3. Then the treated gases will be let out through a combined
stack (twin flues) of 100 m height to 2 x 650 TPD DRI Kilns, Combined stack (twin flues) of
84 m height to 2 x 350 TPD DRI Kilns & a stack of 60 m height to 200 TPD DRI Kiln for
effective dispersion.
 All internal roads will be asphalted to prevent the fugitive dust due to vehicular transport.
iii. Steel Melting Shop
 The Fugitive emissions from the Induction Furnaces will be sucked through hoods and will
pass through a Fume extraction system with bag filters and then the treated gases will be
discharged into the atmosphere through a Combined stack (tri flues) of 45 m height to 3
x 30 T Induction Furnaces, a Combined stack (twin flues) of 45 m height to 2 x 30 T
Induction Furnaces, a Combined stack (tri flues) of 45 m height to 3 x 20 T Induction
Furnaces & a Combined stack (twin flues) of 45 m height to 2 x 20 T Induction Furnaces
for effective disperssion.
 The outlet dust emission in the exhaust gases will be less than 30 mg/Nm3. The dust will
be pneumatically carried to covered bins.
iv. Rolling Mill

 The flue gases from Re-heating furnaces attached to Rolling mill will be discharged into
the atmosphere through a Combined stack (tri flues) of 62 m heights for effective
dispersion of emissions.
 The dust and tar laden gas from Coal Gasifier is first treated in a Scrubber using water as
a scrubbing media to remove major amount of dust and tar. The outlet particulate
emission will be less than 30 mg / Nm3.

2.48
v. Ferro Alloys
 The Fugitive emission from the Submerged Electric Arc Furnaces (SEAFs) will be sucked
through hoods and will pass through 4th Hole Fume extraction system with bag filters and
then treated gases will be discharged in the armosphere throught a Combined stack (with
twin flues) of 30 m height for effective dispersions.
vi. Power Generation

 Covered trucks will be used for transport of fuel.
 Water sprinklers will be provided at the unloading areas of the fuel for dust suppression.
Dust suppression system with plain water - comprising piping network, valves pumps,
instrumentation & control, water tank etc. will be provided.
 Coal handling plant & Coal transfer points will be provided with dust extraction system
with bagfilters.
 Covered conveyers will be provided with GI sheets to prevent fugitive dust emission.
 The flue gases from the FBC boiler will be treated in a high efficiency Electro Static
Precipitator to bring down the particulate emission to less than 30 mg/Nm3.
 The flue gases will be discharged through a stack of 78 m height for effective dispersion
of SO2.
 Internal roads will be asphalted to prevent the fugitive dust emission due to vehicular
movement.
 Fly ash will be stored in Silos to prevent fugitive dust emissions.
vii. Internal Roads

 All internal roads will be asphalted to prevent fugitive emissions due to vehicular
movement.
The following pollution control systems are proposed:
Table No. 2.9.1: Pollution Control Systems Proposed
S.No. Source Control Equipment Emission at the
outlet
1. Pellet Plant Electro Static Precipitators (ESP) PM < 30 mg/Nm3
2. DRI kilns with WHRB’s Electro Static Precipitators (ESP) PM < 30 mg/Nm3
3. Induction Furnaces with CCM Fume Extraction system with PTFE PM < 30 mg/Nm3
bag filters
4. Submerged Electric Arc Furnace 4th Hole Fume Extraction system with PM < 30 mg/Nm3
PTFE bag filters

2.49

outlet
5. Re-heating furnaces attached to Stack PM < 30 mg/Nm3
Rolling Mill
6. Gasifiers Multicyclones with Scrubber PM < 30 mg/Nm3
7. PCI Unit Fume Extraction system with PTFE PM < 30 mg/Nm3
bag filters
8. Pulverized Coal Injection (PCI) Bag filters PM < 30 mg/Nm3
System
9. CFBC Boiler Electro Static Precipitator PM < 30 mg/Nm3
3
Lime dosing SOx < 100 mg/Nm
Low NOx burners with 3-stage NOx < 100 mg/Nm3
combustion, flue gas recirculation
and auto combustion control system
will be provided
Note: Apart from the above Dry fog system with dust suppression at transfer points, crushing plant, dust
extraction system with bagfilters at other dust emanating areas, covered conveyers, mechanical dust
sweepers, etc. will also be provided
2.9.1.1 DUST EXTRACTION AND DUST SUPPRESSION SYSTEM

The following are the details of dust extraction system & dust suppression system proposed in
the plant.
Table No. 2.9.2: Dust Extraction & Dust Suppression System
S.No Location Pollution control system proposed
1.  Coal screen House These areas will be provided with Dust extraction
 Crusher House systems - each comprising of pulse jet type bag filter,
 Junction houses and surge hopper centrifugal fan and motor, duct work including
 Iron ore screen house and bins suction hoods, duct supports, stack, dust hopper,
 Product discharge rotary air lock valves etc.
 Junction House & SMS bins
2. Junction houses and truck hoppers Dust suppression system with plain water -
comprising of spray nozzles, piping network, valves,
pumps, instrumentation & controls, water tank etc.
3. Stock piles in DR route Dust suppression system with plain water -
comprising piping network, valves, pumps,
instrumentation & control, water tank etc.
2.9.1.2 SOURCES OF AIR POLLUTION (DRI Kilns)

Table No. 2.9.3: Sources of Air Pollution (DRI Kilns)
S.No AREA OF AIR POLLUTION MEASURES ADOPTED FOR CONTROL
1. Raw Material Handling
1. All vibrating screens will be totally covered, to prevent the
leakages of dust.

2.50

2. Throughout the length, the conveyor is covered with G.I.
Sheets to prevent the dust pollution
3. All the material handling systems will be connected with de
dusting system. All the discharge points and feed points
wherever the possibility of dust generation is there, a de
dusting suction point will be provided to collect the dust.
4. DUST SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
It is the most effective and successful system to prevent the
fly-off of dust. Dust suppression system will be adopted to
control the fugitive dust emanated during raw material
unloading operations.
2. Raw Material Storage System 1. All conveyors will be covered with G.I. Sheets to control the
dust.
2. All bins will be totally packed and covered, so that there will
not be any chance of dust leakage.
i. Weigh feeders will be kept below the hopper and used
to feed the known quantity of raw material per hour; it
also seals the discharge area.
ii. All discharge and feed points wherever the possibility
of dust generation is there, will be provided with dust
suppression system.
iii. All material transfer points will be connected with dust
suppression water nozzles to avoid the fugitive dust
emission.
3. Kiln Feed System The raw material will be fed into the kiln through a double
pendulum valve, which seals the false air entry into the rotary
kiln and gas leakage from the kiln. The chute will be sealed with
a double pendulum flap.
4. Main Processing System Kiln Sealed system to avoid false air entry as well as exit. So that
the desired quality can be produced.
Hence no dust escapes outside.
5. Kiln Cooler Transfer Building The transfer point between kiln to coolers is completely sealed
to avoid the false air entry and gas leakages.
6. Rotary Cooler 1. The water will be circulated again and again. Hence there
will not be any water pollution problem
2. There will be slip seals at cooler inlet & cooler outlet. The
seals are also being lubricated to avoid false air entry and
gas leakages.
3. Cooler discharge and feed points wherever the possibility
of dust generation is there, will be provided with de dusting
system.
7. Waste Gas Cleaning System AFTER BURNING CHAMBER (POST COMBUSTION CHAMBER)
The waste gas passes through the after burning chamber
where the combustion of carbon monoxide and un burnt
carbon takes place in presence of air supplied. The basic

2.51

purpose of after burning chamber is to reduce the carbon
monoxide content in waste flue gases.
ELECTRO STATIC PRECIPITATOR

The flue gas from DRI kilns, after heat recovery, will pass
through an electro static precipitator where it is cleaned to
contain < 30 mg/Nm3 particulate matter. The clean gas will be
emitted into the atmosphere through the chimney whose
height is calculated on the basis of CPCB guidelines. The total
conveying of gas from kiln to chimney is done by the induced
draft fan located between ESP and chimney.
8. Product Separation System 1. All conveyors will be covered with G.I. Sheets, to control
the dust emission.
2. All bins will be totally packed and covered, so that there
will not be any chance for dust leakage.
3. Telescopic chutes will be provided below the hopper to
discharge the product directly into the truck for dispatch to
avoid the pollution.
4. All the above material handling system will be connected
with de-dusting system
5. All discharge points and feed points wherever the
possibility of dust generation is there, a de-dusting suction
point will be provided to collect the dust.
6. The collected dust will be taken by pneumatic conveying
system and stored in a dust storage bin.
7. Bag housing system
In the bag house, the dry dust will be collected in an enclosed
housing containing fabric filter bags which are suspended
inside the unit. The dust ladden air will pass through bag filters
forming a dust cake to separate the particulate from the clean
air.
The collected dust will be taken by a pneumatic conveying
2.9.1.3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF CONTROL SYSTEMS

Table No. 2.9.4: Tech. Spec. for ESP attached to Pellet Plant (2 x 0.8 MTPA)
S.No. Parameters Value
1 No. of ESP’s 2
2 Gas flow rate per kiln, m3/hour 5,43,000
0
3 Flue gas temperature ( C) 140
4 Inlet dust concentration, gm/Nm3 18
5 Guaranteed outlet dust Concentration, mg/Nm3 < 30
6 Design pressure, mm wc +/- 300
7 Number of fields Three (1 standby)

2.52
8 Pressure drop across the ESP, mm wg 25 (max)

9 Collection efficiency 99.72 %
Table No. 2.9.5: Tech. Spec. for ESP attached to WHRB of 2 x 650 TPD DRI Kilns
1 No. of ESP’s 2
3
2 Gas flow rate per kiln, m /hour 4,16,000
0

1 No. of ESP’s 2
0
Table No. 2.9.7: Tech. Spec. for ESP attached to WHRB of 1 x 200 TPD DRI Kiln

1 No. of ESP’s 1
3 Flue gas temperature (0C) 160
3
5 Guaranteed outlet dust Concentration, mg/Nm < 30

2.53
Table No. 2.9.8: Tech Spec. for ESP attached to For CFBC Boiler (160 TPH Boiler)
S.No. Parameter Value
1. Gas flow rate, m3/hr 4,30,000
2. Flue gas temperature (0C) 170
3. Inlet dust concentration, gm/nm3 45
4. Guaranteed outlet dust Concentration, mg/nm3 < 30
(at max. flow conditions)
5. Design pressure, mm wg 300
6. Number of fields Three (1 standby)
7. Pressure drop across the ESP, mm wg 25 (max)
8. Collection efficiency 99.92 %
Table No. 2.9.9: Tech Spec. for Bag filter attached to 5 x 30 T Induction Furnaces
1. Capacity of Bag Filter (m3/hr) 1,37,000
2. Operating Temperature (oC) 100oC
3. Size of Each Bag  160 x 4880 mm long
4. No. of Modules 1 No.
5. Total No. of Bags 200 Nos.
6. Total filtering Area (m2) 360
7. Air To Cloth Ratio 1.4
8. Pressure drop (mm WG.) 125 to 150
9. Bag Material 500 gm/m2
PTFE
10. Compressed air reqd. at 7 kg/cm2 338 ( FAD AT 6 Kg / cm2 )
11. No. of Solenoid Cum Diaphragm 12 Nos.
Pulse Valves 40 NB (1½”) x 24 v D.C.
12. Type & Qty of Sequential Timer 12 Channel Electronic Sequential
Controller -240 volt A.C. Supply
13. Dust Disposal Arrangement Through Rotary Air Lock Valves
14. Rated Speed 20 RPM
15. Type of Drive Direct Drive Through Flexible Coupling
16. Geared Motor Rating 0.37 KW / 20 rpm
17. Material of Construction:
a) Raw Gas Casing 3.15 mm thk. MS sheet
b) Clean Gas Casing 3.15 mm thk. MS sheet
c) Hopper 3.15 mm thk. MS sheet
d) Cage Plate 4 mm thk. MS sheet
e) Diffuser at inlet To be Provided
f) Cage MS

2.54

g) Venturies MS
18. Guaranteed Emission Level < 30 mg / Nm3
1. Capacity of Bag Filter (m3/hr) 91,500
PTFE
h) Raw Gas Casing 3.15 mm thk. MS sheet
i) Clean Gas Casing 3.15 mm thk. MS sheet
j) Hopper 3.15 mm thk. MS sheet
k) Cage Plate 4 mm thk. MS sheet
l) Diffuser at inlet To be Provided
m) Cage MS
n) Venturies MS
Table No. 2.9.10: Tech. Spec. for Bag filter attached to 2 x 9 MVA Submerged Electric Arc Furnaces

2.55

PTFE
o) Raw Gas Casing 3.15 mm thk. MS sheet
p) Clean Gas Casing 3.15 mm thk. MS sheet
q) Hopper 3.15 mm thk. MS sheet
r) Cage Plate 4 mm thk. MS sheet
s) Diffuser at inlet To be Provided
t) Cage MS
u) Venturies MS
2.9.2 WASTEWATER MANAGEMENT [Gen.TOR # 3 (vi) & 7 (iv)]

 There will be no effluent discharge from the Iron ore beneficiation, Pellet Plant, DRI plant,
SMS, Ferro Alloy unit & Rolling Mill as closed-circuit cooling system will be adopted.
 Air Cooled condensers will be provided in the power plant, which will be reduce the water
consumption significantly. Hence wastewater generation will also be minimized.
 Thickener over flow from Iron ore beneficiation process will be recycled along with makeup
water. Thickener under flow will be taken to slime pond & will be treated in settling tank and
reused in process.
 Effluent from Rolling Mill will be sent to settling tank & will be recycled through closed circuit
cooling system.
 Effluent from power plant will be treated in ETP and after ensuring compliance with SPCB
norms, it will be utilized for dust suppression, ash conditioning and for greenbelt
development.
 Sanitary waste water will be treated in STP and the treated sewage will be utilized for dust
suppression, ash conditioning and for greenbelt development.

2.56

 Garland drains will be provided around all the raw material stacking areas.
EFFLUENT TREATMENT PLANT

pH of the boiler blowdown will be between 9.5 to 10.5. Hence a neutralization tank will be
constructed for neutralizing the boiler blow down. DM plant regeneration water will be
neutralized in a neutralization tank. After neutralization, these two effluent streams will be
mixed with Cooling Tower blowdown in a Central Monitoring Basin (CMB). Service water will be
treated in an oil separator and after treatment it will be taken to CMB. The treated effluent will
be utilized for dust suppression, ash conditioning and for Green belt development. No effluent
will be let out of the plant premises. Hence Zero discharge concept will be implemented.
The following will be treated combined effluent characteristics.
 pH - 6.5 - 8.5
 TSS - < 100 mg/l
 Oil & Grease - < 10 mg/l
 Free available chlorine - < 1.0 mg/l
 Copper - <1.0 mg/l
 Iron - < 1.0 mg/l
 Zinc - < 1.0 mg/l
 Chromium - < 0.2 mg/l
 Phosphates - < 5.0 mg/l
TREATED EFFLUENT UTILISATION

Total Net effluent generation from project : 255 KLD
Effluent quantity to be used for ash conditioning : 38 KLD
Effluent to be used for dust suppression in CHP : 30 KLD
Balance effluent to be used for Greenbelt development : 187 KLD
52 Acres (21.1 Ha.) of greenbelt will be developed within the plant premises by using the treated
effluent. A dedicated pipe distribution network will be provided for using the treated effluent
for greenbelt development. During monsoon period, when there is no requirement of water for
greenbelt development, the treated effluent will be used as make up water for Rolling Mill.
The characteristics of the treated effluent will comply with the SPCB Standards for onland
irrigation. Hence there will not be any adverse impact on ground water / surface water due to
the proposed project.

2.57
2.9.3 NOISE LEVEL MANAGEMENT

 The major noise generating sources in the plant will be STG, boiler, feed pumps, steam
blowing from boiler, D.G. Sets.
 Acoustic enclosures will be provided to STG & D.G. set.
 Quench water Silencer will be provided to prevent the noise during steam blowing.
 All machinery will be manufactured as per MoEF/OSHA & other international standards on
noise levels.
 The noise levels will be confined to the working zones of the plant.
 Ear plugs will be provided to all employees who will enter into the noise prone areas.
 Community noise levels are not likely to be affected due to the proposed thick green belt and
attenuation due to the physical barriers.
 The ambient noise levels will be in accordance with MoEF&CC norms i.e. ambient noise levels
will be < 75 dBA during daytime and < 70 dBA during night time.
2.9.4 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT [Gen.TOR # 7(vii) & Addl. ToR # 8, 17]
The following will be the solid waste generation & proposed method of disposal:
Table No. 2.9.11: Solid Waste Generation & Method of Disposal
S.No Waste / By product Quantity Method of disposal
(in TPA)
1 Tailings from I/O 3,00,000 Tailing will be taken to filter press & recovered the
Beneficiation water. Cake of tailing will be stored in tailing yard & it
will given to M/s. Ambuja Cement Ltd. for utilisation in
their cement manufacturing unit.
2 Ash / Dust generated from 45,000 Will be given to nearby Fly ash Brick manufacturers.
Pellet plant
3 Dolochar from DRI 1,52,000 Will be utilized as fuel in CFBC Power plant.
4 Kiln Accretion Slag from 6,840 Will be given to Road Contractors for road laying (to M/s.
DRI M/s. Shreeji Infrastructure India Pvt. Ltd.) & to brick
manufacturers.
5 Wet scrapper sludge from 35,000 Will be given to Road Contractors for road laying & to
DRI brick manufacturers.
6 Ash / Dust generated from 1,36,800 Ash generated will be given to M/s. Ambuja Cement Ltd.
DRI kiln for utilisation in their cement manufacturing unit.
7 Slag from SMS 70,000 Slag from SMS will be crushed and iron will be recovered
& then remaining non -magnetic material being inert by
nature will be used as sub base material in road
construction. It is will be given to M/s. Shreeji
Infrastructure India Pvt. Ltd.

2.58

(in TPA)
8 Mill Scales from Rolling 14,000 Will be reused in proposed Ferro Alloy manufacturing &
Mill Pellet plant.
9 End Cuttings from Rolling 21,000 Will be reused in proposed SMS.
Mill
10 Slag from FeSi 5,320 Will be given to cast iron foundries.
Manufacturing Process
Slag from SiMn 30,800 Will be given to Road Contractors for road laying (to M/s.
Manufacturing Process M/s. Shreeji Infrastructure India Pvt. Ltd.)
Slag from FeMn 42,600 Will be used in manufacture of Silico manganese as it
Manufacturing Process contains high MnO2.
11 Ash generated from 4280 Will be given to nearby Fly ash Brick manufacturers.
Gasifier (Pellet plant &
Rolling Mill)
12 Tar generation from 594 Will be used in Pellet plant.
Gasifiers
13 Ash from Power Plant 1,68,780 Will be given to M/s. Ambuja Cement Ltd. for utilisation
(with Indian Coal + in their cement manufacturing unit.
dolochar)
(with imported Coal + in their cement manufacturing unit.
dolochar)
 Letter from Cement plant for Expression of Interest for utilization of Tailing & Fly Ash
generated from proposed plant is enclosed as ANNEXURE- 3.
 Letter from Road Contractor for Expression of Interest for utilization of Slag & Tar generated
from proposed plant from is enclosed as ANNEXURE-4.
Note:
Solid wastes such as Tailings, dolochar, accretion slag, granulated slag will be stored in
designated storage yard. Ash generated will be stored in silos only. There will not be any open
storage of fly ash. Trace metal analysis & TCLP analysis will be carried out upon commencement
of production.
Table No. 10.3.13: Solid Waste and its Composition
[Addl. ToR # 12, 19 & 20]

S.No DESCRIPTION CHEMICAL COMPOSITION
1. Dolo Char (% by weight)
Carbon : 25.0 %
Hydrogen : 0.75 %
Nitrogen : 0.74 %
Sulpher : 0.30 %
Moisture : 9.50 %
2.59
Ash : 60.0 %
GCV : 2,200 Kcals/Kg
2. Dust from Bag filters Fe + Fe2 O3 : 20 to 25 %

Fixed Carbon + Coal Char : 20 to 40 %
CaO + SiO2 : 35 to 50 %
3. Ash Silica - 60.08%
Alumina - 29.50%
Iron oxide - 4.82%
Titania - 1.70%
Phospheric Anhydride - 0.53%
Lime - 1.70%
Magnesia - 0.75%
Sulphuric Anhydride - 0.27%
K2O(By difference) & Na2O(By difference)- 0.65 %
4. Kiln Accretion Slag (% by weight)
Feo – 11.78 %
SiO2 – 31.0 %
Al2O3 – 24.45 %
CaO – 4.5 %
MgO – 0.16 %
5. SMS Slag Trace Element Analysis (mg/kg)
Al : 1.6
Cr(III) : 760
Mo : 26
Pb : 24
Cd : <0.3
Ni : 83
Co : 14
V : 634
Be : 2.6
Ba : 30
Sr : 147
Sn : <3.3
Sb : 144
Hazardous waste generation, storage & disposal [Gen. TOR # 3 (vi)]

1. Used Oil & Waste oil: 1.5 KL / Annum
This will be stored in covered HDPE drums in a designated area and will be given to SPCB
approved vendors.
2. Used Batteries

2.60
Used batteries will be given back to the supplier under buy back agreement with supplier.
MUNICIPAL SOLID WASTE GENERATION & ITS DISPOSAL

Type of Municipal solid waste Proposed method of disposal
Construction debris Used for landfill within the plant site to the extent
(generated during construction phase) possible and recyclables will be given to authorised
recyclers.
Canteen waste Used in composting / Vermiculture
Used as manure for greenbelt development within
the premises.
Recyclables Given to SPCB authorised dealers
2.9.5 GREEN BELT

 21.1 Ha. (52 Acres) of Greenbelt will be developed within the plant premises.
 10 to 85 m wide greenbelt will be developed all around the plant.
 Local DFO will be consulted in developing the green belt.
 The tree species to be selected for the plantation are pollutant tolerant, fast growing, wind
firm, deep rooted. A three-tier plantation is proposed comprising of an outer most belt of
taller trees which will act as barrier, middle core acting as air cleaner and the innermost core
which may be termed as absorptive layer consisting of trees which are known to be
particularly tolerant to pollutants.
 Greenbelt will be developed as per CPCB guidelines.
 2500 plants will be planted per Hectare as per CPCB norms.
2.10 ASSESSMENT OF NEW & UNTESTED TECHNOLOGY FOR THE RISK OF TECHNOLOGICAL FAILURE
Manufacturing technologies for all the units proposed in the project are well proven
technologies all over the world. Hence there will not be any risk of technological failures from
this plant.

2.61
CHAPTER – 3
DESCRIPTION OF ENVIRONMENT 3
(BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS)
3.1 BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS

This chapter gives an idea and description of environmental status of the study area with
reference to the prominent environmental attributes. The main objective of describing the
environment is to assess present environmental quality & the environmental impacts. The
study area 10 Km. radius of the Project site is covered in Survey of India Toposheet Nos. 64
G/13, 14 & K/1 & 2.
The impact identification always commences with the collection of baseline data such as
ambient air quality, ground water quality, surface water quality, noise levels, land environment,
land use pattern, flora & fauna and socio economic aspects with in the study zone of 10 Km.
radius during 1st October 2019 to 31st December 2019.
Baseline data has been collected pertaining to Ambient Air, Noise, Water & Soil by an external
laboratory M/s. Global Enviro Labs (GEL), Hyderabad which is MoEF&CC recognized Laboratory.
Due care has been taken by Pioneer Enviro to ensure that calibrated samplers / equipment /
instruments have been utilized for sampling & analysis. Adequate care has also been taken to
ensure proper Preservation & Transportation methods in accordance with the standard
procedures. It is ensured by Pioneer Enviro that Standard operating Procedures have been
followed by M/s. GEL.
3.2 AIR ENVIRONMENT

3.2.1 METEOROLOGY
Meteorology of the study area plays an important role in the air pollution studies. The
prevailing micro meteorological conditions at the site will regulate the dispersion and dilution
of air pollutants in the atmosphere. The predominant wind directions and the wind speed will
decide the direction and distance of the most affected zone from the proposed activity. The
meteorological data collected during the monitoring period is very useful in interpretation of
baseline as input for dispersion models for predicting the Ground Level Concentrations (GLC).

3.1
3.2.2 METEOROLOGICAL DATA RECORDED AT PROJECT SITE [Gen. TOR # 6 (i)]

A Temporary Weather Monitoring Station was installed at the project site and temperature,
relative humidity, wind direction, wind speed, rainfall, etc. were recorded for one season 1st
October 2019 to 31st December 2019.
Cloud cover
During the study period, it was observed that no clouds have seen & sky is very clear.
Rainfall
There is no rainfall recorded during the study period. However annual rainfall of the Raipur
District is 1225 mm.
Temperature
The maximum temperature recorded was 340C and the minimum temperature was 10 0C at the
Plant.
Relative Humidity
The relative humidity’s he site at are ranging from 18% to 32%.
Wind Pattern at Project Site during the study period

Wind rose from IMD has been collected for Pendra Road –Bilaspur (Nearest IMD station). The
IMD wind rose diagrams of Post Monsoon season is shown in Figure 3.1. Weather monitoring
station has been established at site to collect Meteorological data. Wind speed and direction
are recorded at site every hour. The wind rose shows that winds are predominantly blowing
from North to South direction. The wind rose diagram of Post-Monsoon season is shown in
Figure 3.2

3.2
Figure 3.1 : IMD Wind Rose Pendra Road –Bilaspur

3.3
Figure 3.2 : IMD Wind Rose diagram (at the Project site)
Fig: 3.1

3.4
TABLE NO. 3.2.1: 24 Hourly Site Specific Micro-meteorological Data

S.No. Time Wind Wind Ambient Stability Mixing Height
Direction Speed Temp. Class (m)
(m/s) (Kelvin)
1 1:00:00 CALM 0.0 286.2 6 400
2 2:00:00 CALM 0.0 285.1 5 400
3 3:00:00 CALM 0.0 288.5 4 300
4 4:00:00 CALM 0.0 290.4 5 400
5 5:00:00 CALM 0.0 294.2 6 300
6 6:00:00 CALM 0.0 296.2 3 600
7 7:00:00 N 1.9 295.1 2 1000
8 8:00:00 N 3.8 294.0 3 1100
9 9:00:00 N 5.5 294.2 2 1400
10 10:00:00 NE 2.2 298.5 2 1300
11 11:00:00 E 2.5 300.2 1 1200
12 12:00:00 W 2.1 303.7 2 1000
13 13:00:00 NE 1.4 305.6 1 1000
14 14:00:00 N 1.2 307.9 1 1100
15 15:00:00 N 2.8 307.5 2 1200
16 16:00:00 NE 3.2 306.7 1 1300
17 17:00:00 N 4.8 305.1 3 900
18 18:00:00 E 2.6 303.6 3 800
19 19:00:00 N 2.6 301.9 4 600
20 20:00:00 CALM 0.0 299.0 4 500
21 21:00:00 CALM 0.0 297.1 3 900
22 22:00:00 CALM 0.0 293.6 4 500
23 23:00:00 CALM 0.0 291.1 6 400
24 0:00:00 CALM 0.0 288.5 6 500

3.5
3.2.3 AIR QUALITY [Gen. TOR # 6 (ii) & Addl. ToR # 5]

The ambient air quality with respect to the study zone of 10 km. radius around the project site
forms the baseline information. The study area represents mostly rural environment. The
various sources of air pollution in the region are vehicular traffic, dust arising from unpaved
village roads & domestic fuel burning. The Prime objective of baseline air quality survey is to
assess the existing air quality of the area. This will also be useful is assessing the conformity to
standards of the ambient air quality during the operation of the proposed project.
3.2.3.1 SELECTION OF SAMPLING STATIONS

The base line status of the ambient air quality can be assessed through scientifically designed
Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Network.
The selection of sampling locations in the air quality surveillance programme is based on the
following:
(a) Representation of the Existing Plant.
(b) Representation of down wind direction.
(c) Representation of upwind direction.
(d) Representation of cross wind direction.
(e) Representation of residential areas.
(f) Representation of sensitive receptors.
8 nos. of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations were established with in the study zone of
the plant area in accordance with CPCB guidelines & based on IMD windrose
The sampling locations and their distances are shown in Table 3.2.3 and in Fig 3.2. The Max.,
Min., and 98th percentile values for all the sampling locations for PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NO2 and CO
are shown in Table No. 3.2.4 to 3.2.5.
3.2.3.2 PARAMETERS MONITORED

Ambient air quality was monitored for 2 days in a week for three months (1st October 2019 to
31st December 2019) to assess the existing status of air pollution and pollution dispersion
pattern over the whole air basin of plant as per the National Ambient Air Quality Standards vide
No. S. No. 826 (E) dated 16th November, 2009. At each Monitoring Particulate Matter (PM2.5),
Particulate Matter (PM10), SO2, NO2 & CO are monitored.

3.6
3.2.3.3 SAMPLING & ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES INSTRUMENTS USED FOR SAMPLING

Envirotech RDS, APM 550 dust samplers pertaining to M/s. Global Enviro Labs (GEL) have
been used for monitoring PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NO2. PM2.5 & PM10 are estimated by gravimetric
method West & Gaeke method (IS –5182, part III 1969) has been adopted for estimation of SO2,
Jacob – Hochheiser method (IS –5182, part IV, 1975) has been adopted for estimation of NO2.
CO was analyzed on Gas Chromatograph. The standard operating Procedures of M/s. Global
Enviro Labs have been used for sampling and analysis.
Calibration
Calibration charts have been prepared for all gaseous pollutants. The Calibration is carried out
when new absorbing solutions are prepared.
Table No. 3.2.2: Techniques Used For Ambient Air Quality Monitoring
S.No. Parameter Technique Minimum Detectable
Limit (g /m3)
1. Particulate Matter (PM2.5) APM 550 dust sampler 5.0
(Gravimetric Method)
2. Particulate Matter (PM10) Respirable Dust Sampler 5.0
(Gravimetric Method)
3. SO2 EPA Modified West & Gaeke method 4.0
4. NO2 Arsenite modified Jacob & Hochheiser 4.5
5. CO Adsorption and Desorption followed 12.5
by GC analysis
Table No. 3.2.3: Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations

S.No. STATION DIRECTION DISTANCE CRITERIA FOR SELECTION
w.r.t Plant w.r.t Plant
(in Kms.)
A1 Project Site --- --- Representing Project Site
A2 Bakulahi S 0.15 Representing Nearest Habitation in Downwind
direction
A3 Daurabhatha W 0.35 Representing Habitation in Crosswind direction
A4 Kosmanda S 1.2 Representing Habitation in Downwind direction
A5 Nipaniya N 2.3 Representing Habitation in upwind direction,
commercial area, near Railway station & close
proximity to Major District Road
A6 Mopka E 1.7 Representing Habitation in Crosswind direction
A7 Dhaneli NE 4.3 Representing Habitation in Upwind Direction
A8 Achanakpur S 3.5 Representing Habitation in Downwind direction

3.7
Figure 3.3:Map showing AAQ Monitoring Stations

AMBIENT AIR QUALITY
MONITORING STATIONS
A Monitoring Station
A5
A7
A3
A1
A6
A2
A4
A8

3.8
Table No.3.2.4 : Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Data

Sampling Location: Project Site Sampling Period: Oct. 2019 to Dec. 2019
Unit : g /m3
Parameter Maximum Minimum 98th percentile Standard as per NAAQS
PM2.5 23.1 20.2 23.0 60
1. PM10 39.6 34.5 39.5 100
SO2 7.8 6.7 7.8 80
NO2 8.4 6.9 8.4 80
CO 426 348 425 2000
Sampling Location: Bakulahi Sampling Period: Oct. 2019 to Dec. 2019
Unit : g /m3
PM2.5 24.1 21.1 24.1 60
2. PM10 40.7 36.1 40.5 100
SO2 8.1 6.9 8.1 80
NO2 8.2 6.5 8.2 80
CO 457 372 455 2000
Sampling Location: Daurabhatha Sampling Period: Oct. 2019 to Dec. 2019
Unit:g /m3
PM2.5 25.3 22.5 25.3 60
3. PM10 44.2 40.3 44.0 100
SO2 8.5 7.1 8.5 80
NO2 8.8 7.6 8.8 80
CO 486 394 486 2000
Sampling Location: Kosmanda Sampling Period: Oct. 2019 to Dec. 2019
Unit : g /m3
PM2.5 23.5 20.7 23.5 60
4. PM10 42.3 37.8 42.1 100
SO2 7.4 6.5 7.4 80
NO2 8.2 7.0 8.2 80
CO 433 325 430 2000

3.9
Table No.3.2.5 : Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Data

Sampling Location: Nipaniya Sampling Period: Oct. 2019 to Dec. 2019
Unit : g /m3
PM2.5 32.1 27.1 32.1 60
5. PM10 54.5 48.3 54.5 100
SO2 11.6 9.5 11.6 80
NOX 15.2 13.2 15.2 80
CO 718 592 715 2000
Sampling Location: Mopka Sampling Period: Oct. 2019 to Dec. 2019
Unit : g /m3
PM2.5 26.4 24.1 26.3 60
6. PM10 46.8 42.5 46.6 100
SO2 8.3 7.2 8.3 80
NOX 9.0 7.9 9.0 80
CO 536 405 530 2000
Sampling Location: Dhaneli Sampling Period: Oct. 2019 to Dec. 2019
Unit:g /m3
PM2.5 24.8 22.7 24.8 60
7. PM10 44.9 39.6 44.8 100
SO2 8.7 7.6 8.7 80
NOX 8.9 7.3 8.8 80
CO 505 422 502 2000
Sampling Location: Achanakpur Sampling Period: Oct. 2019 to Dec. 2019
Unit : g /m3
PM2.5 28.3 24.6 28.3 60
8. PM10 49.7 43.5 49.7 100
SO2 8.8 7.6 8.8 80
NOX 10.4 8.2 10.4 80
CO 588 455 585 2000

3.10
3.2.4 BAR DIAGRAMS SHOWING THE SUMMARY OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY DATA

3.11
3.2.5 INTERPRETATION OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING

The 98th percentile PM2.5 concentration recorded at the Project Site is 23.0 g /m3.
The 98th percentile PM10 concentration recorded at the Project Site is 39.5 g /m3.
The 98th percentile SO2 concentration recorded at the Project Site is 7.8 g/m3.
The 98th percentile NO2 concentration recorded at the Project Site is 8.4 g/m3.
The 98th percentile CO concentration recorded at the Project Site is 425 g /m3.
The highest 98th percentile PM2.5 concentration was recorded at Nipaniya with a value of
32.1 g/m3.
The highest 98th percentile PM10 concentration was recorded at Nipaniya with a value of

3.12
54.5 g/m3.
The highest 98th percentile SO2 concentration was recorded at Nipaniya with a value of
11.6 g/m3.
The highest 98th percentile NO2 concentration was recorded at Nipaniya with a value of
15.2 g/m3.
The 98th percentile CO concentration recorded at the Nipaniya is 715 g /m3.
The highest concentrations for PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NO2 & CO are recorded at Nipaniya Village
due to commercial area, near the Railway Station & close proximity to major district road.
Ambient air quality was monitored for PM 2.5, PM10, SO2, NO2 & CO at 8 stations including
project site during 1st October 2019 to 31st December 2019. The following are the
concentrations of various parameters at the monitoring stations:
Table No.3.2.6 : AAQ Data Summary
S.No. Parameter Concentration
1. PM2.5 : 20.2 to 32.1 g/m3
2. PM10 : 34.5 to 54.5 g/m3
3. SO2 : 6.5 to 11.6 g/m3
4. NO2 : 6.4 to 15.2 g/m3
5. CO : 325 to 718 g/m3
3.3 NOISE ENVIRONMENT

The physical description of sound concerns its loudness as a function of frequency. Noise
in general is sound, which is composed of many frequency components of various loudness
distributed over the audible frequency range. Various noise scales have been introduced
to describe, in a single number, the response of an average human being to a complex
sound made up various frequencies at different loudness levels. The most common and
heavily favoured of those scales is the A weighted decibel (dBA). This is more suitable for
audible range of 20 to 20,000 Hertz. The scale has been designed to weigh various
components of noise according to the response of a human ear.
The impact of noise sources on surrounding community depends on
 Characteristics of noise sources (instantaneous, intermittent or continuous in nature).
It is well known that steady noise not as annoying as one that is continuously varying
in loudness.
3.13
 The time, at which noise occurs, for example loud noise levels at night in residential
areas are not acceptable because of sleep disturbance.
 The location of the noise source, with respect to noise sensitive area, which determines
the loudness and period of noise exposure.
The environmental impact of noise can have several effects varying from Noise Induced
Hearing Loss (NIHL) to annoyance depending on loudness of Noise levels.
The environmental impact assessment of noise from the proposed project can be carried
out by taking into consideration of various factors: potential damage to hearing, potential
physiological responses, and annoyance and general community responses.
The main objective of noise level monitoring is to assess the background noise levels in
different zones viz., industrial, commercial, residential and silence zones within the study
area.
The basic studies conducted were
a. Assessment of background noise levels.
b. Identification and monitoring the major noise generating sources in the study area.
c. Impact of noise on general population in the study zone of 10 Km. radius.
3.3.1 RECONNAISSANCE
Noise levels were measured at different locations within 10 Km. radius of the plant such
as villages, bus stands etc.
3.3.1.1 BACKGROUND NOISE

Baseline noise data has been measured at different locations using A-weighted sound
pressure level meter. The equivalent day time noise levels in the study zone are ranging
from 38.1 dBA to 59.5 dBA.The equivalent Night time noise levels in the study zone are
ranging from 34.2 dBA to 43.2 dBA.The equivalent day-night noise levels in the study zone
are ranging from 41.26 dBA to 57.57 dBA.
3.3.1.2 SOURCES OF NOISE

Typical considerations in environmental noise assessment can be divided into two
categories; one is related to noise sources and the other related to potential receiver. Two
quantities are needed to describe completely the strength of the source. They are sound
Power level and directivity. Sound Power levels measures the total sound Power radiated
3.14
by the source in all directions where as directivity is a measure of difference in radiation

with direction. This concept of sound Power level and directivity index makes it possible to
calculate the sound pressure level created by the source.
3.3.2 COMMUNITY NOISE

The ambient noise level is characterized by significant variations above a base or a residual
noise level. The residual noise level is that level below which the ambient noise does not
seem to drop during a given time interval and is generally caused by the unidentified
distant sources. It differs in rural and urban areas. At night, its level is low due to lesser
elements of noise. The annoyance that people experience depends upon the number of
noise elements that produce noise concurrently at a given time that occur during a time
interval.
The noise rating developed by EPA for specification of community noise from all sources is
the day night sound level, Ldn. It is similar to a 24 hour equivalent sound level except that
during the night period, which extends from 10.00 p.m. to 6.00 a.m. A 10 dBA weighing
penalty is added to the account for the fact that noise at night when people are trying to
sleep is judged more annoying than the same noise during the day time.
The Ldn for a given location in a community is calculated from an hourly equivalent sound
level given by the following equation.
Ldn =10 log (1/24 [15 (10(Ld/10) + 9 (10(Ln+10)/10 )] )
Where Ld is the equivalent noise level during day time (6A .M. to 10 P.M.)
Ln is the equivalent noise level during night time (10 P.M. to 6 A.M.)
3.3.2.1 OCCUPATIONAL EXPOSURE

To assess the magnitude of impact due to noise sources, it is essential to know the
following:
a. The duration of sound.
b. Distribution through the working day.
c. Overall noise levels.
d. It's composition including frequency and intensity at various intervals of time.
Other factors regarding receiver include

3.15
a. The age of the individual.

b. The sensitivity of the individual.
c. The efficiency of the protective devices used.
After characterizing the noise sources noise at receiver's location, the impact must be
assessed. The environmental impact of noise can lead to the following effects.
a. Damages the hearing capacity.
b. Interference in communication.
c. Interference with work.
d. Interference with sleep.
e. Causes annoyance.
3.3.3 METHODOLOGY ADOPTED FOR NOISE LEVEL OBSERVATION

For measurement of Ambient Noise level in the Study area, a Digital Sound Level Meter
(Make & Model: Lutron SL-4001) was used. The instrument was calibrated with a Standard
Acoustic calibrator before using in the field. The measurements were carried out
continuously for the 24-hour period to obtain hourly equivalent sound pressure level, 1
hour Leq. From these values, day and night time as well as 24-hour Leq values were also
calculated. The Leq is the equivalent continuous sound level, which is equivalent to the
same sound energy as the fluctuating sound measured in the same period.
Table No. 3.3.1: Guidance for Assessment of Representativeness and Reliability of

Baseline Environmental Attributes
Attributes Sampling Measurement Remarks
Noise Network Frequency Method
Hourly equivalent Identified study area Once in each Instrument: IS:4954-1968 as
noise levels season Noise level meter adopted by CPCB
Hourly equivalent In plant Once Instrument: CPCB/OSHA
noise levels (1.5 m from machinery) Noise level meter
Hourly equivalent Highways Once in each Instrument: CPCB/IS:4954-1968
noise levels season Noise level meter

3.16
3.3.4 NOISE LEVEL OBSERVATIONS IN THE STUDY AREA [Gen. ToR # 6 (vii)]
Baseline noise levels have been monitored at different locations within the study zone of
the plant. The impact of Noise levels will be confined to max. of 2.5 Kms. Hence, we have
chosen monitoring station close to the plant site. 8 nos. of stations have been selected for
measurement of noise levels and their distances with respect to site are shown in Table
No. 3.3.2.
Table No. 3.3.2: Noise Level Monitoring Stations
S.No. MONITORING DIRECTION DISTANCE CRITERIA FOR SELECTION
STATION w.r.t site w.r.t site
(in Kms.)
N1 Project Site --- --- Represents the Project Site
N2 Bakulahi S 0.15 Represents nearest Habitation in the
Residential area
N3 Daurabhatha W 0.35 Represents Residential area
N4 Kosmanda S 1.2 Represents Residential area
N5 Nipaniya N 2.3 Represents commercial area & near to
the Railway station
N6 Mopka E 1.7 Represents Residential area
N7 Bharatpur N 1.2 Represents Residential area
N8 Semradih SSW 1.7 Represents Residential area
Table No. 3.2.3: Equivalent Day Night Noise Levels

S.No. MONITORING EQUIVALENT NOISE LEVELS (dBA) Standard
STATION DAY NIGHT DAY-NIGHT
N1 Project Site 38.1 34.2 41.26
Residential
Daytime – 55 dBA
N2 Bakulahi 43.6 37.4 44.95
Night time – 45 dBA
N3 Daurabhatha 46.5 39.5 47.38
Industrial*
Daytime – 75 dBA
N4 Kosmanda 44.6 36.3 44.86
N5 Nipaniya ** 59.5 43.2 57.57
Commercial **
Daytime – 65 dBA
N6 Mopka 50.8 40.6 50.00
N7 Bharatpur 42.8 38.4 45.26 Silence zone #
Daytime – 50 dBA
N8 Semradih 45.5 37.6 45.86 Night time – 40 dBA

3.17
3.3.5 BAR DIAGRAM SHOWING THE SUMMARY OF NOISE LEVEL MONITORING DATA
3.3.6 INTREPRETATION OF NOISE LEVEL MONITORING

 The noise levels monitored at Project Site are within the norms prescribed for Residential
areas.
 **The noise levels monitored at Nipaniya (Commercial area) are within the norms
prescribed for Commercial Zone.
 The noise levels monitored at all residential areas are within the norms prescribed for
Residential Zone.

3.18
Figure 3.4:Map showing Noise Level Monitoring Stations NOISE LEVEL

MONITORING STATIONS
N Monitoring Station
N5
N8
N7
N3
N1
N6
N2
N4

3.19
3.4 WATER QUALITY IMPACTS
3.4.1 SURFACE WATER QUALITY [Gen.TOR # 6 (iv)]

Shivnath River, Jamuniya Nadi, Bhatapara Branch of Mahanadi Canal are flowing at a
distance of 5.9 Kms. 5.8 Kms. & 0.18 Kms. from the plant. 2 no. of Samples from Shivnath
River i.e. 60m Upstream & 60 m Downstream, 1 no. of Sample from Jamuniya Nadi, 1 no.
of sample from Pond near Bakulahi Village, Pond near Semradih & Pond near Mopka
Village have been collected and analyzed for various parameters. No other surface water
samples have been collected as the study period. The analysis of samples shows that all
the parameters are in accordance with BIS-2296 specifications. The analysis is furnished in
Table No. 3.4.1 to 3.4.4.
Table No. 3.4.1: Surface Water Quality Analysis (Shivnath River)

Shivnath River 60 m Upstream (SW1) & 60 m Downstream (SW2) Month: October 2019
S.NO. PARAMETER Standard as per UNIT SW1 SW2
BIS : 2296
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
1. Colour ----- ----- ----- -----
2. pH 6.5-8.5 ----- 7.8 7.6
3. Turbidity ----- NTU 0.9 1
4. Electrical Conductivity ----- ms/cm 648 580
5. Total Dissolved Solids 1500 mg/l 388 347
6. Dissolved Oxygen 4 (Min.) mg/l 6.1 5.9
CHEMICAL CHARACTERISTICS
7. Total Hardness 1500 mg/l 187 172
8. Calcium Hardness (as Ca) 200 mg/l 116 107
9. Magnesium Hardness (as Mg) 100 mg/l 71 65
10. Alkalinity ----- mg/l 213 198
11. Sulphates 400 mg/l 128 111
12. Chlorides 600 mg/l 202 184
13. Nitrates as NO3 20 mg/l 4.1 3.8
14. Fluoride as F 1.5 mg/l 0.61 0.58
15. Sodium as Na ----- mg/l 33 26
16. BOD 3 mg/l 0.85 0.72
17. COD ----- mg/l 4.1 3.8
18. Residual chlorine ----- mg/l <0.01 <0.01
19. Cyanides as CN- 0.05 mg/l <0.01 <0.01
20. Phenols as C6H5OH 0.005 mg/l Absent Absent
21. Hexavalent chromium as Cr 0.05 mg/l <0.01 <0.01
22. Iron as Fe 50 mg/l 0.14 0.18

3.20
23. Copper as Cu 1.5 mg/l <0.01 <0.01

24. Arsenic as As 0.2 mg/l <0.01 <0.01
25. Selenium <0.01 mg/l <0.01 <0.01
26. Cadmium as cd <0.01 mg/l <0.01 <0.01
27. Boron as B <0.01 mg/l <0.01 <0.01
28. Mercury as Mg <0.01 mg/l <0.001 <0.001
29. Lead as Pb 0.1 mg/l <0.01 <0.01
30. Silica as SiO2 ---- mg/l 2.4 2.8
31. Mineral oil <0.01 mg/l <0.01 <0.01
32. Total coliforms 500 (MPN/100 ml) 88 95
Table No. 3.4.2: Surface Water Quality Analysis (Jamuniya Nadi & Bakulahi Pond)
Jamuniya Nadi (SW3) & Pond near Bakulahi Village (SW4) Month: October 2019
BIS : 2296
1. Colour ----- ----- ----- -----
2. pH 6.5-8.5 ----- 7.4 8.1
3. Turbidity ----- NTU 1.8 2.8
10. Alkalinity ----- mg/l 254 355
14. Fluoride as F 1.5 mg/l 0.78 1.22
15. Sodium as Na ----- mg/l 58 79
16. BOD 3 mg/l 2.6 4.2
17. COD ----- mg/l 8.4 16.2
22. Iron as Fe 50 mg/l 0.22 0.28
23. Copper as Cu 1.5 mg/l <0.01 <0.01
24. Arsenic as As 0.2 mg/l <0.01 <0.01
25. Selenium <0.01 mg/l <0.01 <0.01
26. Cadmium as cd <0.01 mg/l <0.01 <0.01
3.21
27. Boron as B <0.01 mg/l <0.01 <0.01

28. Mercury as Mg <0.01 mg/l <0.001 <0.001
29. Lead as Pb 0.1 mg/l <0.01 <0.01
30. Silica as SiO2 ---- mg/l 3.9 4.6
31. Mineral oil <0.01 mg/l <0.01 <0.01
32 Total coliforms 500 (MPN/100 ml) 202 344
Table No. 3.4.3: Surface Water Quality Analysis (Semaridih Pond & Mopka Pond)
Pond near Semradih (SW5) & Pond near Mopka Village (SW6) Month: October 2019
BIS : 2296
1. Colour ----- ----- ----- -----
2. pH 6.5-8.5 ----- 7.7 7.4
3. Turbidity ----- NTU 3.1 2.2
10. Alkalinity ----- mg/l 281 304
14. Fluoride as F 1.5 mg/l 1.15 0.95
15. Sodium as Na ----- mg/l 66 41
16. BOD 3 mg/l 3.4 4.3
17. COD ----- mg/l 12.8 14.2
22. Iron as Fe 50 mg/l 0.34 0.19
23. Copper as Cu 1.5 mg/l <0.01 <0.01
24. Arsenic as As 0.2 mg/l <0.01 <0.01
25. Selenium <0.01 mg/l <0.01 <0.01
26. Cadmium as cd <0.01 mg/l <0.01 <0.01
27. Boron as B <0.01 mg/l <0.01 <0.01
28. Mercury as Mg <0.01 mg/l <0.001 <0.001
29. Lead as Pb 0.1 mg/l <0.01 <0.01

3.22
30. Silica as SiO2 ---- mg/l 3.1 4.8

31. Mineral oil <0.01 mg/l <0.01 <0.01
32. Total coliforms 500 (MPN/100 ml) 278 411
Table No. 3.4.4: Surface Water Quality Analysis (Mahanadi Branch Canal)
Sampling Location: Mahanadi Branch Canal (SW7)
Standard as per
S.NO. PARAMETER UNIT SW7
BIS: 2296
1 Colour --- ----- -----
2 pH --- 7.2 6.5-8.5
3 Turbidity NTU 5.2 -----
4 Electrical Conductivity ms/cm 385 -----
5 Total Dissolved Solids mg/l 231 1500
6 Dissolved Oxygen mg/l 5.2 4 (Min.)
7 Total Hardness mg/l 176 1500
8 Calcium Hardness (as Ca) mg/l 109 200
9 Magnesium Hardness (as Mg) mg/l 67 100
10 Alkalinity mg/l 192 -----
11 Sulphates mg/l 74 400
12 Chlorides mg/l 122 600
13 Nitrates as NO3 mg/l 3.9 20
14 Fluoride as F mg/l 0.38 1.5
15 Sodium as Na mg/l 36 -----
16 BOD mg/l 2.5 3
17 COD mg/l 7.7 -----
18 Residual chlorine mg/l <0.01 -----
19 Cyanides as CN- mg/l <0.01 0.05
20 Phenols as C6H5OH mg/l Absent 0.005
21 Hexavalent chromium as Cr mg/l <0.01 0.05
22 Iron as Fe mg/l 0.21 50
23 Copper as Cu mg/l <0.01 1.5
24 Arsenic as As mg/l <0.01 0.2
25 Selenium mg/l <0.01 <0.01
26 Cadmium as cd mg/l <0.01 <0.01
27 Boron as B mg/l <0.01 <0.01
28 Mercury as Mg mg/l <0.001 <0.01
29 Lead as Pb mg/l <0.01 0.1
30 Silica as SiO2 mg/l 2.8 ----
31 Mineral oil mg/l <0.01 <0.01
32 Total coliforms (MPN/100 ml) 144 5000

3.23
3.4.2 INTERPRETATION OF SURFACE WATER ANALYSIS

The following are the analytical values (Minimum & Maximum values among all the
stations) of the surface water samples collected for the following parameters:
Table No. 3.4.5: Range of concentration values for Surface Water Analysis
S.No. Parameter : Range of Concentration
1. pH : 7.2 to 8.1
2. DO (in mg/l) : 3.2 to 6.1
3. BOD (in mg/l) : 0.72 to 4.3
4. COD (in mg/l) : 3.8 to 16.2
5. TDS (in mg/l) : 231 to 816
6. Sulphates (in mg/l) : 74 to 291
7. Chlorides (in mg/l) : 122 to 403
All the parameters in the water samples collected are in conformity with BIS: 2296
3.4.3 GROUND WATER QUALITY ANALYSIS [Gen. TOR # 6 (vi) & Addl. ToR # 13]
The ground water samples have been collected and analyzed for various parameters like
pH, Suspended Solids, Total Dissolved Solids, Temperature, Total Hardness, Calcium
Hardness, Magnesium hardness, Alkalinity, Fluoride, Chloride, Sulphates, Nitrates,
Phenolic compounds, Heavy metals etc. and is compared with the standards to know the
water quality. Selection of sampling locations will be generally done based on the following
factors:
 Representation of project site.
 Topography
 Industrial Areas
 Residential areas
 Agricultural Activity
Eight (8) numbers of ground water samples from bore wells were collected from the near
by villages to assess ground water quality impacts. The ground water sampling locations
and their distances from the project site are shown in Table No. 3.4.6. These water samples
are analyzed for various parameters as per IS: 10500. The ground water characteristics
were shown in Table Nos. 3.4.7 to 3.4.14. The Ground water sampling stations are shown
in Figure 3.5.

3.24
Table No. 3.4.6: Ground Water Quality Sampling Stations

S.No. SAMPLING DIRECTION DISTANCE CRITERIA FOR SELECTION
STATION w.r.t site w.r.t site
(in Kms.)
G1 Project Site --- --- Borewell sample representing the near the
project site.
G2 Bakulahi S 0.15 Borewell sample representing the nearest
habitation
G3 Daurabhatha W 0.35 Borewell sample representing Residential area
G4 Mopka E 1.7 Borewell sample based on Topography
(Upstream)
G5 Kodwa NW 1.2 Borewell sample representing Agricultural
activity, near to River & also based on topography
(downstream)
G6 Dhaneli NE 4.3 Borewell sample representing Agricultural activity
& also based on topography (upstream)
G7 Borsi SE 6.5 Borewell sample representing Agricultural activity
& also based on topography (downstream)
G8 Singarpur NW 4.4 Borewell sample representing Agricultural activity
& also based on topography (downstream)
The Groundwater sample analysis indicates that all physical, Chemical & Bacteriological
parameters of all the samples collected are within the Potable water standards as per BIS-
10500 standards.

3.25
Figure 3.5:Map showing GW Sampling Stations GROUNDWATER

SAMPLING LOCATIONS
G5
G SAMPLING LOCATION
G8
G6
G3
G1
G4
G2
G7

3.26
Table No. 3.4.7: Ground Water Quality Analysis (Project site)

Sampling Location: Project site Month: October 2019
Standard as per IS: 10500
S.NO. PARAMETER Desirable limit UNIT Results
(Permissible limit)
1 Colour 5 (25) Hazen <5
2 Odour U/O --- U/O
3 pH 6.5 – 8.5 7.8
4 Turbidity 5 (10) NTU 1.4
5 Electrical Conductivity Limit not specified ms/cm 1012
6 Total Dissolved Solids 500 (2000) mg/l 606
7 Total Suspended Solids --- mg/l 0.6
8 Total Hardness 300 (600) mg/l 303
9 Calcium Hardness 75 (200 as Ca) mg/l 188
10 Magnesium Hardness 30 (100 as Mg) mg/l 115
11 Alkalinity 200 (600) mg/l 219
12 Sulphates 200 (400) mg/l 202
13 Chlorides 250 (1000) mg/l 313
14 Nitrates as NO3 45 (45) mg/l 2.8
15 Fluoride as F 1.0/1.5 mg/l 0.68
16 Sodium as Na Limit not specified mg/l 44
17 Residual chlorine 0.2 mg/l <0.01
18 Cyanides as CN- 0.05 (0.05) mg/l <0.01
19 Phenols as C6H5OH 0.001 (0.002) mg/l Absent
20 Total chromium as Cr 0.05 (0.05) mg/l <0.01
21 Iron as Fe 0.3 (1.0) mg/l 0.015
22 Copper as Cu 0.05 (1.5) mg/l <0.01
23 Arsenic as As 0.01 (0.01) mg/l <0.01
24 Selenium as Se 0.01 (0.01) mg/l <0.01
25 Cadmium as cd 0.01 (0.01) mg/l <0.01
26 Boron as B 1.0 (5.0) mg/l <0.01
27 Mercury as Hg 0.001 (0.001) mg/l <0.001
28 Lead as Pb 0.05 (0.05) mg/l <0.01
29 Silica as SiO2 --- mg/l 1.5
30 Manganese as Mn 0.1 (0.3) mg/l <0.01
31 Anionic detergents as MBAS 0.2 (1.0) mg/l <0.01
32 Total coliforms 10 (-) (MPN/100 ml) Absent
U/O – Unobjectionable

3.27
Table No. 3.4.8: Ground Water Quality Analysis (Bakulahi)

Sampling Location: Bakulahi Month: October 2019
(Permissible limit)
2 Odour U/O --- U/O
3 pH 6.5 – 8.5 7.6
12 Sulphates 200 (400) mg/l 229
13 Chlorides 250 (1000) mg/l 354
21 Iron as Fe 0.3 (1.0) mg/l 0.019
22 Copper as Cu 0.05 (1.5) mg/l <0.01
23 Arsenic as As 0.01 (0.01) mg/l <0.01
25 Cadmium as cd 0.01 (0.01) mg/l <0.01
26 Boron as B 1.0 (5.0) mg/l <0.01
27 Mercury as Hg 0.001 (0.001) mg/l <0.001
28 Lead as Pb 0.05 (0.05) mg/l <0.01

3.28
Table No. 3.4.9: Ground Water Quality Analysis (Daurabhatha)

Sampling Location: Daurabhatha Month: October 2019
(Permissible limit)
2 Odour U/O --- U/O
3 pH 6.5 – 8.5 7.4
12 Sulphates 200 (400) mg/l 186
13 Chlorides 250 (1000) mg/l 248
21 Iron as Fe 0.3 (1.0) mg/l 0.027
22 Copper as Cu 0.05 (1.5) mg/l <0.01
23 Arsenic as As 0.01 (0.01) mg/l <0.01
25 Cadmium as cd 0.01 (0.01) mg/l <0.01
26 Boron as B 1.0 (5.0) mg/l <0.01
27 Mercury as Hg 0.001 (0.001) mg/l <0.001
28 Lead as Pb 0.05 (0.05) mg/l <0.01

3.29
Table No. 3.4.10: Ground Water Quality Analysis (Mopka)

Sampling Location: Mopka Month: October 2019
(Permissible limit)
2 Odour U/O --- U/O
3 pH 6.5 – 8.5 7.1
12 Sulphates 200 (400) mg/l 266
13 Chlorides 250 (1000) mg/l 344
21 Iron as Fe 0.3 (1.0) mg/l 0.012
22 Copper as Cu 0.05 (1.5) mg/l <0.01
23 Arsenic as As 0.01 (0.01) mg/l <0.01
25 Cadmium as cd 0.01 (0.01) mg/l <0.01
26 Boron as B 1.0 (5.0) mg/l <0.01
27 Mercury as Hg 0.001 (0.001) mg/l <0.001
28 Lead as Pb 0.05 (0.05) mg/l <0.01

3.30
Table No. 3.4.11: Ground Water Quality Analysis (Kodwa)

Sampling Location: Kodwa Month: October 2019
(Permissible limit)
2 Odour U/O --- U/O
3 pH 6.5 – 8.5 7.2
12 Sulphates 200 (400) mg/l 178
13 Chlorides 250 (1000) mg/l 282
14 Nitrates as NO3 45 (45) mg/l 3
21 Iron as Fe 0.3 (1.0) mg/l 0.033
22 Copper as Cu 0.05 (1.5) mg/l <0.01
23 Arsenic as As 0.01 (0.01) mg/l <0.01
25 Cadmium as cd 0.01 (0.01) mg/l <0.01
26 Boron as B 1.0 (5.0) mg/l <0.01
27 Mercury as Hg 0.001 (0.001) mg/l <0.001
28 Lead as Pb 0.05 (0.05) mg/l <0.01

3.31
Table No. 3.4.12: Ground Water Quality Analysis (Dhaneli)

Sampling Location: Dhaneli Month: October 2019
(Permissible limit)
2 Odour U/O --- U/O
3 pH 6.5 – 8.5 7.9
12 Sulphates 200 (400) mg/l 212
13 Chlorides 250 (1000) mg/l 357
21 Iron as Fe 0.3 (1.0) mg/l 0.024
22 Copper as Cu 0.05 (1.5) mg/l <0.01
23 Arsenic as As 0.01 (0.01) mg/l <0.01
25 Cadmium as cd 0.01 (0.01) mg/l <0.01
26 Boron as B 1.0 (5.0) mg/l <0.01
27 Mercury as Hg 0.001 (0.001) mg/l <0.001
28 Lead as Pb 0.05 (0.05) mg/l <0.01

3.32
Table No. 3.4.13: Ground Water Quality Analysis (Borsi)

Sampling Location: Borsi Month: October 2019
(Permissible limit)
2 Odour U/O --- U/O
3 pH 6.5 – 8.5 7.1
12 Sulphates 200 (400) mg/l 242
13 Chlorides 250 (1000) mg/l 355
21 Iron as Fe 0.3 (1.0) mg/l 0.018
22 Copper as Cu 0.05 (1.5) mg/l <0.01
23 Arsenic as As 0.01 (0.01) mg/l <0.01
25 Cadmium as cd 0.01 (0.01) mg/l <0.01
26 Boron as B 1.0 (5.0) mg/l <0.01
27 Mercury as Hg 0.001 (0.001) mg/l <0.001
28 Lead as Pb 0.05 (0.05) mg/l <0.01

3.33
Table No. 3.4.14: Ground Water Quality Analysis (Singarpur)

Sampling Location: Singarpur Month: October 2019
(Permissible limit)
2 Odour U/O --- U/O
3 pH 6.5 – 8.5 8.1
12 Sulphates 200 (400) mg/l 274
13 Chlorides 250 (1000) mg/l 398
21 Iron as Fe 0.3 (1.0) mg/l 0.032
22 Copper as Cu 0.05 (1.5) mg/l <0.01
23 Arsenic as As 0.01 (0.01) mg/l <0.01
25 Cadmium as cd 0.01 (0.01) mg/l <0.01
26 Boron as B 1.0 (5.0) mg/l <0.01
27 Mercury as Hg 0.001 (0.001) mg/l <0.001
28 Lead as Pb 0.05 (0.05) mg/l <0.01

3.34
3.4.4 INTREPRETATION OF GROUND WATER QUALITY ANALYSIS

The following table depicts the analytical values of the Ground water samples collected for
the following parameters:
Table No. 3.4.15: Interpretation of Ground Water Quality analysis
S.No. Parameters : Concentration range
1. pH : 7.1 to 8.1
2. TDS (in mg/l) : 511 to 791 mg/l
3. TSS (in mg/l) : 0.28 to 0.6 mg/l
4. Total Hardness (in mg/l) : 194 to 367 mg/l
5. Chlorides (in mg/l) : 248 to 398 mg/l
6. Fluoride (in mg/l) : 0.54 to 0.94 mg/l
7. Iron (in mg/l) : 0.012 to 0.033 mg/l
The Groundwater sample analysis indicates that all physical, Chemical & Bacteriological
parameters of all the samples collected are within the Potable water standards as per BIS-
10500 standards.
3.5 LAND ENVIRONMENT
3.5.1 GEOLOGICAL & HYDROGEOLOGICAL STATUS OF THE AREA [Gen.TOR # 4 (ix)]

The district is underlain mainly by two distinct geological formations ranging in agefrom
Achaean to recent. The crystalline rocks occupy major parts of the district comprising of
granite, granite gneiss, phyllite, and schist. Granites and phyllites intruded by quartz veins
form the basement of the basin. The Chhattisgarh super group overlies granites. The contact
between the Achaeans and the overlaying sedimentary is faulted alongthe western margin
of the basin, which can be confirmed by the presence of highly sheared and brecciaed rocks
in this region while unconformity lies between these two in the remaining portions of the
basin, which can be quite evidenced by the presence of pebbly conglomerate bed at the
basal portion of the sedimentaries.
The rocks of Chhattisgarh Super group are unconformably overlying the basement crystalline
and are represented by the sandstone, limestone and shale sequence occupying the north
central and central part of the district. The rocks of Chhattisgarh super group have been
classified into Chandrapur group and Raipur Group. The rocks of Chandrapur group are the
oldest of Chhattisgarh Supergroup and can be further divided into three formation viz
Lohardih, Choparadih and Kansapathar arranged in the ascending order of superposition.
The sequence shows a variable thickness ranging from 20 m to as much as 90 m. The

3.35
maximum thickness is attained in the SE part, thinning westward as well as in northern side
and directly overlying the crystalline basement.
Raipur group comprising a predominantly argillite- carbonate sequence, conformably
overlies the chandrapur group with a gradational contact. Raipur group has been subdivided
into six formations representing three cycles of carbonate-argillite sedimentation viz
Charmuria and Gunderdehi, Chandi and Tarenga and Hirri and Maniari arranged in the
ascending order of super position. The alluvium deposits in the area are mainly confined all
along with the flood plains on either side extending 2 km at places. These comprise mostly
gravels, coarse to medium sand and silts. It attains a thickness of 10 to 20 m along Kharun
and Seonath River.
Hard rock mainly consist of limestone, shale, dolomite and sandstone belong to Chhattisgarh
Supergroup of Proterozoic age. Ground water occurs in phreatic condition in the weathered
mantle of these rocks, which extends up to a depth of 25 mbgl. The caverns formed in
limestone and dolomites holds good amount of ground water which are limited mostly to
around 80 meters. Limestone and dolomite form the main aquifer system in the area.
Charmuria limestone and Gunderdehi shale are not very good yielding. Cavernous limestone
of Chandi formation forms the good.
DEPTH OF WATER LEVEL

There are 79 no. of permanent observation wells (National Hydrograph Network Stations);
out of which 48 nos are dug wells and 31 no.s are piezometers. These are established in the
district to monitor the water levels four times a year and water quality once in a year. The
pre-monsoon ground water level in the district varies from 2.75 to 15 mbgl with an average
value around 7.1 mbgl and the postmonsoon water level varies from 0.56 to 7.86 mbgl with
an average around 2.8 mbgl.
DRAINAGE PATTERN OF THE STUDY AREA

The origin of Shivnath river is in the 642m high Panabaras hill of Rajnandgaon district’s
Ambagarh Tehsil. This river flows a distance of 40km northwards from its origin and finally
meets the Mahanadi River. The major tributaries of the river are Haaf, Agar, Maniari, Arpa,
Leelagar, Kharkhara, Kharun, and Jamuniya.

3.36
Figure 3.6: Drainage Pattern Map [Gen. TOR # 4 (x)]

3.37
3.5.2 MINERAL RESERVES

There are no mineral reserves present in the study area.
3.5.3 SEISMIC EFFECT

The project site falls in zone-II of Seismic Zone classification of India.
Figure: 3.7: Seismic Zone classification of India
REAL ISPAT & POWER LTD.
3.5.4 LAND USE PATTERN [Gen. TOR # 4 (viii), 5 (ii) & Addl. ToR # 4]
The following is the land use pattern within 10 Km radius of the project site & LULC map,
Satellite Imagery and Drainage pattern are shown below:
Table No. 3.5.1: Breakup Of Land-Use & Land Cover Of The Study Area
S. No. LANDUSE AREA (Sq. km) %
1. BUILT- UP LAND
A. Settlements 13.572 3.9
B. Industrial area 3.828 1.1
2. WATERBODIES
A. Tank / River etc. 21.924 6.3
3. CROP LAND
A. Single crop 251.952 72.4
B. Double crop 25.056 7.2
4. WASTELANDS
A. Land with scrub 14.268 4.1
B. Land without scrub 16.008 4.6
C. Aquaculture 1.392 0.4
TOTAL 348 100
3.38
Figure 3.8 : Pie Diagram Showing Breakup Of LULC of the Study Area

3.39
Figure 3.9: Satellite Imagery of the Study area [Gen. TOR # 5 (ii)]

3.40
Figure 3.9 : LULC [Gen. TOR # 5 (ii)]

Map

3.41
3.5.5 SOIL ENVIRONMENT [Gen. TOR # 6 (vii)]

Eight (8) no. of soil samples were collected and for analyzed for various parameters like
texture, infiltration rate, bulk density, pH, Ca, Mg, Na, K, Zn, Mn etc. The Soil samples are
taken from depth of 15 -90 cm will be collected. The Physio-chemical characteristics of soil
were analyzed using standard methods.
Selection of sampling locations will be generally done based on the following factors:
 Representation of project site.
 Industrial Areas
 Residential areas
 Agricultural Activity
 Proximity to the Forest
 Proximity to Water body
The soil quality sampling locations and their distances from the project site are shown in
Table 3.5.2. The soil characteristics are shown in Table No. 3.5.3. The soil quality sampling
stations are shown in fig. 3.4.
Table No. 3.5.2 : Soil Quality Sampling Stations

S.No. STATION DIRECTION DISTANCE w.r.t site CRITERIA FOR SELECTION
w.r.t site (in Kms.)
S1 Project Site --- --- Sample representing the project site.
S2 Bakulahi S 0.15 Sample representing nearby Residential
area
S3 Daurabhatha W 0.35 Sample representing Residential area
S4 Mopka E 1.7 Sample representing Residential area
S5 Kodwa NW 1.2 Sample representing near agricultural
activity & Proximity to River.
S6 Dhaneli NE 4.3 Sample representing near agricultural
activity
S7 Borsi SE 6.5 Sample representing near Proximity to
River
S8 Akaltara SW 3.2 Sample representing near agricultural
activity

3.42
Figure 3.10 Map showing Soil Quality Sampling Stations

SOIL SAMPLING
LOCATIONS
S5
S
SAMPLING LOCATION
S6
S3
S1
S4
S2
S8
S7

3.43
TABLE NO. 3.5.3 : SOIL CHARACTERISTICS

Month: October 2019
S.No. Parameter Units Sampling Locations
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8
1. Bulk Density g/cc 1.83 1.76 1.58 1.66 1.49 1.62 1.88 1.55
2. Infiltration rate cm/sec 1.45 1.38 1.62 1.54 1.32 1.45 1.52 1.62
3. pH --- 7.3 7.6 7.8 7.4 7.2 7.6 7.3 7.7
4. Soil type --- Silty Silty Clay Red Sandy Red Silty Mixed
gravel gravel Loam loamy clay loamy gravel Red
5. Calcium mg/100 gm 693 572 712 622 876 594 478 783
6. Electrical Conductivity µS/cm 155 177 194 143 184 272 212 176
7. Nitrogen Kg/Ha 89 78 122 167 322 218 172 124
8. Potash Kg/Ha 39 46 59 67 74 88 46 68
9. Available Phosphorous as P2O5 Kg/Ha 167 188 213 154 354 258 214 196
10. Mn mg/100 gm BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL
11. Zn mg/100 gm BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL
12. Pb mg/100 gm BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL

3.44
Table No. 3.5.4 : Soil Standard Classification

S.No. Parameters Classification
1. pH <4.5 extremely acidic
4.51 - 5.0 very strong acidic
5.01 - 5.5 strongly acidic
5.51-6.0
moderately acidic
6.1 - 6.5 slightly acidic
6.51 - 7.3 Neutral
7.31-7.8 slightly alkaline
7.81-8.5 moderately alkaline
8.51 – 9.0 strongly alkaline
>9.0 Very strongly alkaline
2. Nitrogen (Kg/ha) Up to 50 very less
51-100 less
110-150 good
151-300 better
>300 sufficient
3. Phosphorus (Kg/ha) Up to 15 very less
15 – 30 less
31-50 medium
51-65 on average sufficient
66-80 sufficient
>80 more than sufficient
4. Potassium (Kg/ha) 0 – 120 very less
120-180 less
180-240 medium
241-300 average
301-360 better
>360 more than sufficient
3.5.6 INTREPRETATION OF SOIL QUALITY ANALYSIS

Samples collected from identified locations indicate pH value ranging from 7.2 to 7.8,
which shows that the soil is neutral to moderately alkaline in nature. Soil texture is mostly
Clay loamy in the study area. Total Nitrogen ranges from 78 to 322 kg/ha, indicates that
nitrogen is less to Sufficient range and Phosphorous is present in the range of 39 to 88
kg/ha which is medium to more than sufficient range. Potassium is found to be ranging
from 154 to 354 Kg/ha which is lesser to better range. Hence, the management has
decided to supplement all the three N,P,K fertilizers to the farmers in the area, so that soil
fertility and accordingly agriculture yield will increase.

3.45
3.6 BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT [Gen. TOR # 6 (x)]

The Biological Environment study has been carried out as a part of the EIA study report to
understand the present status of ecosystem prevailing in the study area and to study the
floristic and fauna diversity of the terrestrial and aquatic environment of the study area
within the 10 km radius of the plant site.
Data collection has been sourced from :
a) Primary source (i.e. Field study)
b) Secondary source (i.e. Local habitants, Literature, Internet, concern Govt.
departments etc.)
All the collected data were classified to interpret the impact of emissions from the
proposed project on the flora and fauna of the region. Survey of the wild plants as well as
cultivated crop plants was made and all the available information was recorded.
3.6.1 OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY

The present study was undertaken with the following objectives:
i. To assess the nature and distribution of vegetation in and around the project within
the study area.
ii. To assess the biodiversity of natural system present in the study area.
iii. Details of flora and fauna, Endemic, Rare, Endangered and Threatened (RET
Species) separately for core and buffer area based on such primary field survey and
secondary secures and clearly indicating the Schedule of fauna present. In case of
any scheduled -I fauna found in the study area, the necessary plan along with
budgetary provisions for their conservation should be prepared in consultation
with State Forest and Wildlife Department.
iv. To study the likely impact of the proposed project on the Biological Environment and
to suggest mitigation measure, if required.
3.6.2 METHODOLOGY OF THE FLORAL AND FAUNAL STUDY

Biological Environment Study was conducted in the month of October 2019 during Post-
Monsoon season by Dr. K. Bayapu Reddy (FAE – EB) & team to assess the list of terrestrial
plant and animal species that occur in the core area and the buffer area up to 10 Km radius
from proposed project site. The entire core area has been surveyed for enumeration of

3.46
flora and fauna. Within the core area 10 quadrats of 5 x 20 m (100 m2) each were chosen
for phytosociological investigation using restricted random sampling techniques. For the
purpose of calculation of Importance Value Indices (IVI) of the core area, quadrat method
was used for estimation of frequency and density while the cover was estimated by
modified line intercept method. The canopy cover of each species that intercepted or over
laid or under laid along a line transect of 500 m was determined based on the total distance
intercepted. The average canopy cover was calculated as the percent cover based on four
transects of 500 m each.
3.6.3 DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT SITE & STUDY AREA

Real Ispat and Power Limited proposed to establish a Steel Plant at Bakulahi &
Dhourabhata Villages, Bhatapara Tehsil, Baloda Bazar – Bhatapara District, Chhattisgarh.
Total land envisaged for the proposed project is 63.52 Ha. (156.909 Acres) of land and
same is in possession of management.
Following is breakup of the total project area:
Table No. 3.6.1: Land Use Statement of Plant Area
1. Bulit-up area including Admin 19.4 48.000
2. Internal roads 6.5 16.000
3. Raw Material & Product Storage Area 10.000
4.0
including coal handling area
4. Solid waste storage 2.2 5.500
5. Tailing storage area 0.5 1.200
6. Water Reservoir 1.2 3.000
7. Greenbelt area 21.1 52.000
8. Switch Yard 0.2 0.500
9. Truck Parking 2.0 5.000
10. Misc. areas (i.e. Store room, Open areas 15.709
6.4
etc.)
Total 63.5 156.909
Out of the total area, about 21.1 Ha. (52 Acres) is earmarked for Greenbelt development.
The land acquired for the proposed project is primarily Private Barren land and out of the
total land, 43.969 Ha. (108.65 Acres) of land is already converted for Industrial Purposed
and remaining is under process. It is more or less a plain land with a gentle slope from
West to East. Vegetation, flora and fauna of the project site and its surroundings up to a
radius of 10 Km were studied. A survey of the flora and fauna of the project site and its

3.47
environs up to a radius of 10 Km reveals the absence of thick forests but open scrub type
communities were very common. There are no National Parks / Sanctuaries / Biosphere
reserves / Reserved Forests or any other protected or ecologically sensitive areas within a
radius of 10 Km from the plant site. The plant site is surrounded by the croplands and
wastelands, residential areas, irrigation canal.
As per LULC of the study area, following is land use within 10 Km. radius:
Settlements – 3.9 %; Industrial Area-1.1%; Tank / River, etc. – 6.3 %; Single crop – 72.4 %;
Double crop – 7.2 %; Land with scrub – 4.1%; Land without scrub – 4.6 %; Aquaculture –
0.4%.
Shivnath River, Jamuniya Nadi are flowing at a distance of 5.9 Kms. & 5.8 Kms. from the
plant and few streams are present within the study area.
3.6.4 DETAILS OF FLORA IN THE STUDY AREA

The Flora species listed below are found in a radius of about 10 Km from the site of the
project site. It is evident from the lists of flora that there were no endemic or endangered
species of plants.
Table No. 3.6.2 : List of trees, shrubs and perennial climbers found in the buffer zone
Latin name Common name Family Main use
Aegle marmelos Stone apple Rutaceae Fruit &
medicinal
Agave americana Sisal Agavaceae Fiber crop
Agave sisiliana Sisal Agavaceae Fiber crop
Allium sativum Garlic Liliaceae Condiment
Allium sepa Onion Liliaceae Vegetable
Amaranthus caudatus Kheda Amaranthaceae Vegetable
Amaranthus tricolor Lal Bhaji Amaranthaceae Vegetable
Annona squamosal Custard-apple Annonaceae Fruit tree
Annona reticulata Ramphal Annonaceae Fruit tree
Basela alba var rubra Purple Indian spinach Basellaceae Vegetable
Basela alba var alba White Indian spinach Basellaceae Vegetable
Benicasa hispida Ash gourd Cucurbitaceae Vegetable
Beta vulgaris Beet root Chenopodiaceae Vegetable
Brassica juncea Mustard Brassicaceae Oil seed
Brassica oleracea, var. Cauliflower Brassicaceae Vegetable
botrytis

3.48
Brassica oleracea, var- Cabbage Brassicaceae Vegetable

capitata.
Cajanus cajan Arhar / Red gram Fabaceae Pulses
Canna indica Canna Cannaceae Ornamental
Capsicum annum Chilli Solanaceae Vegetable
Carica papaya Papaya Caricaceae Fruit tree
Catharanthus roseus. Periwinkle Apocynaceae Ornamental
Cicer arietinum Chick pea Fabaceae Pulses
Citrus aurantifolia Ornage Rutaceae Fruit tree
Citrus limonum Lime Rutaceae Fruit tree
Colocasia esculenta Colocasia / Arbi Araceae Vegetable
Coriandrum sativum Coriander / Dhaniya Apiaceae Vegetable
Crotolaria juncea Sunhemp Fabaceae Fiber crop
Cucumis sativus Cucumber / Khira Cucurbitaceae Vegetable
Cyamopsis tetragonoloba Cluster bean Fabaceae Vegetable
Dolichos biflorus Horse gram Fabaceae Cattle feed
Dolichos lablab Country bean Fabaceae Vegetable
Helianthus annuus Sunflower Asteraceae Oil seed
Hibiscus rosa-sinensis China rose Malvaceae Ornamental
Jasminum sambac Jasmine Oleaceae Ornamental
Limonia acidissima Wood apple / Bel Rutaceae Fruit tree
Luffa acutangula Ridge gourd Cucurbitaceae Vegetable
Lycopersicum esculantum Tomato Solanaceae Vegetable
Madhuca latifolia Mahuva Sapotaceae Multipurpose
Mangifera indica Mango Anacardiaceae Fruit tree
Momordica charantia Bottle gourd Cucurbitaceae Vegetable
Murraya koenigii Curry leaf Rutaceae Curry leaf
Musa paradisiaca Banana Musaceae Fruit tree
Oryza sativa Paddy Poaceae Food
Phaseolus mungo Black gram Fabaceae Pulses
Phaseolus radiata Green gram Fabaceae Pulses
Pisum sativum Peas Fabaceae Vegetable
Psidium guajava Guava Myrtaceae Fruit tree
Raphanus sativas Radish Brassicaceae Vegetable
Ricinus communis Castor Euphorbiaceae Oil seed
Rosa sinensis Rose Rosaceae Ornamental
Shorea robusta Sal Dipterocarpaceae Timber tree
Solanum melongena Brinjal Solanaceae Vegetable
Solanum tuberosum Potato Solanaceae Vegetable crop
Spinacea oleracea Palak bhaji Chenopodiaceae Vegetable
Tabernaemontana coronaria Chandni Apocynaceae Ornamental
Trichosanthes anguina Snake gourd Cucurbitaceae Vegetable
Triticum aestivum Wheat Poaceae Food
Zea mays Maize Poaceae Food
Ziziphus mauritiana Ber Rhamanceae Fruit tree

3.49
3.6.5 DETAILS OF FAUNA IN THE STUDY AREA

The Fauna species listed below are found in a radius of about 10 Km from the site of the
project site.
Table No. 3.6.3: List of vertebrate species other than birds either recorded or reported
in the study area. Secondary data is based on the information from the locals and
published literature relevant to the area.
MAMMALS
Latin name Common name WPA Schedule
Bandicota indica Large bandicoot Rat V
Cynopterus sphinx Short-nosed fruit bat IV
Funambulus palmarum Three striped squirrel IV
Golunda ellioti myothrix Indian bush rat IV
Herpestes edwardsi Indian grey mongoose IV
Lepus nigricollis Indian hare IV
Mus booduga Common Indian field mouse V
Mus musculus Home Mouse V
Oryctologus cuniculus Rabbit IV
Rattus rattus Common Indian rat V
Suncus murinus House shrew V
AMPHIBIANS
Duttaphrynus melonosticatus Common Indian Toad IV
Lissemys punctata Turtle IV
Polypedates maculatus Tree Frog IV
Rana breviceps Indian burrowing frog IV
Rana tigrina Indian Bull frog IV
REPTILES
Calotes versicolor Garden lizard IV
Chameleo zeylanicus Chameleon IV
Dryphis nasutus Whip Snake II
Echis carinatus Saw scaled viper II
Eutropis carinata Common skink IV
Hemidactylus flaviviridis Indian wall lizard IV
Naja naja Nag / Cobra II
Ptyas mucosa Dhaman / Indian Rat snake II
Varanus bengalensis Common Indian Monitor II
Varanus exanthematicus Savanna monitor IV
Table No. 3.6.4: List of birds either spotted or reported from the study area
Acridotheres tristis Common myna IV
Aegithinia tiphia Common Iora IV
Alcedo atthis Small blue kingfisher IV

3.50

Andeolv grayii Pond heron IV
Bubulcus ibis Cattle Egret IV
Columba livia Blue rock pigeon IV
Coracias benghalensis Indian roller IV
Corvus splendens House crow V
Dendrocitta vagabunda Indian tree pie IV
Dendrocopus marhatensis Maratha Woodpecker IV
Dicrurus macrocercus Black drongo IV
Egretta garzetta Little egret IV
Grawpila contra Asian pied starling IV
Halcyon smyrnensis White-Breasted King fisher IV
Lonchura punctualata Red avadavat IV
Merops orientalis Little Green Bee Eater IV
Milvus migrans Black kite (Common) IV
Motacilla alba White wagtail IV
Oriolus oriolus Golden Oriole IV
Passer domesticus House sparrow IV
Perdix pondiceriamus Titar IV
Phalacrocorax carbo Large Cormorant IV
Ploceus philippinus Baya Weaver IV
Psittacula cyanocephala Blossom headed Parakeet IV
Psittacula krameri Rose-Ringed Parakeet IV
Pycnonotus cafer Red-vented bulbul IV
Saxicolodies fulicata Indian robin IV
Streptopelia decaocto Eurasian Collared Dove IV
Streptopelia chinensis Spotted dove IV
Sturnus contra Pied myna IV
Sturnus pagodrum Brahminy myna IV
Temenuchus pogodarum Brahminy starling IV
Turdoides caudatus Common babbler IV
Tyto alba Barn owl IV
Table No. 3.6.5: List of butterflies and insects spotted in the study area by survey team
Butterflies
Araca violae Tawny costar IV
Catopsilia crocale Common emigrant IV
Dananus aglea Glassy Blue Tiger IV
Euploea corecor Common Crow IV
Hypolimnas misippus Danaid egg fly IV
Neptis hylas Common sailor IV
Papilio demoleus Lime butterfly IV
Precis orithya Blue pansy IV
Precis lemonias lemonias Lemon pansy IV
Precis hierta hierta Yellow Pansy IV

3.51
Pseudocoladenia dan dan Fulvous pied flat IV

Tros aristolochiae Common rose IV
Other insects
Anax imperator Emperor Dragonfly Not listed
Brachytron pratense Hairy Dragonfly Not listed
Hieroglyphus banian Rice grasshopper Not listed
Hepalia mauritia Defoliators Not listed
Nephotettix apicalis Paddy Jassids Not listed
Pecilocerus pictus. Common painted Not listed
Rhopalosiphum maidis Aphids Not listed
Spodoptera mauritia Swarming caterpillar Not listed
Tettigonia viridissima Common Green Grasshopper Not listed
List of fishes caught by fisherman from the water bodies of the buffer area. As per fish
database, they do not fall under the RET category and none of them is included in
Schedule-1 of the WPA 1972.
Table No. 3.6.6: List of Fishses caught by Fishermen
Scientific name Common name / Local name
Catla catla Katla
Channa punctatus Daulla / Murrel
Cirrhinus mrigala Mirgal
Clupisoma garua River Catfish
Labeo calbasu Kari
Labeo rohita Rohu
Macroganthus aculeatum Bam
Mystus cavasius Tengna
Oreochromis niloticus Tilapia
Oxygaster bacaila Sarangi
Puntius sophore Kotri
3.6.6 INTERPRETATION OF BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT STUDY

 As per the study carried out and Botanical Survey of India, it is found that No Endemic,
Rare, Endangered and Threatened (RET) species of flora were found in the study area.
 As per the study carried out and Wildlife Protection Act, no Schedule – I fauna was
observed in the study area.
Prediction of impacts is based both on the direct & indirect; short-term as well as long-
term; irreversible & irreversible impacts that are most likely to occur owing to the
proposed industrial activity during establishment and operation. Following are ecological
factors that are considered most significant as far as the impact on flora and fauna are
concerned:

3.52
(a) Whether there shall be any reduction in species diversity

(b) Whether there shall be any habitat loss or fragmentation
(c) Whether there shall be any additional risk or threat to the rare or endangered or
endemic or threatened (REET)species
(d) Whether there shall be any impairment of ecological functions such as (i) disruption of
food chains, (ii) decline in species population and or (iii) alterations in predator-prey
relationships.
S.No. Factor/Objective Remark
(a) Whether there shall be any No
reduction in species diversity Land use of the proposed project site is Land with scrub only
and it is also observed that no Endemic, Rare, Endangered
and Threatened (RET) species of flora were found in the
entire study area listed by Botanical Survey of India and also
no Schedule – I fauna was observed in the entire study area
as recognised in Wildlife Protection Act & IUCN.
(b) Whether there shall be any habitat No
loss or fragmentation  Proposed project site and study area does not come under
the any specific habitat for specific species.
 Study area is not the part of any Elephant corridors /
Migratory routes for birds etc.
(c) Whether there shall be any No
additional risk or threat to the rare  As per the study carried out and Botanical Survey of India,
or endangered or endemic or it is found that No Endemic, Rare, Endangered and
threatened (REET) species Threatened (RET) species of flora were found in the study
area.
 As per the study carried out and Wildlife Protection Act,
no Schedule – I fauna was observed in the study area.
(d) Whether there shall be any No
impairment of ecological functions In the proposed project following environment protection
such as (i) disruption of food chains, measures will be provided for duly complying with norms
(ii) decline in species population stipulated by MOEF&CC / CECB:
and or (iii) alterations in predator-  ESP will be provided to Pellet Plant, DRI Kilns to bring
prey relationships. 3
down the particulate emission to less than 30 mg/Nm .
 ESP will be provided to Power plant to bring down the
3
particulate emission to less than 30 mg/Nm .
 Fume Extraction & Cleaning system with bagfilters will
be provided to SMS and Reheating Furnace to bring
down the particulate matter emission to less than 30
3
mg/Nm .
 4th Fume Extraction & Cleaning system with bagfilters
will be provided to SEAF to bring down the particulate
3
matter emission to less than 30 mg/Nm .

3.53
 All conveyor will be covered with GI sheets to control

the dust emission. Interlocking system will be provided
to ESP. This will ensure that whenever ESP fails, the raw
material feed to the unit will be stopped and will
commence production after ESP is rectified to comply
with the norms.
 Net resultant Ground level concentrations during
operation of the plant after superimposing the
incremental concentrations over the maximum
baseline concentrations are well within the National
Ambient Air Quality Standards.
 Zero liquid effluent discharge will be implemented in
 Greenbelt will be developed in 21.1 Ha. (52 Acres) of
land which will further mitigate the emissions.
 All these environmental protection systems will be
installed and operated to comply with the norms.
3.7 SOCIO ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT [Gen. TOR # 6 (xi)]

The study area covers within a radius of 10 km from the Plant site. The socio-economic
profile of the study area of 51 Villages is presented based on site visits; discussions with
the villagers and the secondary data available from various agencies such as Hand Books
for Census 2011.
Social Impact Assessment study of the 10 km. Radius is furnished in Pg. No. 7.29 to 7.41 of
Chapter # 7 of EIA report.
Demographic details based on Hand Books for Census 2011 of the study area is shown
below:

3.54
TABLE NO.3.7.1: POPULATION BREAK UP AS PER CENSUS 2011

S.No. Village Name No_HH TOT_P TOT_M TOT_F P_SC M_SC F_SC P_ST M_ST F_ST
1 Datrenga 183 1037 536 501 94 54 40 54 22 32
2 Datrengi 575 2877 1483 1394 553 285 268 23 13 10
3 Dhaurabhata 185 870 439 431 42 20 22 142 66 76
4 Dhurrabandha 381 1908 965 943 230 109 121 409 193 216
5 Dhaneli 417 1953 942 1011 54 24 30 514 235 279
6 Akoli 188 993 511 482 0 0 0 229 118 111
7 Akaltara 391 1951 975 976 709 358 351 659 339 320
8 Achanakpur 67 337 178 159 1 1 0 246 131 115
9 Amlidih 214 1037 507 530 191 85 106 363 176 187
10 Borsi 148 897 451 446 522 262 260 87 41 46
11 Bharatpur 274 1299 647 652 831 420 411 276 138 138
12 Bakulahi 83 443 219 224 0 0 0 443 219 224
13 Bagbudwa 80 460 246 214 100 57 43 222 113 109
14 Bhothidih 239 1214 596 618 8 3 5 445 227 218
15 Bitkuli 425 2036 1031 1005 361 183 178 928 472 456
16 Bendri 154 764 368 396 0 0 0 455 213 242
17 Borsi 340 1691 835 856 40 21 19 271 130 141
18 Chandli 81 439 210 229 5 4 1 286 128 158
19 Chamarguda 137 867 423 444 362 170 192 218 118 100
20 Chichpol 273 1530 755 775 31 20 11 684 335 349
21 Godhi 307 1685 854 831 301 152 149 173 79 94
22 Gudeliya 249 1232 603 629 2 1 1 740 342 398
23 Kotmi 170 914 457 457 45 24 21 293 143 150
24 Kumharkhan 132 642 330 312 135 68 67 115 62 53
25 Kadar 539 2656 1323 1333 368 186 182 408 204 204
26 Kalmidih 112 484 240 244 433 216 217 0 0 0
27 Kosmanda 432 1782 899 883 112 52 60 192 96 96

3.55
S.No. Village Name No_HH TOT_P TOT_M TOT_F P_SC M_SC F_SC P_ST M_ST F_ST
28 Koni 279 1607 794 813 257 129 128 14 11 3
29 Kodwa 499 2915 1453 1462 195 98 97 47 29 18
30 Khapri 298 1374 657 717 9 5 4 461 226 235
31 Khaira 427 2158 1054 1104 0 0 0 594 286 308
32 Kukda 215 1188 606 582 447 242 205 260 126 134
33 Khairi 148 744 366 378 0 0 0 423 214 209
34 Kanjee 387 1974 998 976 423 220 203 0 0 0
35 Lewai 356 1725 861 864 279 145 134 493 231 262
36 Lamti 142 805 405 400 12 7 5 211 106 105
37 Madhuban 156 761 380 381 11 5 6 546 271 275
38 Mopka 693 3510 1731 1779 611 309 302 392 179 213
39 Mendra (Medra) 92 458 225 233 0 0 0 101 42 59
40 Mopki 270 1399 690 709 307 156 151 697 346 351
41 Nipaniya 431 2166 1104 1062 232 121 111 553 270 283
42 Paraswani 351 1501 760 741 1262 650 612 0 0 0
43 Pathariya 143 739 361 378 0 0 0 537 263 274
44 Patan 321 1453 710 743 327 158 169 267 120 147
45 Tehka 321 1636 807 829 99 45 54 673 334 339
46 Rajpur 11 53 25 28 0 0 0 0 0 0
47 Singarpur 806 3722 1892 1830 666 344 322 187 93 94
48 Semhradih 287 1366 675 691 60 28 32 551 271 280
49 Silwa 189 972 474 498 0 0 0 542 257 285
50 Rajpur 193 981 484 497 630 312 318 19 8 11
51 Surajpura 346 1752 861 891 21 9 12 153 72 81

3.56
TABLE NO.3.7.2: LITERACY LEVELS OF THE POPULATION UP AS PER CENSUS 2011

S.No. Village Name P_LIT M_LIT F_LIT P_ILL M_ILL F_ILL
1 Datrenga 611 371 240 426 165 261
2 Datrengi 1619 974 645 1258 509 749
3 Dhaurabhata 573 314 259 297 125 172
4 Dhurrabandha 947 594 353 961 371 590
5 Dhaneli 1122 664 458 831 278 553
6 Akoli 549 323 226 444 188 256
7 Akaltara 1145 659 486 806 316 490
8 Achanakpur 197 116 81 140 62 78
9 Amlidih 570 337 233 467 170 297
10 Borsi 477 269 208 420 182 238
11 Bharatpur 787 451 336 512 196 316

3.57

12 Bakulahi 254 152 102 189 67 122
13 Bagbudwa 286 188 98 174 58 116
14 Bhothidih 777 445 332 437 151 286
15 Bitkuli 1086 680 406 950 351 599
16 Bendri 446 256 190 318 112 206
17 Borsi 891 526 365 800 309 491
18 Chandli 244 144 100 195 66 129
19 Chamarguda 453 256 197 414 167 247
20 Chichpol 771 461 310 759 294 465
21 Godhi 978 565 413 707 289 418
22 Gudeliya 704 409 295 528 194 334
23 Kotmi 525 310 215 389 147 242
24 Kumharkhan 278 186 92 364 144 220
25 Kadar 1465 838 627 1191 485 706
26 Kalmidih 268 162 106 216 78 138
27 Kosmanda 1039 621 418 743 278 465
28 Koni 791 479 312 816 315 501
29 Kodwa 1337 790 547 1578 663 915
30 Khapri 845 483 362 529 174 355
31 Khaira 1109 675 434 1049 379 670
32 Kukda 594 359 235 594 247 347
33 Khairi 420 236 184 324 130 194
34 Kanjee 1165 715 450 809 283 526
35 Lewai 1056 619 437 669 242 427
36 Lamti 447 280 167 358 125 233
37 Madhuban 354 200 154 407 180 227
38 Mopka 1974 1161 813 1536 570 966
39 Mendra (Medra) 251 154 97 207 71 136
40 Mopki 828 482 346 571 208 363

3.58

41 Nipaniya 1408 825 583 758 279 479
42 Paraswani 913 530 383 588 230 358
43 Pathariya 411 248 163 328 113 215
44 Patan 791 453 338 662 257 405
45 Tehka 1057 614 443 579 193 386
46 Rajpur 25 18 7 28 7 21
47 Singarpur 2124 1268 856 1598 624 974
48 Semhradih 832 493 339 534 182 352
49 Silwa 515 310 205 457 164 293
50 Rajpur 520 307 213 461 177 284
51 Surajpura 986 549 437 766 312 454

3.59
TABLE NO.3.7.3: WORKERS CLASSIFICATION AS PER CENSUS 2011 (MAIN & MARGINAL)
S.No. Village Name TOT_WORK_P TOT_WORK_M TOT_WORK_F MAIN MAIN MAIN MARG MARG MARG
WORK_P WORK_M WORK_F WORK_P WORK_M WORK_F
1 Datrenga 560 283 277 466 257 209 94 26 68
2 Datrengi 1351 768 583 1013 657 356 338 111 227
3 Dhaurabhata 336 230 106 300 221 79 36 9 27
4 Dhurrabandha 975 517 458 487 367 120 488 150 338
5 Dhaneli 1002 513 489 503 294 209 499 219 280
6 Akoli 489 254 235 394 236 158 95 18 77
7 Akaltara 964 489 475 514 274 240 450 215 235
8 Achanakpur 170 99 71 125 93 32 45 6 39
9 Amlidih 472 264 208 430 243 187 42 21 21
10 Borsi 331 200 131 214 142 72 117 58 59
11 Bharatpur 644 322 322 18 17 1 626 305 321
12 Bakulahi 203 109 94 202 108 94 1 1 0
13 Bagbudwa 240 121 119 200 107 93 40 14 26
14 Bhothidih 616 316 300 133 94 39 483 222 261
15 Bitkuli 892 490 402 752 455 297 140 35 105
16 Bendri 450 222 228 248 191 57 202 31 171
17 Borsi 905 460 445 686 369 317 219 91 128
18 Chandli 211 101 110 155 99 56 56 2 54
19 Chamarguda 388 195 193 386 194 192 2 1 1
20 Chichpol 753 393 360 394 294 100 359 99 260
21 Godhi 849 429 420 480 314 166 369 115 254
22 Gudeliya 663 317 346 539 282 257 124 35 89
23 Kotmi 389 230 159 379 224 155 10 6 4
24 Kumharkhan 322 167 155 301 156 145 21 11 10
25 Kadar 1410 741 669 925 498 427 485 243 242
26 Kalmidih 214 123 91 194 120 74 20 3 17
27 Kosmanda 812 432 380 759 409 350 53 23 30
28 Koni 702 344 358 647 316 331 55 28 27
29 Kodwa 1039 660 379 920 621 299 119 39 80

3.60
30 Khapri 704 382 322 487 319 168 217 63 154

31 Khaira 1052 539 513 475 263 212 577 276 301
32 Kukda 587 301 286 380 281 99 207 20 187
33 Khairi 372 185 187 218 155 63 154 30 124
34 Kanjee 979 512 467 675 414 261 304 98 206
35 Lewai 886 456 430 830 433 397 56 23 33
36 Lamti 422 203 219 389 191 198 33 12 21
37 Madhuban 298 192 106 298 192 106 0 0 0
38 Mopka 1667 932 735 1272 803 469 395 129 266
39 Mendra (Medra) 241 117 124 223 111 112 18 6 12
40 Mopki 544 331 213 533 325 208 11 6 5
41 Nipaniya 910 537 373 483 346 137 427 191 236
42 Paraswani 584 350 234 554 336 218 30 14 16
43 Pathariya 383 175 208 286 139 147 97 36 61
44 Patan 656 352 304 385 242 143 271 110 161
45 Tehka 779 459 320 719 436 283 60 23 37
46 Rajpur 30 14 16 29 14 15 1 0 1
47 Singarpur 1855 969 886 670 408 262 1185 561 624
48 Semhradih 662 331 331 395 208 187 267 123 144
49 Silwa 495 252 243 474 250 224 21 2 19
50 Rajpur 509 265 244 422 219 203 87 46 41
51 Surajpura 755 462 293 503 386 117 252 76 176

3.61
TABLE NO.3.7.4: CULTIVATORS CLASSIFICATION AS PER CENSUS 2011 (MAIN & MARGINAL)
S.No. Village Name MAIN_CL_P MAIN_CL_M MAIN_CL_F MARG_CL_P MARG_CL_M MARG_CL_F
1 Datrenga 372 188 184 4 0 4
2 Datrengi 349 238 111 113 49 64
3 Dhaurabhata 11 10 1 0 0 0
4 Dhurrabandha 196 146 50 144 44 100
5 Dhaneli 398 216 182 158 76 82
6 Akoli 21 15 6 1 0 1
7 Akaltara 286 141 145 117 54 63
8 Achanakpur 59 56 3 0 0 0
9 Amlidih 132 87 45 0 0 0
10 Borsi 67 55 12 17 15 2

3.62

11 Bharatpur 1 1 0 3 1 2
12 Bakulahi 34 29 5 0 0 0
13 Bagbudwa 87 46 41 11 3 8
14 Bhothidih 47 30 17 282 121 161
15 Bitkuli 109 76 33 3 2 1
16 Bendri 76 63 13 4 3 1
17 Borsi 414 224 190 135 61 74
18 Chandli 124 80 44 43 2 41
19 Chamarguda 36 19 17 0 0 0
20 Chichpol 39 24 15 7 0 7
21 Godhi 171 146 25 10 5 5
22 Gudeliya 75 43 32 2 0 2
23 Kotmi 269 162 107 4 2 2
24 Kumharkhan 161 73 88 9 4 5
25 Kadar 400 210 190 73 40 33
26 Kalmidih 109 65 44 5 1 4
27 Kosmanda 239 126 113 7 4 3
28 Koni 82 40 42 0 0 0
29 Kodwa 503 350 153 17 3 14
30 Khapri 230 152 78 147 38 109
31 Khaira 261 144 117 60 29 31
32 Kukda 296 217 79 9 2 7
33 Khairi 156 121 35 105 13 92
34 Kanjee 424 274 150 35 4 31
35 Lewai 232 106 126 40 19 21
36 Lamti 338 165 173 21 8 13
37 Madhuban 28 27 1 0 0 0
38 Mopka 528 338 190 67 9 58
39 Mendra (Medra) 88 44 44 2 1 1
3.63

40 Mopki 58 54 4 1 1 0
41 Nipaniya 119 69 50 21 10 11
42 Paraswani 11 6 5 0 0 0
43 Pathariya 131 86 45 68 26 42
44 Patan 204 123 81 29 2 27
45 Tehka 347 210 137 1 0 1
46 Rajpur 7 4 3 0 0 0
47 Singarpur 238 149 89 81 34 47
48 Semhradih 132 68 64 7 2 5
49 Silwa 230 123 107 7 0 7
50 Rajpur 43 24 19 9 4 5
51 Surajpura 125 111 14 14 4 10
NOTE:
MAIN CL P MAIN CULTIVATORS POPULATION
MAIN CL M MAIN CULTIVATORS MALE
MAIN CL F MAIN CULTIVATORS FEMALE
MARG CL P MARGINAL CULTIVATORS POPULATION
MARG CL M MARGINAL CULTIVATORS MALE
MARG CL F MARGINAL CULTIVATORS FEMALE

3.64
TABLE NO.3.7.5: AGRICULTURAL LABOURS CLASSIFICATION AS PER CENSUS 2011 (MAIN & MARGINAL)
S.No. Village Name MAIN_AL_P MAIN_AL_M MAIN_AL_F MARG_AL_P MARG_AL_M MARG_AL_F
1 Datrenga 7 2 5 84 20 64
2 Datrengi 439 221 218 185 32 153
4 Dhurrabandha 136 87 49 336 104 232
5 Dhaneli 34 23 11 317 126 191
6 Akoli 359 212 147 93 18 75
7 Akaltara 167 89 78 331 160 171
8 Achanakpur 52 27 25 45 6 39
9 Amlidih 269 130 139 41 21 20
10 Borsi 97 48 49 96 40 56
11 Bharatpur 1 1 0 613 296 317
12 Bakulahi 158 69 89 1 1 0
13 Bagbudwa 112 60 52 26 8 18
14 Bhothidih 29 15 14 190 92 98
15 Bitkuli 528 291 237 135 32 103
16 Bendri 148 112 36 182 26 156
17 Borsi 217 99 118 76 26 50
18 Chandli 21 12 9 11 0 11
19 Chamarguda 343 170 173 2 1 1
20 Chichpol 331 249 82 352 99 253
21 Godhi 297 157 140 358 109 249
22 Gudeliya 389 179 210 121 34 87
23 Kotmi 70 32 38 4 3 1
24 Kumharkhan 56 17 39 4 1 3
25 Kadar 407 204 203 373 178 195
26 Kalmidih 44 24 20 15 2 13
27 Kosmanda 413 202 211 43 17 26

3.65
S.No. Village Name MAIN_AL_P MAIN_AL_M MAIN_AL_F MARG_AL_P MARG_AL_M MARG_AL_F

28 Koni 478 227 251 49 25 24
29 Kodwa 278 153 125 99 33 66
30 Khapri 196 115 81 67 22 45
31 Khaira 148 68 80 512 244 268
32 Kukda 57 47 10 198 18 180
33 Khairi 46 20 26 46 15 31
34 Kanjee 181 77 104 263 89 174
35 Lewai 520 262 258 15 4 11
36 Lamti 47 24 23 11 3 8
37 Madhuban 121 27 94 0 0 0
38 Mopka 567 323 244 313 107 206
39 Mendra (Medra) 120 54 66 16 5 11
40 Mopki 348 171 177 6 2 4
41 Nipaniya 102 53 49 368 161 207
42 Paraswani 524 314 210 28 14 14
43 Pathariya 138 39 99 22 6 16
44 Patan 147 89 58 236 104 132
45 Tehka 299 162 137 51 18 33
46 Rajpur 22 10 12 1 0 1
47 Singarpur 263 134 129 1074 511 563
48 Semhradih 228 111 117 255 119 136
49 Silwa 229 117 112 14 2 12
50 Rajpur 350 174 176 78 42 36
51 Surajpura 122 64 58 220 63 157

3.66
NOTE:
MAIN AL P MAIN AGRICULTURAL LABOR POPULATION

MAIN AL M MAIN AGRICULTURAL LABOR MALE
MAIN AL F MAIN AGRICULTURAL LABOR FEMALE
MARG AL P MARGINAL AGRICULTURAL LABOR POPULATION
MARG AL M MARGINAL AGRICULTURAL LABOR MALE
MARG AL F MARGINAL AGRICULTURAL LABOR FEMALE
TABLE NO.3.7.6: HOUSEHOLD INDUSTRY WORKERS CLASSIFICATION AS PER CENSUS 2011(MAIN & MARGINAL)
S.No. Village Name MAIN_HH_P MAIN_HH_M MAIN_HH_F MARG_HH_P MARG_HH_M MARG_HH_F
1 Datrenga 2 2 0 0 0 0
2 Datrengi 19 17 2 5 2 3
4 Dhurrabandha 4 4 0 2 0 2
5 Dhaneli 0 0 0 3 2 1
6 Akoli 1 1 0 0 0 0
7 Akaltara 7 4 3 0 0 0
8 Achanakpur 0 0 0 0 0 0
9 Amlidih 0 0 0 0 0 0

3.67

10 Borsi 2 1 1 0 0 0
11 Bharatpur 1 1 0 1 0 1
12 Bakulahi 1 1 0 0 0 0
13 Bagbudwa 0 0 0 1 1 0
14 Bhothidih 4 4 0 4 3 1
15 Bitkuli 6 3 3 0 0 0
16 Bendri 0 0 0 3 0 3
17 Borsi 0 0 0 0 0 0
18 Chandli 4 2 2 0 0 0
19 Chamarguda 0 0 0 0 0 0
20 Chichpol 0 0 0 0 0 0
21 Godhi 2 2 0 1 1 0
22 Gudeliya 2 0 2 0 0 0
23 Kotmi 0 0 0 0 0 0
24 Kumharkhan 5 1 4 1 1 0
25 Kadar 0 0 0 25 15 10
26 Kalmidih 0 0 0 0 0 0
27 Kosmanda 0 0 0 0 0 0
28 Koni 0 0 0 0 0 0
29 Kodwa 7 4 3 0 0 0
30 Khapri 0 0 0 1 1 0
31 Khaira 3 2 1 2 2 0
32 Kukda 0 0 0 0 0 0
33 Khairi 5 4 1 2 1 1
34 Kanjee 4 4 0 2 1 1
35 Lewai 5 4 1 0 0 0
36 Lamti 1 0 1 0 0 0
37 Madhuban 0 0 0 0 0 0
38 Mopka 11 8 3 2 1 1
3.68

39 Mendra (Medra) 2 2 0 0 0 0
40 Mopki 0 0 0 0 0 0
41 Nipaniya 0 0 0 0 0 0
42 Paraswani 0 0 0 0 0 0
43 Pathariya 0 0 0 0 0 0
44 Patan 0 0 0 1 0 1
45 Tehka 3 3 0 0 0 0
46 Rajpur 0 0 0 0 0 0
47 Singarpur 23 12 11 4 1 3
48 Semhradih 2 1 1 2 0 2
49 Silwa 0 0 0 0 0 0
50 Rajpur 2 1 1 0 0 0
51 Surajpura 1 1 0 0 0 0
NOTE:
MAIN HH P MAIN HOUSE HOLDERS POPULATION

MAIN HH M MAIN HOUSE HOLDERS MALE
MAIN HH F MAIN HOUSE HOLDERS FEMALE
MARG HH P MARGINAL HOUSE HOLDERS POPULATION
MARG HH M MARGINAL HOUSE HOLDERS MALE
MARG HH F MARGINAL HOUSE HOLDERS FEMALE

3.69
TABLE NO.3.7.7: OTHER WORKERS CLASSIFICATION AS PER CENSUS 2011 (MAIN & MARGINAL)
S.NO. Village Name MAIN_OT_P MAIN_OT_M MAIN_OT_F MARG_OT_P MARG_OT_M MARG_OT_F
1 Datrenga 85 65 20 6 6 0
2 Datrengi 206 181 25 35 28 7
3 Dhaurabhata 270 195 75 30 8 22
4 Dhurrabandha 151 130 21 6 2 4
5 Dhaneli 71 55 16 21 15 6
6 Akoli 13 8 5 1 0 1
7 Akaltara 54 40 14 2 1 1
8 Achanakpur 14 10 4 0 0 0
9 Amlidih 29 26 3 1 0 1
10 Borsi 48 38 10 4 3 1
11 Bharatpur 15 14 1 9 8 1
12 Bakulahi 9 9 0 0 0 0
13 Bagbudwa 1 1 0 2 2 0
14 Bhothidih 53 45 8 7 6 1
15 Bitkuli 109 85 24 2 1 1
16 Bendri 24 16 8 13 2 11
17 Borsi 55 46 9 8 4 4
18 Chandli 6 5 1 2 0 2
19 Chamarguda 7 5 2 0 0 0
20 Chichpol 24 21 3 0 0 0
21 Godhi 10 9 1 0 0 0
22 Gudeliya 73 60 13 1 1 0
23 Kotmi 40 30 10 2 1 1
24 Kumharkhan 79 65 14 7 5 2
25 Kadar 118 84 34 14 10 4
26 Kalmidih 41 31 10 0 0 0

3.70
S.NO. Village Name MAIN_OT_P MAIN_OT_M MAIN_OT_F MARG_OT_P MARG_OT_M MARG_OT_F

27 Kosmanda 107 81 26 3 2 1
28 Koni 87 49 38 6 3 3
29 Kodwa 132 114 18 3 3 0
30 Khapri 61 52 9 2 2 0
31 Khaira 63 49 14 3 1 2
32 Kukda 27 17 10 0 0 0
33 Khairi 11 10 1 1 1 0
34 Kanjee 66 59 7 4 4 0
35 Lewai 73 61 12 1 0 1
36 Lamti 3 2 1 1 1 0
37 Madhuban 149 138 11 0 0 0
38 Mopka 166 134 32 13 12 1
39 Mendra (Medra) 13 11 2 0 0 0
40 Mopki 127 100 27 4 3 1
41 Nipaniya 262 224 38 38 20 18
42 Paraswani 19 16 3 2 0 2
43 Pathariya 17 14 3 7 4 3
44 Patan 34 30 4 5 4 1
45 Tehka 70 61 9 8 5 3
46 Rajpur 0 0 0 0 0 0
47 Singarpur 146 113 33 26 15 11
48 Semhradih 33 28 5 3 2 1
49 Silwa 15 10 5 0 0 0
50 Rajpur 27 20 7 0 0 0
51 Surajpura 255 210 45 18 9 9

3.71
NOTE:
MAIN OT P MAIN OTHER WORKERS POPULATION
MAIN OT M MAIN OTHER WORKERS MALE
MAIN OT F MAIN OTHER WORKERS FEMALE
ARG OT P MARGINAL OTHER WORKERS POPULATION
MARG OT M MARGINAL OTHER WORKERS MALE
MARG OT F MARGINAL OTHER WORKERS FEMALE
TABLE NO.3.7.8: NON WORKERS CLASSIFICATION AS PER CENSUS 2011

S.NO. Village Name NON_WORK_P NON_WORK_M NON_WORK_F
1 Datrenga 477 253 224
2 Datrengi 1526 715 811
3 Dhaurabhata 534 209 325
4 Dhurrabandha 933 448 485
5 Dhaneli 951 429 522
6 Akoli 504 257 247
7 Akaltara 987 486 501
8 Achanakpur 167 79 88
9 Amlidih 565 243 322
10 Borsi 566 251 315
11 Bharatpur 655 325 330
3.72

12 Bakulahi 240 110 130
13 Bagbudwa 220 125 95
14 Bhothidih 598 280 318
15 Bitkuli 1144 541 603
16 Bendri 314 146 168
17 Borsi 786 375 411
18 Chandli 228 109 119
19 Chamarguda 479 228 251
20 Chichpol 777 362 415
21 Godhi 836 425 411
22 Gudeliya 569 286 283
23 Kotmi 525 227 298
24 Kumharkhan 320 163 157
25 Kadar 1246 582 664
26 Kalmidih 270 117 153
27 Kosmanda 970 467 503
28 Koni 905 450 455
29 Kodwa 1876 793 1083
30 Khapri 670 275 395
31 Khaira 1106 515 591
32 Kukda 601 305 296
33 Khairi 372 181 191
34 Kanjee 995 486 509
35 Lewai 839 405 434
36 Lamti 383 202 181
37 Madhuban 463 188 275
38 Mopka 1843 799 1044
39 Mendra (Medra) 217 108 109
40 Mopki 855 359 496
3.73

41 Nipaniya 1256 567 689
42 Paraswani 917 410 507
43 Pathariya 356 186 170
44 Patan 797 358 439
45 Tehka 857 348 509
46 Rajpur 23 11 12
47 Singarpur 1867 923 944
48 Semhradih 704 344 360
49 Silwa 477 222 255
50 Rajpur 472 219 253
51 Surajpura 997 399 598

3.74
CHAPTER – 4
ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS 4
&
MITIGATION MEASURES
4.1 INTRODUCTION
Impact prediction is a very important phenomenon in evaluating the environmentally
potential adverse impacts for any proposed industrial project. The impact prediction is always
carried out under worst possible conditions so as to mitigate or to eliminate the environmental
hazards. These predictions are superimposed over the baseline data to calculate the net
impact on the environment after the proposed plant comes into production.
4.2 AIR ENVIRONMENT

It is possible that increase in the background concentration of even a minor constituent of the
atmosphere may lead to significant changes in the atmospheric properties. So these changes
are essential in understanding potential climatic changes due to air pollutants. For example
under strongly stable conditions, disturbances are highly damped and mixing of pollutants is
strongly suppressed. It is under such conditions that the worst air pollution episodes have
occurred. Several scientific techniques and methodologies are available to predict impacts of
developmental activities on physico, ecological and socioeconomic environments. Such
predictions are superimposed over the baseline (pre project) status of environmental quality
to derive the ultimate (post project) scenario of environmental conditions. The prediction of
impacts helps to identify the environmental management plan required to be executed during
and after commissioning of the proposed plant to minimize the adverse impacts on
environmental quality.
The mathematical models are the best tools to quantitatively describe cause-effect
relationships between sources of pollution and different components of environment. In case,
mathematical models are not available or it is not possible to identify / validate through
models for particular situation, prediction could be arrived at through available scientific
knowledge and judgments.

4.1
The mathematical model used for predictions in the present study include, steady state
Gaussian Plume dispersion model designed for multiple point sources for air quality, Wave
divergence and Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) models for noise levels. In case of
water, land, biological and socio-economic environments the prediction have been made
based on available scientific knowledge and judgments.
4.2.1 IMPACT ON TOPOGRAPHY AND CLIMATE

4.2.1.1 IMPACT ON TOPOGRAPHY
The major envisaged topographical changes would be limited to the immediate vicinity of the
plant. The change in topography will be only due to man made structures like Industrial
complex and Administrative building. Similarly, it will invite positive benefits in the form of
land leveling and green belt development in the plant vicinity.
4.2.1.2 IMPACTS ON CLIMATE

As the temperature of the effluent gases will not be high, generally this will not cause any
thermal imbalance as extensive greenbelt will be developed within the plant premises.
However, there will be natural dispersion of heat due to unstable conditions during day and
as such there would be no significant micro / macro climatologically changes of any
consequence.
4.2.2 PREDICTION OF IMPACTS ON AIR ENVIRONMENT [Gen.TOR # 6 (i) & 7(i)]

It is absolutely essential to study the impacts of air pollution on its environs due to the
proposed project. These impacts are assessed with the help of Mathematical model based on
steady state Gaussian Plume Dispersion Model designed for multiple point sources for short
term. In the present case, Industrial Source Complex Short Term (ISCST-3), 1993 dispersion
model based on steady state Gaussian plume dispersion, designed for multiple point sources
for short term developed by United States Environment Protection Agency (USEPA) has been
used for simulations from point sources.
Model Input
Emissions : The stack emissions from the of proposed unit, Fugitive emissions, Vehicular
emissions & Other Industries in the study area are considered for modelling. The emission data
from the stack of proposed unit is shown in Table No. 4.2.3.
4.2
Receptor Locations
The software is capable of generating a polar receptor grid at every 10 radial angles at
specified distances (in Kms).
Meteorological data
For the prediction of rise in Ground Level concentrations of pollutants, the actual hourly
meteorological data recorded at the site during the study period (1st October, 2019 to 31st
December, 2019) is converted to mean meteorological hourly data as specified by CPCB and
the same is used in the model. In the absence of site specific mixing heights, mixing heights
published in ‘Spatial distribution of hourly mixing depths over Indian region’ by Dr. R.N.Gupta
have been used.
Presentation of results
In the present case model simulations have been carried out for the Post-Monsoon season.
For the short term simulations, the concentrations have been estimated around 1600
receptors to obtain optimum description of variations in concentrations over the site in 10 Km.
radius covering 16 directions.
Model Output
The output contains the first through sixth highest concentration values at each receptor,
Maximum concentration tables and daily concentration tables for each averaging period.
Table No. 4.2.1: Prediction of Impacts & Mitigation Measures

IMPACT IDENTIFIED IMPACTS MITIGATION MEASURES
ENVIRONMENT
Air Environment Particulate emissions
 Coal transportation  Covered trucks
 Unloading of coal  Dust suppression system (fog type and
water spray system)
 Coal Handling Plant  Dust extraction system with bagfilters
 Coal transfer points  Dust extraction system with bagfilters
 Coal conveying  Covered conveyers to prevent flying of
dust during conveying
 Stacks attached to the  Electro Static Precipitator (ESP) will be
Pellet plant, DRI Kiln, FBC provided to bring down the PM to 30
Boiler mg/Nm3 for Pellet Plant, DRI plant and
30 mg/Nm3 for Power plant.

4.3
IMPACT IDENTIFIED IMPACTS MITIGATION MEASURES

ENVIRONMENT
 Ash handling & storage  Fly ash will be stored in silos only.
 Vehicular movement  All internal roads will be made pucca.
 Avenue plantation will be developed on
both sides of village roads and internal
roads.
 Sulphur dioxide emissions  Limestone to be used as Raw material in
DRI kiln to act as sulphur absorbent.
 Lime dosing will be provided to treat the
flue gases from the Power Plant to bring
down the SO2 emissions to below 100
mg/Nm3 as per MoEF&CC emission
standards applicable from 1st January
2017.
 A flue gas velocity of 15 m/s will be
maintained for effective dispersion of
emissions.
 NOx emissions  NOx emissions from the Power Plant will
be brought down to below 100 mg/Nm3
as per MoEF&CC emission standards
applicable from 1st January 2017.
4.2.3 STACK HEIGHT CALCULATION

a) For Pellet Plant
With LDO
LDO consumption for 1 x 0.8 mtpa kiln : 90 TPD
Sulphur content LDO : 1.8 %
SO2 emission : 90 x 1000 x 1.8 x 2 / 2400
: 135 Kg/hr
Stack Height H, : 14 (Q)0.3
: 14 (135)0.3
: 60.9 m ~ 61 m
With Producer Gas

Coal consumption for Producer gas for 1x0.8 mtpa Kiln : 304 TPD
Sulphur content in Coal : 0.5 %
SO2 emission : 304 x 1000 x 0.5 x 2 / 2400
: 126.67 Kg/hr

4.4
: 14 (126.67)0.3
: 59.8 m
It is proposed to use Producer gas as fuel for Grate kiln. Only during breakdown of Producer
gas unit, LDO will be used as fuel.
However as a worst case scenario 2 nos. of Stacks each of 61 m height provided to each 0.8
MTPA Grate Kiln (Pellet Plant) will be adequate for effective dispersion of sulphur dioxide
emissions into the atmosphere.
b) For Sponge Iron (For 2 x 650 TPD DRI Kiln Attached To WHRB)
With Indian Coal
No. of Kilns : 2
Coal consumption for 650 TPD Kiln : 845 TPD
Coal consumption for 2 Kilns : 2 x 845 TPD =1690 TPD
Max. Sulphur content in coal : 0.5 % (by mass max.)
Total Sulphur dioxide Emission : 1690 x 1000 x 0.5 x 2 / 24 x 100
: 704.17 kg / hour
Considering 40 % Sulphur absorption of SO2 emission
: 422.5 Kg/hour
Stack height H : 14 (Q)0.3
: 14 (422.5)0.3
: 85.8 m ~ 86 m
With Imported Coal

Coal consumption for 2 Kilns : 2 x 540 = 1080 TPD
: 900 kg / hour
: 540 Kg/hour
: 14 (540)0.3
: 92.4 m ~ 93 m

4.5
Hence a Combined stack (with twin flues) 93 m height will be provided to 2 x 650 TPD DRI Kilns
for effective dispersion of emission into the atmosphere.
c) For Sponge Iron (For 2 x 350 TPD DRI Kilns Attached To WHRB)
With Indian Coal
No. of Kilns : 2
Coal consumption for 2 Kilns : 2 x 455 TPD = 910 TPD
: 379.16 kg / hour
: 227.4 Kg/hour
: 14 (227.4)0.3
: 71.3 m ~ 71 m
With Imported Coal
Coal consumption for 2 Kilns : 2 x 290 TPD= 580 TPD
: 483.3 kg / hour
: 289.98 Kg/hour
: 14 (289.98)0.3
: 76.7 m ~ 77 m
Hence a combined stack (with twin flues) of 77 m height will be provided to 2 x 350 TPD DRI
Kilns for effective dispersion of emission into the atmosphere.

4.6
d) For Sponge Iron (For 1 x 200 TPD DRI Kiln Attached To WHRB)
With Indian Coal
No. of Kilns : 1
: 108.33 kg / hour
: 64.9 Kg/hour
: 14 (64.9)0.3
: 48.9 m ~ 49 m
With Imported Coal
: 138.33 kg / hour
: 82.9 Kg/hour
: 14 (82.9)0.3
: 52.6 m ~ 53 m
However a stack of 60 m will be provided to the 1 x 200 TPD DRI Kilns as per MoEF&CC
notification vide GSR 414(E) dated 30th May 2008 for effective dispersion of pollutants into the
atmosphere.
e) For Induction Furnace

A Combined stack (tri flues) of 45 m height (minimum as per CPCB norms) to 3 x 30 T Induction
Furnaces, a Combined stack (twin flues) of 45 m height (minimum as per CPCB norms) to 2 x
30 T Induction Furnaces, a Combined stack (tri flues) of 45 m height (minimum as per CPCB
norms) to 3 x 20 T Induction Furnaces & a Combined stack (twin flues) of 45 m height
(minimum as per CPCB norms) to 2 x 20 T Induction Furnaces for effective disperssion.

4.7
f) For Submerged Electric Arc Furnaces

1 no. of combined stack (with twin flues) of 30 m height with Twin Flues (minimum as per CPCB
norms) will be provided to 2 x 9 MVA Submerged Electric Arc Furnaces for effective dispersion
of emissions.
g) For Re-Heating Furnaces 3 x 50 TPH For Rolling Mill For 3 x 700 TPD
With LDO as fuel
LDO consumption : 39 KL SAY 41 TPD
Sulphur content LDO : 1.8 %
SO2 emission : 32 x 1000 x 1.8 x 2 / 2400
: 48 Kg/hr
: 14 (48)0.3
: 44.7 ~ 45 m
With Producer gas as Fuel
Coal consumption : 144 TPD
SO2 emission : 144 x 1000 x 0.5 x 2 / 2400
: 60 Kg/hr
: 14 (60)0.3
: 47.8 m ~ 48 m
With Pulverized Coal as Fuel
Coal consumption : 79 TPD
SO2 emission : 79 x 1000 x 0.5 x 2 / 2400
: 32.9 Kg/hr
: 14 (32.9)0.3
: 39.9 m ~ 40
It is proposed to use Producer gas / Pulvervised Coal as fuel for Re-heating furnace. Only during
breakdown of Producer gas unit, LDO will be used as fuel.
Hence 3 nos. of stacks each of 48 m height will be provided to each 50 TPH Re-heating furnaces
considering worst scenario for effective dispersion of SO2 emission into the atmosphere.

4.8
h) For 40 MW Power Plant (Through CFBC Boiler – 160 TPH)

Entire dolochar generated from the plant i.e. 440 TPD will be used as fuel in CFBC boiler.
The following will be the fuel requirement which represents the worst environmental
scenario.
With 100 % Indian Coal
Consumption of coal : 720 TPD
Sulphur content in coal : 0.5 % (by mass, Max.)
SO2 emission : 720 x 1000 x 0.5 x 2 / 24 x 100
: 300 Kg/hr
Stack Height, H : 14(Q)0.3
: 14 (300)0.3
: 77.5 m ~ 78 m
With 100 % Imported Coal

Consumption of coal : 460 TPD
Sulphur content in coal : 1.0 % (by mass, Max.)
SO2 emission : 460x 1000 x 1.0 x 2 / 24 x 100
: 383.3 Kg/hr
Stack Height, H : 14(Q)0.3
: 14 (383.3)0.3
: 83.4 m ~ 83 m
Hence a stack of 83 m height will be provided to the CFBC boiler for effective dispersion of
emissions into the atmosphere.
4.2.4 INCREMENTAL GROUND LEVEL CONCENTRATIONS

The predicted max. Incremental PM10 concentrations (24 hourly) due to the emissions from
operation of proposed project will be 1.2 g/m3 at a distance of 1900 m from the stack in the
down wind direction over the baseline concentrations.
The predicted incremental rise in PM concentration due to the Vehicular emission will be 1.75
g/m3.

4.9
Hence the total predicted incremental rise in Particulate Matter concentration due to the
emission from proposed project and due the vehicular emissions will be 1.20 g/m3 + 1.75
g/m3 = 2.95g/m3.
The predicted max incremental SO2 concentrations (24 hourly) due to the emissions from
The predicted max incremental NOx concentrations (24 hourly) due to the emissions from
The predicted incremental rise in NOx concentration due to the Vehicular emission will be 5.16
g/m3.
Hence the total predicted incremental rise in NOx concentration due to the emission from
project and due the vehicular emission will be 2.67 g/m3 + 5.16 g/m3 = 7.83 g/m3
The predicted incremental rise in CO concentration due to the Vehicular emission will be 6.16
g/m3.
The net resultant concentrations (Maximum baseline conc. + predicted incremental rise in
conc.) of PM, SO2 and NOX shown in Table No. 4.2.4, by considering the emissions from other
industries in the area will be well within the National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS)
when the plant will commence the operation. Hence there will not be any adverse impact on
air environment due to the proposed activities.
Table No. 4.2.2: Stack Emissions

Temp. Velocity of
(m) (m) (m3/sec) (g/s) (g/s) (g/s)
gas (oC) (m/sec)
1. Pellet Plant 4.0 61 5.5 83.3 22.1
(per (2 140 12 150.8 (per (per (per
2. De-dusting System
attached to I/O 1.5 30 50 15 26.5 0.7 -- --
Beneficiation
93
(2 x 650 TPD) # (per 160 15 115.6 (per (per (per
Combined Stack flue) flue) flue) Flue)

4.10
Temp. Velocity of
(m) (m) (m3/sec) (g/s) (g/s) (g/s)
gas (oC) (m/sec)
(2 x 350 TPD) # (per 77 160 15 62.2 (per (per (per
Combined Stack flue) flue) flue) flue)
5. DRI kiln with WHRB
1.8 60 170 15 35.6 1.2 18.1 5.0
(1 x200 TPD) #
45
(3x 30 T) (per 100 15 38.0 (per --- (per
(2x 30 T) (per 45 100 15 38.0 (per --- (per
(3x 20 T) (per 35 100 15 25.4 (per --- (per
(2x 20 T) (per 35 100 15 25.4 (per --- (per
10. Re-heating
2.2 48 1.2 38 7.9
Furnaces attached
(per (3 180 15 59.1 (per (per (per
to Rolling Mill (3 x
50 TPH)
11. CFBC Power plant
3.2 83 170 15 120 2.5 8.2 8.2
(40 MW)
12. 0.4 4.1
SEAF’s (2x9 MVA)
1.2 30 150 15 16.7 (per ---
(per
Combined Stack
flue) flue)
* Emission calculation are based on emission standards notified by MoEF&CC vide S.O. no. 3305 (E) dated 7 th
December 2015.
# In DRI & CFBC boiler SO2 emission is considered after Lime Absorption.
Table No. 4.2.3: Net Resultant Maximum Concentrations Due To Proposed Project & Due To Other
Industries In The Area [Gen.TOR # 7 (i)]

Item PM10 SO2 NO2 CO
(g/m3) (g/m3) (g/m3) (g/m3)
Maximum baseline conc. in the study area 54.5 11.6 15.2 718
Maximum predicted incremental rise in 1.2 8.4 2.67 --
concentration due to proposed project (Point source)
Maximum predicted incremental rise in 1.75 -- 5.16 6.16
concentration due to proposed project (Vehicular
emissions)
Net resultant concentrations during operation of the 57.45 20.0 23.03 724.16
plant
National Ambient Air Quality Standards 100 80 80 2000

4.11
The net resultant Ground level concentrations during operation of the proposed project are
within the NAAQS. Hence, there will not be any adverse impact on air environment due to the
proposed project.
Air Quality contour maps showing net resultant maximum concentrations are shown below.
[Gen.TOR # 7 (i)]

4.12
Figure 4.1: Air Modelling Contour diagram due to Plant (PM)

4.13
Figure 4.2: Air Modelling Contour diagram due to Vehicles (PM)

4.14
Figure 4.3: Air Modelling Contour diagram due to Plant (SO 2)

4.15
Figure 4.4: Air Modelling Contour diagram due to Plant (NOx)

4.16
Figure 4.5: Air Modelling Contour diagram due to the Vehicles (NO x)

4.17
Figure 4.6: Air Modelling Contour diagram due to Vehicles (CO)

4.18
Table No.4.2.6: Net Resultant Maximum Concentrations During The Operation Of The Proposed
Project (APCS Not Working Scenario)
Item PM10 SO2 NOX CO
(g/m3) (g/m3) (g/m3) (g/m3)
concentration due to proposed project (Point
Sources)
emissions)
Net resultant concentrations during operation of 175.67 20.0 23.03 724.16
the proposed project
The net resultant Ground level concentrations during operation of the project when APCS is
not working is exceeding the NAAQS. If APCS is not working, then raw material feed will be
stopped. Consequently, there will be no production in the unit till APCS is rectified.
Air Quality contour map showing net resultant maximum concentration of PM during APCS
not working scenario are shown in Figure 4.7.
not working is exceeding the NAAQS.
• Whenever APCS is not working, then raw material feed will be stopped.
• Consequently, there will be no production in the unit till APCS is rectified.
• Emergency alert will be made to inform the nearest habitations.
• Water sprinklers will be utilised for dust suppression.

4.19
Figure 4.7: Air Modelling Contour diagram due to Plant (PM) without APCS working

4.20
4.3 PREDICATION OF IMPACTS ON WATER ENVIRONMENT
4.3.1 WATER REQUIREMENT [Gen.TOR # 3(vii) & Addl. ToR # 18]

The water requirement for the proposed project will be 5,640 KLD. This includes Make-up
water for I/O Beneficiation, Pellet Plant, DRI Kiln, Induction Furnace, Rolling Mill, Ferro Alloy
Plant, Power Plant & for Domestic purpose.
Water allocation has been recommended from Selva Anicut of Shivnath River from Water
Resource Department, Govt. of Chhattisgarh, vide 50th meeting of State Water Resource
Utilization Committee, Chhattisgarh dt. 13.07.2021 and same is enclosed as Annexure - 1
Water will be stored in Reservoir to be formed in the additional land proximate to the project
site for utilisation of water during lean season to the plant water requirement.
Air cooled condensers will be provided to FBC Power plant.Hence the net water requirement
will be substantially reduced.
The details of total water consumption & it's breakup are shown in Table No. 4.3.1. Rain water
harvesting pits have been proposed to recharge the precious ground water in consultation
with Ground Water Board. The depth of ground water table will certainly increase Rain water
harvesting measures.
Table No.4.3.1: Water Requirement Breakup
2. Pellet Plant 500
5. Rolling Mill 850
7. Ferro Alloys 250
8. Power Plant (WHRB & FBC) 800
Total 5640

4.21
Figure 4.8: Water Balance

4.22
4.3.2 WASTEWATER GENERATION

 The total net wastewater generation from the proposed project will be 255 KLD.
 There will be no effluent discharge from the I/O ore beneficiation, Pellet Plant, DRI plant,
 Thickener over flow from I/ O beneficiation process will be recycled along with makeup
water. Thickener under flow will be taken to slime pond & will be treated in settling tank
and reused in process.
 Effluent from Rolling Mill will be sent to settling tank & will be recycled through closed
circuit cooling system.
development. During monsoon period, when there is no requirement of water for
greenbelt development, the treated effluent will be used as make up water for Rolling Mill.
 Details of total wastewater generation &its break up is shown in Table No. 4.3.2 and
Characteristics of wastewater is shown in Table No. 4.3.3.
Table No. 4.3.2: Wastewater Breakup
S.No. Source Generation (KLD)
1. Power Plant 183
a) Cooling Tower blowdown 126
b) Boilers blowdown 27
c) D.M. plant regeneration water 30
2. Sanitary Wastewater 72
Total 255
Table No. 4.3.3: Characteristics of Wastewater generation

PARAMETER CONCENTRATION
Cooling Tower DM Plant Boiler Sanitary
blowdown Regeneration Blowdown waste water
pH 7.0 – 8.0 5.0 – 10.0 9.5 – 10.5 7.0 – 8.5
BOD (mg/l) -- -- -- 200 – 250

4.23
COD (mg/l) -- -- -- 300 – 400

TDS (mg/l) 1000 5000 – 6000 1000 mg/l 800 – 900
Oil & Grease (mg/l) -- 10 -- 5 - 10
TSS (mg/l) -- -- -- 150-200
4.3.3 IMPACT ON SURFACE WATER BODIES

 Shivnath River (5.9 Kms. - NW Direction), Jamuniya Nadi (5.8 Kms. - SSE Direction),
Bhatapara Branch of Mahanadi Canal (0.18 Kms. – SSE Direction) are present within 10
Kms. radius of te proposed project site.
 Water required for the proposed project will be sourced from Silva anicut of Shivnath
River.
 Water withdrawal permission issued earlier has been expired and applied for renewal of
the same. Water withdrawal permission has been granted only after considering all the
requirements such as Domestic, Industrial & Agricultural needs.
 Effluent from power plant will be treated and after ensuring compliance with SPCB norms,
it will be utilized for dust suppression, ash conditioning and for greenbelt development.
 Air cooled condensers will be provided in power plant to reduce the water consumption.
 Garland drains will be constructed around the storage yards to prevent any run off from
the storage yards entering into the water bodies.
 Rain water harvesting pits have been proposed to recharge the precious ground water in
consultation with SGWB. The depth of ground water table will certainly increase due to
Rain water harvesting measures.
Hence there will not be any impact on surrounding water bodies & downstream users of river
due to the proposed project.

4.24
4.4 PREDICTION OF IMPACTS DUE TO NOISE

4.4.1 PREDICTION OF IMPACT DUE TO THE PROPOSED ACTIVITY
The sound pressure level generated by noise source decreases with increasing distance from
the source due to wave divergence.
An additional decrease in sound pressure level with distance from the source is expected, due
to atmospheric effect or its interaction with objects in the path of transmission. For
hemispherical sound wave propagation through homogeneous loss free medium, one can
estimate noise levels at various locations, due to different sources using model based on first
principle, as per the following equation:
Lp2 = Lp1 – 20 Log (r2/r1) - Ae1.2
Where Lp1 and Lp2 are sound pressure levels at points located at distance r1 and r2 from the
source and Ae1.2 is the excess attenuation due to environmental conditions. Combined affect
of all the sources then can be determined at various locations by logarithmic addition. In first
approximation one can assume that for all general population in the villages, every noise
source in the plane is a point source. The average equivalent sound power level of such a point
source can be estimated for different distances and directions from hypothetical source by
applying following equation:
Lp = Lw - 20 Log r – Ae – 8
Where Lw is the sound power level of the source, Lp is sound pressure level at a distance r and
Ae is environmental attenuation factor. A combined noise level Lp (total) of all the sources at
a particular place is given by:
Lp (total) = 10 Log (10Lp1/10) + 10(Lp2/10) + ---------)
Major noise generating sources were identified from the proposed activity for prediction
purposes. The major noise generating sources are Turbine, Boiler, Compressors, DG set. The
predictions have been made to represent the worst case. The noise levels at various distances
were calculated using wave divergence model. The model was run for ascertaining the areas
where we could get the noise levels of 35, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65 and considering the other noise
generating sources from the plant.
Acoustic enclosures will be provided to turbines. Silencers will be provided to the DG Set. All
machinery will be manufactured keeping in view of the MOEF/OSHA standards on Noise levels.
The Ambient Noise levels will be within the standards prescribed by MOE&F, GOI vide

4.25
Notification dated 14-02-2000 under the Noise pollution (regulation & control) Rules, 2000 i.e.
ambient noise levels will be less than 75 dBA during day time & less than 70 dBA during night
time.
4.4.2 PREDICTION OF IMPACTS ON COMMUNITY

Day and Night sound pressure levels, Ldn are often used to describe the community noise
exposure which includes 10 dBA night time penalties. As the nearest human settlement is 0.15
Kms. from the site, the impact of noise on general population would be insignificant.
As per the WHO recommendation, there is no identified risk and damage of hearing due to
the noise levels (Leq = 8 hours) less than 75 dBA. Most of the international damage risk criteria
for hearing loss permit (Leq = 12 hours) upto 87 dBA. Further, WHO recommendation on
community noise annoyance, permits day time out door noise levels of 55 dBA.
4.4.3 PREDICTION OF IMPACT ON OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH

The damage risk criteria as enforced by OSHA (Occupation Safety and Health Administration)
to reduce hearing loss, stipulates that noise level upto 85 dBA are acceptable for 8 hour
working shift per day. Plant authorities will provide ear plugs to the employees and will be
enforced to be used by the employees.
4.5 PREDICTION OF IMPACTS ON LAND ENVIRONMENT

Total land envisaged for the entire project is 63.52 Ha. (156.909 Acres). As there are no
endangered species in the vicinity of the proposed activity, there will not be any concern for
the loss of important germoplasm that needs conservation.
To control the fugitive emissions dust extraction system and dust suppression system will be
installed at all the dust emanating areas. All required pollution control systems will be installed
and operated to comply with the norms. Hence there will not be any impact on nearby top
soil.
Proposed plant will maintain Zero effluent discharge and closed circuit cooling system will be
implemented. Hence there will not be any adverse impact on water environment.
Solid waste generated from the plant will be disposed /utilized as per the norms. Hence there
will not be any adverse impact on land environment due to the proposed plant. The land use
pattern of the study area will certainly be improved due to the proposed activity. Land price
in the nearby area will increase which will benefit the local people. This industry may attract
4.26
some ancillary works also which will also help in improving the land use pattern of the area.
Greenbelt is considered essential for maintaining the stability of the environment of the area.
21.1 Ha. (52 acres) of extensive greenbelt will be developed in the plant premises.
4.6 PREDICTION OF IMPACTS DUE TO VEHICULAR MOVEMENT
[Gen. TOR # 6 (ix), 7 (iii), Spec. ToR (ix) & (x) & Addl. ToR # 2]
 Major raw material will be brought to the plant site by Rail, through proposed Railway
Siding at 0.5 Kms. (at Nipania Railway Station) from the project site & from their by the
road through covered trucks and other raw material will be brought by covered trucks
upto the site.
 All the trucks used for the transport of raw materials, products and wastes will be
completely covered with tarpaulin and ensured no spillage during transportation.
 Internal roads will be made pucca.
 All the raw material required for the proposed steel plant will be stored on pucca platform
above ground level.
 All the raw material yards are equipped with water sprinkling system so as to avoid fugitive
emission during the material handling.
 Avenue plantation will be developed on both sides of village road leading to the project
site.
 The proposed site is well connected by Pucca road which is capable of absorbing additional
truck movement due to transportation.
 Based on the Traffic Assessment Study and considering the Passenger Car Unit (PCU) per
day of traffic, road (into & out of the plant) with 18 Million Standard Axle (MSA) load will
be laid down as per specifications of IRC : 37.
 Project site is well connected to SH # 10 (Bhatapara to Baloda Bazar) which is at a distance
of 9.0 Kms. (aerial).
during the operation of the proposed project are 832 trucks/day through Road only.
during the operation of the proposed project are 310 trucks/day through both Rail & Road.
Hence the fugitive dust generation during transportation of raw materials, products &
Solid wastes will be minimized due to Rail transportation.

4.27
Table No. 4.4.1: Traffic Study

Name of Project : REAL ISPAT AND POWER LIMITED
Location of the Project :Bakulahi & Dhourabhata Villages, Bhatapara (T), Baloda Bazar - Bhatapara (D), Chhattisgar
Existing Vehicular Traffic Additional Traffic due to the proposed project

Bhatapara to Bakulahi Road Bakulahi to Bhatapara Road Total Bhatapara to Bakulahi Road Bakulahi to Bhatapara Road Total Carrying Capacity
PCU
Type of Vehicle As % of As % of As % of (per day) as per
Actual As % of Total Actual Actual Actual
As PCU Total As PCU Total PCU Total As PCU Total As PCU Total PCU IRC : 73-1980
Count Vehicular Count Count Count
(per Day) Vehicular (per Day) (per Day) Vehicular (per Day) Vehicular (per Day) (per Day) (per Day)
(per Day) Count (per Day) (per Day) (per Day)
Count Count Count
Passenger car,
107 17.20 107 122 20.23 122 229 5 1.37 5.0 5 1.37 5 10.0
Tempo, Auto rickshaw
5000
Cycle, Motor Cycle or (for 2 lane
388 62.38 194 326 54.06 163 357 50 13.70 25.0 50 13.70 25 50.0 undivided Road )
Scooter
Truck, Bus, or
Agricultural Tractor 127 20.42 381 155 25.70 465 846 310 84.93 930.0 310 84.93 930 1860.0
Trailer unit
Total 622 100.0 682 603 100 750 1432 365 100 960.0 365 100 960 1920.0
Total load on the road from Bhatapara to Bakulahi during operation of the proposed project
Traffic load before operation of proposed project : 1432.0 PCU/day
Additional traffic load during operation of the proposed project : 1920.0 PCU/day
Total load : 3352.0 PCU/day
Traffic Capacity as per IRC 73: 1980 : 5000.0 PCU/day
Hence there will not be any impact due to the additional traffic load due to the project

4.28
Figure 4.9: Photographs showing village road connecting Plant and NH # 200
Photographs showing NH # 200
Photographs showing village road connecting Project Stie & NH # 200

4.29
4.7 PREDICTION OF IMPACTS ON FLORA & FAUNA

 There are no National Park/ Wildlife sanctuary / Biosphere reserve / Tiger Reserve /
Elephant Corridor / migratory routes for Birds within 10 Km. radius of the project site.
 No Rare and Endangered species are present within the study area.
 All the required Air emissions control systems will be installed and operated to comply
with MoEF&CC/CPCB/SPCB norms.
 Interlocking systems will be provided to ESPs in such a way that whenever ESP fails, the
raw material feed to the kiln/boiler will stop. Hence there will be no production till the
ESP is rectified.
 If any other Air emission Control system fails to comply with the norms, then immediately
stop the supply of raw materials to the Furnace to have least environmental impact.
Accordingly, applicable emergency procedures will be followed.
 Zero liquid effluent discharge will be maintained in the proposed project.
 All solid waste disposal will be in accordance with the norms.
 Greenbelt of 21.1 Ha. (52 acres) will be developed in the plant premises.
When all norms are compiled and with proper implementation of Environment Management
Plan, there will not be any adverse impact on Flora & Fauna due to the proposed project.
4.8 PREDICTION OF IMPACTS ON SOCIO ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT

The local areas will be benefited by way of generation of employment opportunities, increased
demand for local products and services. There will be an improvement in the income level of
the local people.
Employment generation potential due to the proposed project will be 1000 nos. which will
include directly employed officials, staff, skilled, semi -skilled labour and those indirectly
employed in contract works & transport. Due to this the economic conditions, the educational
and medical standards of the people living in the study area will certainly move upwards which
will result in overall economic development, improvement in general aesthetic environment
and increase in business opportunities.
Social & Infrasturcture developmental activities will be carried out as per the norms stipulated.
These activities will help in contributing to the development of villages in the nearby areas.

4.30
Socio-economic impacts of proposed project are predicted as follows:

Table No. 4.8.1: Predication of impacts on Socio Economic Environment
S.No. Impact Predicted Impacts Budget Allocation / Remark
Parameter Positive Negative
1. Human  No displacement of people or habitations Nil ----
Settlement would occur
2. Livelihoods  No loss of existing livelihoods. Direct or indirect A moderate influx of people in project Priority will be given local
is expected to occur. construction and operation phases. people in employment
 Additional non-agricultural livelihood
opportunities are expected both directly and as
spinoffs.
3. Employment  No loss of existing employment due to Nil ----
Generation the proposed project is expected.
 Creation of additional employment for about
1000 skilled, semi-skilled & unskilled workers
during project operation.
 Indirect employment to about 1000 persons as
a sequel to income multiplie effect and induced
growth during construction & operation
phases of the project.
 Majority of them will be local women and
youth.
4. Incomes  Improvement of money incomes of locals Nil ----
and engaged in tertiary businesses by an average
Revenues 12 % through induced spending.
 Improved tax revenues of Gram Panchayat.
 The successful commissioning and running of
the proposed project will attract more
industrial investments which in turn will
benefit the society and the nation.

4.31

5. Demographics  The population levels of the neighbouring Nil ---
villages are not likely to change in any
significant manner.
 The lifestyles of people are expected to
improve in tune with the rise in incomes and
improvement in infrastructure facilities.
 The skill sets of the local residents are expected
to improve in keeping with the emerging
employment opportunities.
6. Community If Emission Control Systems are not  Budget of Rs. 41.9 Crores
Health of people residing in all the three impact
Health zones is not likely to be impacted adversely operated & proper dust suppression has been earmarked for
considering the nature of emissions and the systems not adopted for control of Air emission
state-of-the-art Emission control systems Particulate emissions from Stack & Fugitive management, Rs. 5.7
planned. emissions from Raw material handling Crores for solid &
areas, it may raise community health hazardous waste
issues. management.
 Also, Rs. 1.0 Crores is
earmarked for PHC with
ambulance facility with
emergency equipment.
7. Physical Road and power network in the area is expected  If massive Increase in vehicular traffic Priority will be given to local
Infrastructure to be strengthened as a sequel to industrial may lead to higher incidence of road people in employment in
development around. accidents. the proposed project.
 If influx of workers from outside areas
then there will be an increased pressure
on water supply and sanitation in the
neighbourhood during construction
phase.

4.32

8. Social Improvement in housing stock and educational If influx of workers from outside areas then ---
Infrastructure facilities could be expected in the long run as there will be an increased pressure on
industrialization in the area gains acceleration. residential accommodation the
neighbourhood during construction phase.

4.33
CHAPTER – 5
ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES 5
(TECHNOLOGY & SITE)
5.1 ALTERNATIVE TECHNOLOGIES

No technological failures are anticipated, as I/O Beneficiation Plant, Pelletization Plant, Spong
Iron manufacturing through DRI Kilns, Hot Metal / MS Billets / Ingots through Induction
Furnaces, Rolled Products through Rolling Mill, Ferro Alloy manufacturing through SEAF and
Power Generation are well known and proven technologies all over the world. Hence no
alternative technologies are considered.
5.2 ALTERNATIVE SITES [Gen.TOR # 4 (i)]

Real Ispat and Power Limited has proposed to establish Steel Plant, a Greenfield Project, at
Chhattisgarh.
• Earlier MoEF has accorded EC for the Integrated Steel Plant vide letter no. J-11011 / 170
/ 2009 – IA II (I) dated 25th March 2010 in the same location with 300 Acres of land.
scenario.
• EC validity of 7 years has been expired on 25 th March 2017 and could not submit the
period.
• Now fresh proposal has been submitted to MoEF&CC for grant of EC as per the provisions
of EIA notification dated 14-09-2006 and its amendments thereof.
• For the present proposal (with revised plant configuration) 63.52 ha. (156.909 Acres) of
land is envisaged and same is already acquired by the Project Proponent.
• Hence no alternative site has been examined.

5.1
CHAPTER – 6
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM
6
6.1 TECHNICAL ASPECTS
6.1.1 METHODOLOGY
To know the effectiveness of environmental mitigation measures post project environmental
monitoring program will be strictly followed as per the statutory requirement.
 The flue gases from Pellet Plant will be discharged into the atmosphere through 2 nos. of
stacks each of 61 m height for effective dispersion of emissions.
 Air emission control equipment such as Bag filters as De-dusting System will be provided to
I/O beneficiation plant to maintain the dust concentration in the exhaust gases of stack of
30 m height is below 30 mg/Nm3.
 The flue gases from the DRI kilns will pass through Waste Heat Recovery Boiler and after heat
recovery the gases will be treated in High efficiency ESP and then discharged into the
atmosphere through combined stack of 93 m (with Twin Flues) attached to 2 x 650 TPD kilns
& 77 m (with Twin Flues) attached to 2 x 350 TPD DRI kilns, 1 no. of stack of 60 m height
attached to each 1 x 200 TPD DRI kiln to bring down the particulate emission in the exhaust
gases to below 30 mg/Nm3.
 The Fugitive emissions from the Induction Furnaces will be sucked through hoods and will
pass through a Fume extraction system with bag filters and then the treated gases will be
discharged into the atmosphere through a Combined stack (tri flues) of 45 m height to 3 x 30
T Induction Furnaces, a Combined stack (twin flues) of 45 m height to 2 x 30 T Induction
Furnaces, a Combined stack (tri flues) of 45 m height to 3 x 20 T Induction Furnaces & a
Combined stack (twin flues) of 45 m height to 2 x 20 T Induction Furnaces for effective
disperssion.
 The outlet dust emission in the exhaust gases will be less than 30 mg/Nm3. The dust will be
pneumatically carried to covered bins.
 The Fugitive emissions from the Submerged Electric Arc furnaces will be sucked through 4th
Hole fume extraction system with bag filters and then the treated gases will be discharged
into the atmosphere through 1 no. of combined stack of 30 m height with Twin Flues

6.1
(minimum as per CPCB norms) will be provided to 2 x 9 MVA Submerged Electric Arc Furnaces
for effective dispersion of emissions.
 The flue gases from the Reheating Furnaces attached to Rolling Mill will pass through 3 nos.
of stacks each of 48 m height for effective dispersion of SO2 emission into the atmosphere.
 The Exhaust emissions from FBC Boiler will pass through a high efficiency ESP to bring down
the particulate matter to less than 30 mg/Nm3 and will be let out into the atmosphere
through a stack of 83 m height for effective dispersion of emissions into the atmosphere.
 Energy meters will be provided to all air pollution control systems to ensure effective
operation of the control systems.
 Fugitive emissions will be monitored as per CPCB norms.
 All air emission control systems will be taken-up for maintenance as per prescribed schedule
and compliance with norms will always be ensured.
 Stack monitoring and Ambient air quality checks at regular interval by SPCB will also help in
cross checking the performance of Pollution control systems i installed in the plant.
6.1.2 FREQUENCY & LOCATIONS OF ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING

A comprehensive monitoring programme is given as under. This environmental monitoring will
be entrusted to a third party.
Table No. 6.1.1: Monitoring Schedule For Environmental Parameters

S.No. Particulars Frequency of Duration of Parameters required
Monitoring sampling to be monitored
1. Water & Waste water quality
A. Water quality in the Once in a month except Composite sampling As per IS: 10500
area for heavy metals which (24 hourly)
will be monitored on
quarterly basis.
B. Effluent at the outlet Twice in a month Grab sampling As per EPA Rules, 1996
of the ETP (24 hourly)
C. STP Inlet & Outlet Twice in a month Grab sampling As per EPA Rules1996
(24 hourly)
2. Air Quality
A. Stack Monitoring Online monitors PM, SO2 & NOx
(all stacks)
Once in a month PM, SO2 & NOx
B. Ambient Air quality Continuous Continuous PM10, SO2 & NOx
(CAAQMS)
Quarterly Once 24 hours

6.2
PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NOx

& CO
C. Fugitive emissions Quarterly Once 8 hours PM
3. Meteorological Data
Meteorological data Daily Continuous Temperature, Relative
to be monitored at monitoring Humidity, rainfall,
the plant. wind direction & wind
speed.
4. Noise level monitoring
Ambient Noise levels Once in a month Continuous for 24 Noise levels
hours with 1 hour
interval
6.1.3 DATA ANALYSIS

All the parameters will be analyzed as per IS procedures specified for those parameters. All water
samples will be analyzed for various parameters as per IS: 10500 procedures.
The methodology adopted for monitoring & analysis of PM2.5 & PM10 is as per IS: 5182 Part IV,
SO2 & NOX as per IS: 5182 Part II & Part VI respectively. Samples were analyzed for SO2 using
improved West-Gaeke method for air samples using a spectrophotometer at a wavelength of
560nm. Samples were analyzed for NOX using Jacob and Hocheiser modified (Na-As) method, for
Air samples using a spectrophotometer at wavelength of 540 nm. CO was analyzed on Gas
Chromatograph. PM10 & PM2.5 in ambient air are found by using Respirable Dust Sampler (RDS)
& APM-550.
6.1.4 REPORTING SCHEDULE

After completion of analysis, copies of all the analysis reports will be sent to Ministry of
Environment, Forests & Climate Change and SPCB on monthly basis. Copies of the reports will
be maintained in the plant and will be made available to the concerned inspecting authorities as
and when required.
6.1.5 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

Whenever the ESP fails to comply with the norms, then interlocking system will immediately cut-
off the supply of raw materials to the kiln. The kiln will be shut down as per the procedure to
have least environmental impact.

6.3
6.1.6 DETAILED BUDGET & PROCUREMENT SCHEDULES

The budgetary allocation for Environmental monitoring is Rs. 20.5 Lakhs/Annum. A third party
will be engaged to monitor all the environmental parameters as per CPCB / SPCB norms once
the proposed project comes into operation.
Table No. 6.1.2: Break up of Budget allocation towards Environmental monitoring:

S.No. Monitoring No. of Monitoring Frequency of No. of Cost / Total cost
Item units Parameters Monitoring Samples Sample in (Rs. In
Proposed /annum (Rs.) lakhs)
PM & SO2, Once in a
1 Stack 22 264 4000 1056000
NOx month
PM10, PM2.5 Quarterly
2 AAQ 4 16 7000 112000
NOx & CO once
pH, TDS, TSS,
O&G, Free
Available Cl, Twice in a
3 Effluent 4 96 6000 576000
Cu, Fe, Zn, month
Chromium,
PO4
Fugitive Quarterly
4 2 PM 8 4000 32000
emissions once
As per IS: Quarterly
5 Ground water 2 8 7000 56000
10500 once
Once in a
6 Noise levels 4 --- month 1152 100 115200
(hourly)
Performance
Once in a
7 Evaluation of 1 --- 1 100000 100000
year
APCD
Total 2047200
Note : CEMS, CAAQMS & Continuous Weather Monitoring Station will be provided

6.4
CHAPTER – 7
ADDITIONAL STUDIES
7
7.1 INTRODUCTION
As per the Terms of Reference (ToRs) issued vide letter No. J-11011/411/2019-IA II (I) dated 20th
January 2020 by MoEFCC, New Delhi, following Additional Studies were carried out for the
proposed project:
i. Public Hearing / Consultation
ii. Risk Assessment and Disaster Management Plan
iii. Social Impact Assessment study
7.2 PUBLIC CONSULTATION

Public Hearing for proposed proposal was conducted on 4th February 2021 at 11:00 AM at Project
site, Bakulahi & Dhourabhata Villages, Bhatapara Tehsil, Baloda Bazar – Bhatapara District,
Chhattisgarh.
Details of the Public Hearing include:
1. Proceedings of Public Hearing
2. Public Hearing Notice published in Local newspaper (Hindi) “Dainik Bhaskar”, Raipur dt.
3rd January 2021 and in National newspaper (English) “Hindustan Times” New Delhi dt. 3rd
January 2021.
3. Management response for the issues raised during Public Hearing & action plan
7.2.1 PROCEEDINGS OF PUBLIC HEARING

Public Hearing Proceedings have been enclosed as Annexure – 7 along with this Final EIA/EMP
Report.

7.1
7.2.2 PUBLIC HEARING NOTICE IN NEWSPAPER
Figure 7.1: Public Hearing Notice in Newspaper

7.2
7.2.3 PUBLIC HEARING PHOTOGRAPH

7.3
7.2.4 MANAGEMENT RESPONSE FOR THE ISSUES RAISED DURING PUBLIC HEARING & ACTION PLAN [Spec. TOR # xiv]
Table No. 7.2.1: Management response for the issues raised during Public Hearing along with budget allocation and action plan
S.No. Name of the Issue raised Management Response Time Budgetary Reference in
Person schedule allocation EIA report
1. Shri. Rohit He said that Gram sabha --- ---- --- ---
Kumar Dhruv, has been conducted and
Bakulahi decision has been taken to
Village support the project.
2. Shri. Shyamlal He submitted letter in --- --- --- ---
Dhruv, support of the proposed
Bakulahi project.
Village
3. Shri. Netram He opined that proper Land has been purchased from the farmers as per --- --- ---
Dhruv, compensation for land was mutually agreed price.
Bharatpur not given to them.
Village
Company must comply with All required environmental protection measures like 2021-23 Capital Cost – Page No.
environment law and ESP, Bagfilters (PTFE type), dust suppression system, 2023-25 Rs. 65.23 10.25 of
environment management. covered conveyers, mechanical dust sweepers will be Crores Chapter 10
provided to bring down the particulate emission to < Recuring Cost
30mg/Nm3. All the APCS will be installed and – Rs.191.60
operated duly complying with the emission norms. lakhs/annum
Interlocking system will also be provided to ensure
that whenever ESP fails, the raw material feed to that
unit will be stopped and will commence operation
only after rectification of ESP.
ZLD will be followed.
Solid waste disposal will be in accordance with the
norms.Ash will be stored in silos only.

7.4
Greenbelt will be developed 1/3rd of the plant area.
Employment should be Priority will be given to un-employeed local villagers --- --- ---
given to the villagers of as per their eligibility and rules of Government. The
Bharatpur, Bakulahi & proposed project will generate direct employment
Dhaurabhata villagers 1000 nos. which will be employed officials, staff,
based on their qualification skilled, semi -skilled labour & 1000 nos. indirectly
and also given as given employed in contract works & transport.
assurance of permanent
emplyment.
Company should consitute Management assured to constiture Panchayat Samiti 2021-23 Rs. 9.68 Page No. 8.3
Panchayat Samiti, should and carry our Social & infrastructure development 2023-25 Crores of Chapter 8
carry out social and activities and a separate budget is allocated for these
infrastructure development activities.
like construction of Mini
Stadium, Angaanbari,
Hospitals etc.
4. Shri. Ram He opposed the project Company assured to provide burial land by 2022 – 24 Rs. 20 Lakhs Page No. 8.3
Prasad Dhruv, stating all the land is being purchasing the land as suggested by village panchayat of Chapter 8
Bakulahi taken by Project Proponent,
Village they will be not left with
land for cow grazing, burial
space etc.
5. Shri. He opined that earlier this Land is purchased from the farmers wth mutual --- --- ---
Neelkanth, 102 acres of land was Grass agreement
Bakulahi land and company has
Village taken from them in a fake
way.

7.5
6. Shri. Narendra He opposed the project Land is purchased from the farmers wth mutual --- --- ---
Kumar Dhruv, stating that land was agreement
Bakulahi registered in a fake way
Village from them. Now they don’t
have land for cow grazing,
Pond, settlement etc.
7. Shri. Banshilal He opind that land was Land is purchased from the farmers wth mutual --- --- ---
Dehriya, purchased from us brokers agreement
Bharatpur in the name of farming, but
Village not Industry is being
proposed here. Farmers did
not get full compensation
for their land and
demanded for
compensation to be given
as per present guidelines.
8. Smt. Sarita She said tha that Priority will be given to un-employeed local villagers --- --- ---
Dhritlahre, employmet should be given as per their eligibility and rules of Government. The
Bharatpur to the local villgers proposed project will generate direct employment
Village 1000 nos. which will be employed officials, staff,
skilled, semi -skilled labour & 1000 nos. indirectly
employed in contract works & transport.
9. Smt. Satwanti, She opined that their is Management has assured to Drinking water facility in 2022 – 2023 Rs. 1.2 Crores Chapter 8
Bakulahi water problems in the the villages under social & infrastructure Pg. No. 8.2
Village village and no grazing land is development activities.
available in the village
10. Shri. Manoj He said that employment Priority will be given to un-employeed local villagers --- --- ---
Tandon, should be given to the as per their eligibility and rules of Government. The
Mopka Village proposed project will generate direct employment
7.6
villagers of Mopka village 1000 nos. which will be employed officials, staff,
also. skilled, semi -skilled labour & 1000 nos. indirectly
employed in contract works & transport.
11. Shri. Narendra He opined that, if he oppose --- --- ---
Kumar Verma, the proposed project, will
Dhuarbhata the company open or not.
Village
12. Shri. Nar Singh He opposed the proposed --- --- ---
Prasad, project.
Dhuarbhata
Village
7.2.5 ACTIVITIES PROPOSED UNDER SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES BASED ON PUBLIC HEARING / CONSULTATION
Based on the Public Hearing outcome, following the activities are proposed under Socio economic activities (dealt in Chapter # 8):
 Employment generation
 Drinking water requirement in the villages
 Mini Stadium
 Anganbaari
 Hospitals
 Proper place for burial

7.7
7.3 RISK ASSESSMENT [Gen. TOR # 3 (ix) & 7 (xiii)]

7.3.1 INTRODUCTION
Risk analysis deals with the identification and quantification of risks, the plant equipments and
personnel are exposed to, due to accidents resulting from the hazards present in the factory.
Hazard analysis involves the identification and quantification of the various hazards that are likely
to occur in the industry.
Both hazard and risk analysis are very extensive studies, and require a very detailed design and
engineering information.
The various hazard analysis techniques that may be applied are Hazard and Operability (HAZOP)
studies, Fault - Tree Analysis (FTA), event –tree analysis and, failure and effects mode analysis.
Risk analysis follows an extensive hazard analysis. It involves the identification and assessment of
risks the neighboring populations are exposed to as a result of hazards present. This requires a
through knowledge of failure probability, credible accident scenario, vulnerability of populations
etc. Much of these information’s are difficult to get or generate. Consequently, the risk analysis
is oftenly confined to maximum creditable accident studies.
7.3.2 SCOPE OF THE STUDY
The scope of study includes the study of proposed operations, storage and handling of raw
materials with respect to Hazard Identification. Risk Assessment and preparation of Disaster
Management plan. Based on the Hazard Identification and analysis, the major disaster scenarios
would be worked out to estimate the consequence of failure. A Disaster Management Plan (DMP)
would also be evolved to meet the emergency situation including the occupational health and
safety.
7.3.3 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

The following Fire Protection system will be provided in the plant.
 Hydrant system covering the entire plant including all important auxiliaries and buildings.
The system will be complete with piping, valves, instrumentation, hoses, nozzles and
hydrants, etc.
 Sprinkler system for cable galleries / vaults / spreader room etc.
 High velocity water system for LDO storage tanks.

7.8
 Portable fire extinguishers such as pressurized water type, carbon dioxide type and foam
type will be located at strategic locations through out the plant.
 Modular type carbon dioxide panel injection fire extinguishing system will be provided in
control equipment room, cable space below control room and at other unmanned
electrical and electronic equipment room.
The following pumps will be provided in the fire protection system.
Fire water pumps:

(Fire water reservoir is part of the main water reservoir)
a) AC motor driven fire water pumps for hydrant, medium velocity water spray system and foam
system.
b) AC motor driven fire water pumps for high velocity water spray system.
c) Diesel engine driven pump as stand by for the above.
d) AC motor driven Jackey pump 1 No. for maintaining pressure.
Suitable number of electric motor driven and diesel engine operated hydrant and spray pumps
with automatic starting will be provided for the above systems. The fire water pumps will take
suction from the fire water reservoir to be created in the plant area.
7.3.4 METHODOLOGY OF MCA ANALYSIS
The MCA Analysis involved ordering and ranking of various sections in terms of potential
vulnerability. The following steps were involved in MCA Analysis.
 Preparation of an inventory of major storages and rank them on the basis of their hazardous
properties.
 Identification of potentially hazardous storage sections and representative failure cases from
the vessels and the pipelines.
 Visualization of chemical release scenarios.
 Effect and damage calculation from the release cases through mathematical modeling.
 Inventory Analysis and Fire & Explosion and Toxicity Index (FETI) are the two techniques
employed for hazard identification process.
7.3.5 FIRE & EXPLOSION AND TOXICITY INDEX

The role of Fire & Explosion Index (FEI) aids quantitative hazard identification. The FEI is
calculated by evaluating the loss potential of all the units in the storage area and the hazardous
areas are classified accordingly. The FEI plays an important role in
7.9
 Identification of the equipment/areas that could likely contribute to the creation or escalation
of incident and relative ranking of the incidents.
 Quantification of the expected damage of potential fire and explosion incidents.
 Preparation of guidelines for mitigating fire hazards.
The loss potential which could actually be experienced under the most adverse operating
conditions is quantitatively evaluated. The FEI is used for any operation in which a flammable,
combustible or reactive material is stored, handled or processed.
FEI = MF * GPH * SPH
Where MF : Material factor
GPH : General Process Hazard
SPH : Special Process Hazard
TOXICITY INDEX
The Toxicity Index is calculated using the the following formula.
(Nh + Ts) * (1 + GPH + SPH)

TI = -------------------------------------------
100
Where Nh:
Ts:
GPH: General Process Hazard
SPH: Special Process Hazard
7.3.6 ASSESSMENT OF RISK AT M/s. REAL ISPAT & POWER LTD.

Based on the storage inventory the following areas are identified as potential safety risk areas,
shown in Table No. 7.3.1.
Table No.7.3.1: Type of Hazardous Identified During Storage & Handling[Gen.ToR # 3 (v)]
S.No. Area Capacity / quantity Hazards identified
1. Steam turbine generator 66 MW Fires in
building a) Lube oil system
b) Short circuit in control room /
switch gears
c) Cable galleries
d) Fire in oil drum storage

7.10
S.No. Area Capacity / quantity Hazards identified

2. Transformer ---- Explosion & fire
3. Boilers 6 Nos. Fire (mainly near oil burners) steam
(WHRB &AFBC) explosion, fuel explosion
4. Coal handling plant ---- Fire and or dust explosion
5. Coal storage 10000 tons Fire, spontaneous combustion
6. LSHS /LDO tank farm 2 x 100 m3 Fire
7. HFO tank farm 1 x 25 m3 Fire
The degree of hazard is identified based on FEI & TI range as per the criteria given below.
FEI RANGE DEGREE OF HAZARD

0 – 60 LIGHT
61 - 96 MODERATE
97 - 127 INTERMEDIATE
128 - 158 HEAVY
159 & Above SEVERE
TI RANGE DEGREE OF HAZARD

0–5 LIGHT
5 - 10 MODERATE
> 10 SEVERE
Fire and Explosion are the likely hazards which may occur due to the fuel storage. Hence F&EI
has been calculated for storage capacities of fuels in the plant and are shown in Table 7.3.2.
Table No. 7.3.2: Fire & Explosion and Toxicity Index for Storage Facilities
Fuel Total quantity of F& EI Category TI Category
storage
LSHS /LDO 2 x 100 m3 1.5 Light -- --
HFO 1 x 25 m3 1.5 Light -- --
Table No. 7.3.3: Possible Risks From The Steel Plant & Mitigation Measures
Equipment Process Potential Hazard Mitigation
Pellet Plant
Raw material Spillage of wet Head injury /  Immediate barrier will be placed and
storage bentonite may Broken bones warning signage around spillage area
lead to slip  Training to the workers
Balling & Mixing Dust generation Lung disorders  Personal respiratory equipments will be
during running of provided to the workers at work place.
loading circuit  Exhaust ventilation system will be provided
Sponge Iron Kiln Reduction of Iron Falling of Hot Mass  Ensuring before opening the kiln bottom
Ore & Dust door, first clean the inner surface of the
stack cap, such that the dust particle and
7.11

hard clinkers which deposited in the cap is
fallen into the DSC.
 Ensure before opening the DSC bottom door
to check the DSC bar position and condition
and to clean if big block of castables or any
hard clinkers which is blocking the dust flow
passage to wet scrapper chute.
 Ensure to clean the dust by opening the man
hole provided in the chute and check the
spiking rods and the screen. In built safety
system is provided in the construction of
furnace with suitable refractory walls.
 Allow the wet scrapper to run to remove the
sludge, then open the drain pipe of the wet
scrapper, which is located at bottom on
either side, pour sufficient water to clean
the sludge and the slurry dust to flow
through drain pipe.
 Ensure to stop the wet scrapper and open
the top plate to check the alignment, weak
and tear of the plates and take necessary
precaution against the excessive worn out
plate.
Sponge Iron Kiln Reduction of Iron Air emission Adequately designed ESP and other Air
Ore Pollution control systems will be provided
with interlock to the kiln feeding system in
order to prevent by passing of emissions
through safety cap and also during non
operation of ESP or any other pollution
control devices.
Power plant
Turbine Convert pressure Mechanical & Fire Layout of Equipment / Machinery will be in
in the flue gas Hazards accordance to factory and electrical
into Mechanical Noise inspectorate.
Energy Acoustic enclosure to Turbine
Generator Convert Mechanical & Fire Layout of Equipment / Machinery will be in
Mechanical Hazards accordance to factory and electrical
energy into a) Lube Oil System inspectorate
electrical energy b) Cable galleries
c) Short circuits
Noise  Acoustic enclosure
 Isolated panel rooms
 Special foundation with vibration absorbers
Power ---- Fire and explosion Automatic fire fighting system will be
Transformers provided.
Isolated with fencing and restricted entry.

7.12

Switch Yard transformer Fire All electrical fittings and cables are provided
Switch Yard Fire in cable as per the specified standards.
control room galleries and
switch
Coal storage Storage of coal Fire and Coal storage yard will be continuously
shed for 10 days spontaneous sprinkled with water with garden type
requirement. combustion sprinklers.
Coal handling ---- Fire and dust Continuous water sprinkling
bunkers explosions
Compressor Plant operation Governor failure The design precautions of safety will be
House due to the failure followed in manufacture and erection of
of pins and springs compressors.
leading to opening
of safety valves
Coal storage Coal dust is Explosion Hazard  Coal storage shall be minimised
yard combustible  Coal piles shall not be located above heat
sources such as steam lines.
 motors.
 All mechanical & electrical equipment inside
the coal storage area shall be approved for
use in hazardous locations and provided
with spark proof.
STG, draft fans, Noise generated Noise hazard  Acoustic enclosures will be provided to STG.
soot blowing due to operation  Enclose fans, insulating ventilation pipes
from boiler,
of STG, working  use of dampeners.
ventillation of fans,
pipes ventilation
system,
LDO storage MS tanks Fire & explosion Precautions as per TAC and OISD will be
3
area HFO : 1 x 25 m ; implemented.
LDO: 2 x 100 m3;
Failure of APCS DUST / SMOKE Air emission  Emergency alarm to be given to Villagers.
 Intorlocking system will be provide to APCS.
 Water sprinkling arrangements

7.13
Table No. 7.3.4: Process Hazard Analysis Related To Induction Furnace &
Necessary Risk Control Measures
S.No Area/Section Hazards Risk Control Measures
A) ELECTRIC INDUCTION FURNACE
1) IF proper Explosion hazard due to Water  Stop operation.
Leakage from coil, Water  Stop tilting or stop any Furnace movement
Cooled panel or power cables.  Identify the leakage point
 Develop and Follow SOP
Metal splash or explosion due  Stop operation.
to water coming into contact  Ensure use of PPEs
with molten  Proper protection system like Ground Leak
metal. (Water may be present Detector (GLD) etc. in place
in scrap material or from leaks  Ensure No unauthorized person on furnace
in the furnace cooling systems) platform
 Ensure no wet scrap and leakage of water
Metal splash or explosion due  Stop operation
to improper scrap charging /  Proper Segregation of scrap
wet scrap / chemicals in scrap  Inspection of scrap and approval
 process for worthiness.
 Safe scrap charging through
cranes/vibrators charging trolley
 Use of Hydraulic pusher for melting
Injury from Material Handling  Regular Maintenance of EOT cranes in
like DRI, Pig Iron, Scrap shifting respect of wire ropes, brakes, lifting hook,
to furnace floor rails/wheels, electrical system/motors etc.
 Provision of proper limit switches
 Emergency main switch of cranes to be
provided near platform or at an easily
accessible place.
 Bell/Siren is to be provided in the cabin for
crane operator
 Annual inspection of Cranes/Lifting
tackles/Magnets by competent person
every year as per factory act
 Display of safe working load on each crane
 Proper Guarding of all stairs and crane’s CT
Trolley
Explosion due to high  Water Temperature & flow sensors
temperature/thinning of  Ground leak detector
refractory with improper  Circuit breakers and tripping mechanism
Melting system protection  Frequency monitoring
 Lining conditions of crucibles & ladle etc.
Additionally-Bridging in IF:
 Develop and follow SOP
Leading to superheating of
furnace bottom and erosion of
ramming mass and rupture of

7.14
S.No Area/Section Hazards Risk Control Measures

cooling water tubes and
subsequent explosion.
2) IF turnaround Burn Injury due to splashing  Proper PPE and visor.
activity slag  Covering of all exposed area with cloth
Injury from Pressurized Vessels  Air compressors/pressure vessels should
be checked regularly for proper working of
Pressure switches, safety valves and
Pressure gauges.
 Auto drain valve is to be provided on each
pressure vessel
 Six monthly testing of PV Thickness and
hydraulic testing every four years by
competent person as per the factory act.
Person hit by moving machines  Siren, gong bell during movement
machines.
 Auto announcement during any operation.
 Permit to work prior to undertaking any
maintenance job
3) Electrical Electrical failures and shock  Proper Earthing pits
system  Earthing of all electrical
motors/gadgets
 Work permit system
 Transformer testing (dielectric strength
and dehydration of Transformer oil)
4) Failure of APCS Dust / Smoke  Emergency alarm to be given to Villagers.
 Raw material feed will be stopped to
furnace
Table No. 7.3.5: Process Hazard Analysis Related To Rolling Mills

& Necessary Risk Control Measures
S.No. Area/Section Hazards Risk Control Measures
A. Raw material Injury in grinding  Wear goggles for all grinding machine operations.
section operation  Operate grinding wheels at recommended speed
with recommended depth of cut.
 Use proper wheel guards on all grinding
machines.
 Use PPEs.
 Develop and Follow SOPs
Hazards due to  Avoid sitting, standing, or walking on conveyors.
conveyors  All conveyor to be provided with proper guards.
 Never perform maintenance while a conveyor is
in operation.
 Ensure correct operation of conveyor controls.

7.15

 Avoid loose clothing, long hair, jewellery and
other loose items near conveyor
 Emergency "shut-off" devices to be provided
 Follow lock-out / tag-out procedures for
maintenance
 Only authorized / trained personnel to operate or
maintain the conveyor.
Hazards in Material  Maintained floors in proper condition
handling & stacking area  Stacked the material properly without any billet
ends protruding out
 Clearly defined walkways, proper stacking of
material.
 Regular clearance of debris.
B. Reheating Gas poisoning due to  All the gas line to be insulated from circuit by "U"
Furnace leakage of gas seal and also fill up water in water seal and
ensure overflow of water to drain.
 Blanking of gas line to be done before Removal of
valves or flanges.
 Proper packing to be provided in fixing of valves
or flanges.
 Regular inspection of gas lines to detect leakage
if any.
 Use Portable “CO” monitors to detect gas
leakage.
 Ensure the closure of main valve to cut off supply
 Check all the flange/ welded joints for gas
leakage.
 Purge the gas pipe line with nitrogen in small
segments by opening the bleeder valve
Fire hazards  Give clearance for cutting / welding etc. after
ensuring that there is no leakage of gas
 Keep the Portable fire extinguishers ready for any
hazards
 While lighting up or off of the furnace, laid down
procedures are to be followed strictly.
Burn injury hazards,  Use personal protection equipment.
Exposed to hot flames  Keep the first aid kit having burn injury medicine
and hot billets / ingots on standby
Hazards associated with  Work permit system to be followed.
re-lining of furnace with  Monitor the temperature of area before starting
refractory bricks work

7.16

 Hand held 24 V bulb to be used during repairs in
furnace
 Detail job safety protocol may be prepared to
undertake the job, if job is irregular.

Hazard due to  All electrical equipment/ machines to be earthed
mechanical & Electrical properly
Maintenance  Use electrical PPEs
C) Rolling Mill Injury from Moving roller  Shutdown / permit to work with electrical
table isolation.
 No work to be done on conveyor in running
condition.
 Local emergency switch to be operated for
approaching conveyor.
 Availability of Pull chord.
 Siren system prior to restarting conveyor.
 Loose cloths prohibited.
 Area barricading if material is removed
from height.
Injury from Rotating  Coupling guards to be in place.
machineries  Loose cloths to prohibited
Injury during Working on  "Permit to work" practice to be followed
mill stands strictly.
 Display of “Men at Work” board is to be done at
Operator Control Panel
Injury during Roll Change  During Roll Change, Rolls to be cooled with
water spray before work to avoid burn injury.
 Ensure to take Power Shutdown for Roller Table
and connected drive.
 Ensure written Work Clearance to be given to
concerned personnel for doing the work.
 Cleanliness of area with respect to presence of
oil, grease, jute and other inflammable
materials before gas cutting/ welding job.
 Availability of fire hydrant to be ensured if
job involves gas cutting etc.
 Display “Men at Work” board at Operator
Control Panel.
 Place a plate on rollers table for smooth entry of
personnel.

7.17

 Use required PPE when changing roll and after
completion of jobs, ensure that men and
materials are removed from site.
 Ensure that “Job completion Report” is given in
writing and then cancel “Power Shutdown,”
remove “Caution Tags” and give clearance for
operation.
Electric shock  Ensures safety precautions like “Power
Shutdown”, work clearance before stating the
job
 Displaying of "Men at Work" at HT switching on
panel.
 Proper earthing of brush holder arm etc.
 Checking protection and safety devices may
expose the maintainer to risks in the event that
the devices are not functional. For this reason,
the machines must be isolated from their main
power sources (electrical switchboards, main
delivery valves, etc.) under the supervision of the
Manager of the plant, using established SOP’s
and written permissions.
Entanglement/ injury at  For working in gear box / coupling, take power
Gear box/ coupling shut-down for connected drive.
 Display “Men at Work tag”.
Injury while Working on  For safe working, ensure” power Shut down”
EOT Cranes Work clearance Men at work tag.
 Watch by additional person to observe
movement of nearby crane etc.
 Stoppers are to be welded on both sides of crane
on LT rails.
 Submit job completion report after repair.
 All the lifting tools and tackles to be checked
every year as per statutory requirement.
Injury in Motors with  Provide guards on all the motors having belt /
belt/chain drives chain type transmission mechanism.
Injury with Flywheel  Flywheel to run below safe speed limits.
 Appropriate guard to be provided around
flywheel.

7.18

Person hit by rolling hot  Auto Announcement during
material during looping  Proper guards to be provided to avoid material
and play coming in the way of workmen.
 Proper pathways to be provided for safe
movement.
 Use of appropriate PPE hand gloves, gum boots,
Face shield, dust mask, goggles by persons
working on stands and handling hot materials.
 Proper leg / arms guards / safety goggles to be
provided to tongs men
 Permit to work prior to undertaking any
maintenance job.
Injury from Cooling Fans  Appropriate guards to be provided around fan
blades.
 Proper stand to be provided.
 Earthing to be provided.
Injury from Manual  Use appropriate lifting tackles like chain pulley
Handling of Heavy loads block, hoist etc to lift heavy parts
Injury from Handling of  All hand tools to be well designed, frequently
stock at stands inspected and well maintained.
 Rivets of tongs used at mills to be renewed
frequently.
Injury during Mill  Ring spanners and impact wrenches should be
maintenance provided for roll changing crews;
 Bent-out, open-ended spanners not be used.
 Adequate training to be given to fitters in the use
of all hand tools.
Injury from Capital Repair  All the power shutdowns of the required system
Job in Rolling Mill (Semi to be taken as per the dully filled work permit
Automatic) form and necessary clearance from concerned
operation and electrical area.
 Using required PPE as per requirement.
 Ensure that all lifting tools & tackles (winches,
Hug-zugs, Chain Pulley Blocks etc.), mobile cranes
are tested by a competent person and test
certificates are submitted.
 For working at height, a “Work at heights pass”
to be obtained from safety department and use
of appropriate safety belts.

7.19

 All portable electrical equipment, welding
machines to be earthed effectively (body
earthing).
 Before any heavy structural member is gas cut, it
is to be supported by ropes, chains or any other
means to prevent its dropping or swinging.
 Suitable fire extinguisher in working condition
must be kept close to all welding and gas cutting
operations.
 Rolling of gas cylinders to be avoided and
transferred / shifted by proper trolleys.

 Proper protection to be provided to conveyor
and electrical cables to prevent fall of sparks from
welding/ gas cutting.
 Isolation of electrical power and written
clearance to be obtained from electrical section
before start of dismantling operation.
 Area of work to be illuminated, before starting
the job.
 Movement of the employees to be restricted to
working area only.
 Mono rail hoist/EOT crane, to be operated with
in safe working load (SWL) of the equipment.
 All the openings created during dismantling to be
immediately covered/ barricaded.
 Compressed air vessels and pipelines to be de-
pressurized before dismantling.
 Combustible / Inflammable materials such as coal
powders, oil spillages etc. are to be removed
from the place where gas cutting/ welding jobs
are to be carried out.
 A charged water hose pipe may be kept near the
place of work.
 People involved in hazardous area to be imparted
first aid & fire fighting training.
 Prior to actuation it must be ensured that no
persons are in the active area of the dangerous
energy (mechanical, electrical, hydraulic,
pneumatic, etc.).
 Only the hydraulic / pneumatic specialist
is allowed to perform switching operations on
hydraulic / pneumatic valves, provided the
following conditions are fulfilled:
 personnel involved in plant start-up and control
must be warned of any operations that are to be

7.20

carried out in the enclosed area before starting
the machine
 No persons must be present in the danger zone,
 Voice contact must be established with a
responsible person at the workplace in charge of
monitoring the sequence of functions.
D) General safety  All required PPEs are to be used while working
norms for  Use properly maintained tools & tackles.
rolling mills  Hand tools to be checked in every six months.
(Semi  All the lifting tools and tackles to be every year as
Automatic) I per statutory requirement.
 Permit-to-work to be filled up before taking any
job.
 Before starting any job compliance to be proper
safety isolation procedure to be ensured by
concerned agencies.
 Compliance of special measures to be
undertaken such as cooling of rolls in hot areas,
use of supports, use of stoppers, closing of valves,
housekeeping in the area, availability of fire hose
/ extinguishers.
 Standard Operation Practices (SOPs) and
Standard Maintenance Practices (SMPs) are to be
followed strictly.
 All the mechanical moving equipments are to be
barricaded / guarded properly.
 All electrical equipments to be earthed properly.
 All high- pressure vessels are to be tested as per
statutory requirements.
 Oil Cellar to be checked every month for
leakages.
 Proper loading / unloading procedure for raw
materials / finished products to be prepared and
followed.
 Ensure the availability of firefighting equipment.
 Ensure proper illumination
 Proper housekeeping to be done.
 Before restoration of power of the equipment, it
is to be ensured that men, materials including
tools and tackles, supports, scaffolding etc. are
removed.
 Safety signs are intended to ensure the safety of
personnel at their workplace. Depending on the

7.21

kind of hazard, the following signs must be
placed:
 Prohibitive signs
 Warning signs
 Mandatory signs
 Rescue signs
 Informative signs
 Signs identifying permanent danger areas
 Signs for operating areas requiring individual
safeguarding
 In operating and danger areas of the
plant/machine, it is necessary to place the signs
listed above before equipment is put into
operation.
 Before commencing their activities, all personnel
must be instructed as to the significance of the
safety signs, and renewed instruction must be
given at appropriate intervals, but at least once
per year.
 In addition to the signs listed above, the user of
the equipment shall clearly and distinctly indicate
and place signs for the following:
 Escape routes/emergency exits
 First-aid stations
 Places where stretchers are available
 Emergency showers/eye washing facilities
 The operational reliability and the safe use of
the plant /machine are ensured (among other
things) by electrical and mechanical interlock
devices. These must be inspected at regular
maintenance intervals.
 Emergency push buttons / switches to be
checked for their functioning at regular intervals.
 All fixed guards, when removed for any work on
the machine, must be correctly replaced and
secured at the end of the work.
E) Failure of APCS Dust / Smoke  Emergency alarm to be given to Villagers.
 Raw material feed will be stopped to Rolling mill.

7.22
Table No. 7.3.6: Possible Risks, Hazards From The Plant & Mitigation Measures [Ferro Alloy Plant
S.No. AREA OF OCCUPATIONAL & SAFETY THEIR IMPACT ACTIONS TAKEN TO ELIMINATE THE
HAZARDS AND CAUSES IMPACT / HEALTH AND SAFETY HAZARDS
1 RAW MATERIAL  EXPOSURE TO DUST  Dust allergy,  Providing protective and safety
AREAS  WORKING IN OPEN AREAS  Fatigue due to physical activity appliances
 Rotation of workers
2 RAW MATERIAL  EXPOSURE TO DUST WHILE  Dust allergy, Lung disorders, respiratory  All conveyors covered
FEEDING SYSTEMS HANDLING RAW MATERIALS IN problems and effect to skin  Dust suppression systems at transfer
FERRO ALLOYS YARDS  Fatigue due to physical activity towers to eliminate dust
 EXPOSURE TO DUST AT  Scope of accidents / injuries due to  Providing proper protective and safety
TRANSFER TOWERS improper maintenance practices. appliances
 NOISE LEVELS DUE TO IMPACT  Hearing impairment, sleep disturbance,  Standing instructions and standard
AT BATCHING SYSTEM, EMV hypertension operating procedures
FEEDERS  Providing ear plugs
3 FURNACE AREA  EXPOSURE TO HEAT AT  Dehydration and cardio vascular disease.  Low hood design of furnace smoke hood
FERRO ALLOYS FURNACE  Dust allergy, Lung disorders, respiratory eliminates exposure to dust and fumes
 EXPOSURE TO DUST AT problems and effect to skin  Providing safety and protective
FURNACE  Metallic dust exposure appliances
 CHARGING & STROKING  Scope of burns and injuries and effect to  Proper design of hood top for extraction
SYSTEM AT FURNACE eyes of fumes to eliminate suffocation at
 SUFFOACATION AT OPERATING  Scope of injury due to spillage of hot charge operating floor due to fugitive emission
FLOOR LEVEL 1ST FLOOR mix at furnace operating floor  Face marks, shoes, helmets at operating
floor eliminates injuries
4 PROCESS  FLUCTUATIONS DUE TO  Burns and injuries due to furnace  Proper selection of raw materials and
FERRO ALLOYS METALLURGICAL ASPECTS erruptions due to metallurgical quality control of inputs eliminates
 FURNACE ERRUPTIONS disturbances in process process variations and related hazards.
 VARIATIONS IN PROCESS  Exessive heat / radiation and effect due to  Provision of proper safety and protective
PARAMETERS hold up of slag / metal in the furnace due equipment eliminates injuries / burns
to process variations
5 HOT METAL  TAPPING AREA HOT LIQUID  Scope of burns due to liquid metal spillages  SOPs and proper maintenance of cranes
HANDLING AREAS METAL HANDLING AND  Accidents due to Break down / failure of / tools & tackles eliminate accidents
SPILLAGES tools and tackles used in hot metal handling  Proper layout and free spaces for
 EXPOSURE TO HEAT equipment movement in hot metal handling areas
7.23
 CONTINUOUS CASTING  Burns due to Liquid metal spillages during eliminate scope of injuries in abnormal
MACHINE PROCESS process of pouring conditions.
 Burns due to water ingress to hot metal  Providing proper safety and protective
areas equipment eliminate scope of injuries
6 PRODUCT  HOT METAL & SLAG CAKES  Scope of burns due to hot metal cakes  Providing proper safety and protective
HANDLING HANDLING handling equipment to eliminate scope of injuries
FERRO ALLOYS  PRODUCT SIZING PROCESS  Metallic dust exposure  SOPs and proper maintenance and
 PRODUCT LOADING PROCESS  Scope of injuries during sizing process of testing of lifting equipment to eliminate
metal and slag scope of injuries.
 Failure of lifting tools & tackles and
equipment
7 EQUIPMENT  BREAK DOWN OF CRANES  Crane break down cause scope of lining  Proper SOPs for O & M and proper
FERRO ALLOYS  BREAK DOWN OF WATER failures and there by scope of injuries / maintenance schedules and equipment
COOLING PUMPS burns testing schedules eliminate scope of
 BREAK DOWN OF BLOWERS IN  Scope of steam generation in the water accidents related to these failures.
FURNACE AREA cooling circuit and failure of water hoses  Proper ventilation in the plant building
 BREAK DOWN OF HYDRAULLIC due to steaming and scope of burns eliminates scope of suffocation.
SYSTEMS  Break down of blowers scope of suffocation
in 2nd floor
8 FURNACE  POSSIBILITIES OF FIRE  Injuries / burns due to fire at transformer  Proper fire fighting equipment and
TRANSFORMERS  POSSIBILITIES OF ELECTRICAL  Electrical short circuits causing transformer nitrogen purging eliminates fire
FAILURES failure and scope of catching fire accidents in transformers
 Proper protection scheme and isolation
of furnace from source eliminate any
scope of accidents due to failure of
transformer
9 HYDRAULLIC  FAILURE OF HYDRAULLIC HOSES  Failure of hydraulic hoses due to electrical  Proper SOPs for O & M eliminate failures
SYSTEMS  POSSIBILITIES OF FIRE OF short circuits may cause accidents  Using carbon free high pressure hoses
HYDRAULLIC OIL  Possibility of fire accident due to oil eliminate hose failure accidents.
catching fire

7.24
 Separate enclosed room for hydraulic
room reduces scope of high temperature
and eliminate fire accidents
10 POLLUTION  SPARKS CAUSING BURNING OF  Fire accidents at Bag house  To avoid scope of bags catching fire,
CONTROL SYSTEMS BAGS IN BAG FILTERS  Excessive emissions due to failure of bags baffles in the ducting to arrest sparks,
FERRO ALLOYS  POSSIBILITIES OF SUDDEN  Structural failures due to this fire accident water cooled hood top, duct length of
SURGES IN FURNACE about 40 metres between hood & bag
filter, providing heat exchanger and
dilution dampers for fresh air completely
eliminate this scope of fire accident
 PLC based Interlocking system w.ill be
provided and acts in such a way that
whenever bagfilters fail, then furnace
will be shutdown
11 REFINING PROCESS  LIQUID METAL HANDLING  Scope of burns due to liquid metal spillages  SOPs and proper maintenance of cranes
AREAS SCOPE OF BURNS  Accidents due to Break down / failure of / tools & tackles eliminate accidents
 BREAK DOWN OF CRANES tools and tackles used in hot metal handling  Proper layout and free spaces for
equipment movement in hot metal handling areas
 Burns due to Liquid metal spillages during eliminate scope of injuries in abnormal
process of pouring conditions.
 Providing proper safety and protective
equipment eliminate scope of injuries
12 TESTING AREAS  HAZARDS DUE TO CHEMICALS  Scope of burns and skin damages  Proper safety precautions and protective
 EXPOSURE TO REACTION  Scope of lung disorders equipments to eliminate these hazards
FUMES / GASSES
13 ELECTRICAL  EXPOSURE TO ELECTRICAL  Burns due to electrical accidents  Proper SOPs for O & M teams will
SYSTEMS SHOCKS  Shocks due to electrical accidents eliminate scope of these hazards
 SCOPE OF FIRE DUE TO  Damages to skin due to electrical fire  Proper fire fighting scheme for electrical
ELECTRICAL SHORT CIRCUITS accidents failures eliminate these Hazards
 EXPOSURE TO BURNS DUE TO  Neurological problems due to electrical
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS shocks

7.25
 Proper design of electrical equipment
and proper isolation eliminate these
Hazards
14 NOISE RELATED  EXPOSURE TO NOISE OF  Damage to ears and neurological systems  Proper ventilation eliminates heat
HAZARDS VARIOUS EQUIPMENT  Lung disorders  Proper measure to reduce noise levels
 WORKING AT FURNACE AREAS  Skin diseases and effect to skin and keep noise levels within permissible
 Proper safety and protective equipment
15 FIRE HAZARDS  ALL HOT METAL AREAS  Scope of fire accidents and burns  Proper SOPs for O & M and good fire
AREAS  FURNACE TRANSFORMERS  Scope of damage to skin fighting scheme eliminate these Hazards
 FURNACE OPERATING FLOOR  Proper safety and protective equipments
eliminate impact of these Hazards
16 SAFETY RELATED  TOOLS AND TACKELS USED IN  Scope of mechanical related accidents  Proper SOPs for testing of toold and
AREAS HANDLING AREAS causing injuries tackles and lifting equipment and proper
 FURNACE WORKING AREAS  Exposure to dust causing dust allergy maintenance schedules eliminate the
 VEHICULAR MOVEMENT AT RM scope of these accidents and hazards
YARDS  Proper layout design eliminates
accidents due to vehicular movement in
project
17 CONTINUOUS  FATIGUE DUE TO LONG  Absentism causes long working hours and  Keeping some additional manpower in
PROCESS INDUSTRY WORKING HOURS fatigue summers eliminate fatigue
 AGE RELATED CONSTRAINTS  Incapability in some working areas beyond  Relocation / rotation of working area will
certain age limit eliminate age related constraints
18 SEASONAL RELATED  EXPOSURE TO HEAT IN  Dehydration during summers at furnace  Proper ventilation, providing additional
ISSUES SUMMERS areas manpower during summers eliminate
 FURNACE PROCESS  Excess moistures cause improper porosity the scope of impact due to these
FLUCTUATIONS DURING in the furnace causing erruptions and hazards.
MANSOON SEASON burning  Proper selection of raw materials during
 HIGH MOISTURE LEVELS IN  Chocking of charging systems and spillages mansoon, storage of raw material in
RAW MATERIALS due to excess moisture during covered sheds, maintaining proper
mansooncasuingwork load fatigue to preventive maintenance schedules and
maintenance teams

7.26
additional manpower during mansoon
eliminates these Hazards
19 Failure of APCS  Dust / Smoke  Air emission  Emergency alarm to be given to Villagers.
 Interlocking system will be provided to
APCS.
Coal Handling Plant - Dust Explosion

Coal dust when dispersed in air can explode if it gets ignition source. Crusher houses and conveyor systems are most susceptible to this
hazard. The minimum of explosive concentration of coal dust (33% volatiles) is 50 grams/m 3. Failure of dust extraction & suppression
systems may lead to abnormal conditions and may increase the concentration of coal dust upto the explosive limits. The sources of ignition
are incandescent bulbs, electric equipment & cables, friction & spontaneous combustion in accumulated dust. Dust explosion may occur at
any time without any warning with maximum explosion pressure of 6.4 bars. Another dangerous characteristic of dust explosions is that it
sets off secondary explosions after the occurrence of initial dust explosion.

7.27
Coal Handling Plant - Dust Explosion

Coal dust when dispersed in air can explode if it gets ignition source. Crusher houses and
conveyor systems are most susceptible to this hazard. The minimum of explosive concentration
of coal dust (33% volatiles) is 50 grams/m3. Failure of dust extraction & suppression systems may
lead to abnormal conditions and may increase the concentration of coal dust upto the explosive
limits. The sources of ignition are incandescent bulbs, electric equipment & cables, friction &
spontaneous combustion in accumulated dust. Dust explosion may occur at any time without any
warning with maximum explosion pressure of 6.4 bars. Another dangerous characteristic of dust
explosions is that it sets off secondary explosions after the occurrence of initial dust explosion.
Stock pile area shall be provided with automatic garden type sprinklers for dust suppression as
well as to reduce spontaneous ignition/combustion in coal stock piles. Necessary water
distribution net work will be provided for distributing water at all transfer points, crusher house,
control room, etc.
A centralized control room with microprocessor based control system has been envisaged for
operation of the coal handling plant. Except locally controlled equipment like travelling tripper,
dust extraction / dust suppression / ventilation equipment, sump pumps, water distribution
system all other equipments will have provision for local control as well.
Control Measures for Coal Storage Yard

The entire quantity of coal will be stored in separate stack piles, with proper drains around to
collect washouts during the monsoon. Water sprinkling system will be installed in and around
the stocks of pile to prevent spontaneous combustion and consequent fire hazards. The stack
geometry will be adopted to maintain minimum exposure of stock pile areas towards
predominant wind direction. Temperature will be monitored regularly to detect any abnormal
rise in temperature inside the stock pile to be enabled to control the same.
7.3.7 RISK & CONSEQUENCE ANALYSIS OF FIRE

The principle objective of this study is to identify the potential hazards, estimate the effects of
hazards to people both with in and outside the plant premises.
 Identification of possible failure cases of the facilities which might affect the population
and property within the plant boundary.

7.28
 Assessment of consequential effect on surrounding population, property etc., due to

onset of such failures.
 Suggest recommendations based on consequence analysis relevant to the situations.
7.3.7.1 METHODOLOGY
The hazards expected from this plant include the pool fire situation due to the leakage of HFO,
LDO/LSHS from the storage tanks. There will be 2 Nos. of LSO / LSHS storage tanks each of 100
m3 capacity, 1 No. of storage tank for HFO with a capacity of 25 m3. The tanks, made of Mild steel,
will be provided with dyke. The most credible failure is due to the rupture of the pipe connecting
the storage tank. The worst case can be assumed as when the entire contents leak out into the
dyke forming a pool, which may catch fire after getting source of ignition.
HFO, LDO / LSHS STORAGE TANK - POOL FIRE SCENARIO

The maximum quantity of HFO, LDO/ LSHS stored at site will be 1 x 25 m3& 2x 100 m3 capacity
respectively. In the event of oil spillage through a small leakage or due to rupture of pipeline
connecting the tank fire will follow after getting ignition source. As the tanks are provided with
dyke, the fire will be confined within the dyke. Threshold limit for first degree burns is 4.5 kw/m 2.
Based on these results it may be concluded that the vulnerable zone in which the thermal fluxes
above the threshold limit for first degree burns (4.5 kw/m2) is restricted to 32 m. The hazard
distances for various radiation intensities are shown in table 7.3.3.
Table No. 7.3.5: Hazard Distances (Four Tanks on fire - scenario)
HFO Quantity: 1 x 25 m3; LDO Quantity: 2 x 100 m3
Radiation intensity Hazard Distances
37.5 kw/m2 (100% lethality) 8m
25.0 kw/m2 (50% lethality) 17 m
12.5 kw/m2 (1% lethality) 25 m
4.5 kw/m2 (1st degree burns) 32 m
The hazard distances for Thermal radiation are confined to the plant premises only. Hence there
will not be any thermal radiation impact on outside the population due to the pool fire scenario.
The thick green belt to be developed will help to further mitigate the radiation intensity level
outside plant boundary.

7.29
7.4 DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN

7.4.1 DISASTERS
A disaster is catastrophic situation in which suddenly, people are plunged into helplessness and
suffering and as a result need protection, clothing, shelter, medical and social care and other
necessities of life.
Disasters can be divided into two main groups. The first group includes those disasters which
result from natural phenomena like earthquakes, volcanic eruptions, cyclones, tropical storms,
floods, avalanches, landslides etc. The second group includes disastrous events occasioned by
humans, or by their impact upon the environment. Examples are industrial accidents, radiation
accidents, factory fires, explosions, escape of toxic gases or chemical substances from an
industrial unit, river pollution, mining or other structural collapses; air, sea, rail and road
transport accidents. These disastrous events can reach catastrophic dimensions in terms of
human loss.
There can be no set criteria for assessing the gravity of a disaster because it depends, to a large
extent, on the physical, economic and social environment in which it occurs. What would be
considered a major disaster in developing country, equipped to cope with the problems involved,
may not mean more than temporary emergency elsewhere. However, all disasters bring in their
wake similar consequences that call for immediate action, whether at the local, national or
international level, for the rescue and relief of the victims. This includes the search for the dead
and injured, medical and social care, removal of the debris, the provision of temporary shelter
for the homeless, food, clothing and medical supplies and the rapid re-establishment of essential
services.
7.4.2 OBJECTIVES OF DISASTER MANAGEMENT OF PLAN

The disaster Management Plan is aimed to ensure safety of life, protection of environment,
protection of installation, restoration of production and salvage operations in this same order of
priorities. Effective implementation of Disaster Management Plan will be ensured by its wide
circulation among the staff and workers and training of the personnel through rehearsals.
The Disaster Management Plan would reflect the probable consequential severity of undesired
event due to deteriorating conditions or through knock on effects. Further the management
should be able to demonstrate that their assessment of the consequences uses good supporting

7.30
evidence and based on currently available and reliable information, incident data from internal
and external sources and if necessary the reports of out side agencies.
To tackle the consequences of a major emergency inside the factory or immediate vicinity of the
factory, a Plan has to be formulated and this emergency plan is called Disaster Management Plan.
The objective of the Industrial Disaster Management Plan is to make use of the combined
resources of the Plant and the outside services to achieve the following:
 Pool fire scenario due to HFO/LDO storage
 Minimize damage to the property and the environment.
 Effect the rescue and medical treatment of victims.
 Fulfill the needs of relatives.
 Provide authoritative information to news media.
 Secure the safe rehabilitation of affected areas.
 Safeguard other people.
 Initially contain and then ultimately bring the situation under the control.
 Preserve subsequent records and equipment for subsequent enquiry of the cause and
circumstances leading to emergency.
7.4.3 EMERGENCIES
7.4.3.1 GENERAL EMERGENCIES ANTICIPATED:
The emergencies that could be envisaged in the Plant are as follows:
 Pool fire scenario at HFO/LDO storage tanks.
 Contamination of food / water.
 Sabotage / social disorder.
 Structural failures.
 Slow isolated fires.
7.4.3.2 SPECIFIC EMERGENCIES ANTICIPATED

During the study of risk assessment, the probabilities of occurrence of hazards are worked out
along with the nature of damage. This is the reason why one should study risk assessment in
conjunction with DMP.

7.31
7.4.3.3 EMERGENCY ORGANISATION

It is recommended to setup an Emergency Organization. A senior executive who has control over
the affairs of the Plant would be heading the Emergency Organization. He would be designated
as Site Controller. In the case of stores, utilities, open areas which are the not under the control
of production heads, executive responsible for maintenance of utilities would be designated as
Incident Controller. All the Incident Controllers would be reporting to the Site Controller.
Each Incident Controller organizes a team responsible for controlling the incident with the
personnel under his control. Shift in-charge would be the Reporting Officer, who would report
the incident to the Incident Controller.
Emergency Coordinators would be appointed who would undertake the responsibilities like fire
fighting, rescue, rehabilitation, transport and support services. For this purposes, Security in-
charge, staff of the Personnel Department/ Essential services would be engaged. All these
personnel would be designated as key personnel.
In each shift, electrical supervisor, pump house incharge and other maintenance staff would be
drafted for emergency operations. In the event of Power communication system failure, some of
staff members in the office/ Plant offices would be drafted and their services would be utilised
as messengers for quick passing of communications. All these personnel would be declared as
essential personnel.
7.4.3.4 EMERGENCY COMMUNICATION
Whosoever notices an emergency situation such as fire, growth of fire, leakage etc. would inform
his immediate superior and Emergency Control Center. The person on duty in the Emergency
Control Centre would appraise the site controller. Site controller verifies the situation from the
Incident Controller of that area or the shift incharge and takes a decision about implementing on
Site Emergency Plan. This would be communicated to all the Incident Controllers and Emergency
Coordinators. Simultaneously, the emergency warning system would be activated on the
instructions of the Site Controller.
7.4.3.5 EMERGENCY RESPONSIBILITIES

The responsibilities of the key personnel are appended below

7.32
7.4.3.5.1 SITE CONTROLLER

On receiving information about emergency, he would rush to Emergency Control Centre (ECC)
and take the charge of ECC and the situation. He would assess the magnitude of the situation in
consultation with the incident controller and decide:
 Whether affected area needs to be evacuated.
 Whether personnel who are at assembly points need to be evacuated.
 Declares Emergency and orders for operation of emergency siren.
 Organizes announcement by public address system about location of emergency.
 Assesses the areas which are likely to be affected, and need to be evacuated or alerted.
 Maintains a continuous review of possible development and assesses the overall situation
to decide whether shutting down of any section or whole of the Plant is required.
 Directs personnel of rescue, rehabilitation, transport, fire brigade, medical and other
designated mutual support systems, locally available, for meeting emergencies.
 Controls evacuation of affected areas. If the situation is likely to go out of control or
effects are likely to go beyond the premises of the factory, informs to District Emergency
Authority, Police, and Hospital and seeks their intervention and help.
 Informs Inspector of factories, Deputy Chief Inspector of factories, SPCB and other
statutory authorities.
 Gives public statement, if necessary.
 Keeps record of chronological events and prepares an investigation report and preserves
the evidences.
After managing the emergent situation and binging the normalcy at the work place, he makes an
statement accordingly
7.4.3.5.2 INCIDENT CONTROLLER

 Assembles the incident control team.
 Directs operations within the affected areas with the priorities for safety to personnel,
minimizes damage to the plant, property and environment and minimizes the loss of
materials.
 Directs the shutting down and evacuation of Plant and areas likely to be adversely
affected by the emergency.
 Ensures that all-key personnel help is sought.

7.33
 Provides advice and information to the Fire and Security officer and the local Fire Services
as and when they arrive.
 Ensures that all non-essential workers / staff of the effected areas evacuated to the
appropriate assembly points and the areas are searched for victims, if any
 Understands the need for preservation of evidence so as to facilitate any enquiry into the
cause and circumstances, which resulted or escalated the emergency.
 Coordinates with emergency services at the site.
 Provides tools and safety equipments to the team members.
 Keeps in touch with the team and advise them regarding the method of control to be
used.
 Keeps the Site Controller informed continuously about the progress being made?
7.4.3.5.3 EMERGENCY COORDINATOR - RESCUE, FIRE FIGHTING

 Rushes to Emergency Control Centre after knowing about the emergency.
 Helps the Incident Controller in containment of the emergency.
 Ensures fire pumps in operating conditions and instructs pump house operator to be
ready for any emergency.
 Guides the fire fighting crew i.e. Firemen, trained Plant personnel and security staff.
 Organizes shifting the fire fighting facilities to the emergency site, if required.
 Takes guidance of the Incident Controller for fire fighting as well as assesses the
requirements of outside help.
 Arranges the traffic control at the gate and the incident area.
 Directs the security staff to the incident site to take part in the emergency operations
under his guidance and supervision.
 Evacuates the people in the Plant or in the near by areas as advised by site controller.
 Searches for any casualties and arranges proper aid for them.
 Assembles search and evacuation team.
 Decides paths for the workers evacuating the site
 Maintains law and order in the area, and if necessary seeks the help of police and local
administration.
 Arranges safety tools/equipments for the members of his team.

7.34
7.4.3.5.4 EMERGENCY COORDINATOR - MEDICAL, MUTUAL AID, REHABILITATION, TRANSPORT AND

COMMUNICATION
 The event of failure of electric supply and there by internal telephone, sets up
communication point and establishes contact with the Emergency Control Center (ECC)
in the event of failure of electric supply and communication network.
 Organizes medical treatment to the injured and if necessary, will shift them to nearby
hospitals.
 Mobilizes extra medical help from outside, if necessary
 Keeps a list of qualified first aid providers of the factory and seek their assistance.
 Maintains first aid and medical emergency requirements.
 Makes sure that all safety equipments are made available to the emergency team.
 Assists Site Controller with necessary data and coordinates the emergency activities.
 Assists Site Controller in updating emergency plan.
 Maintains liaison with Civil Administration.
 Ensures availability of canteen facilities and maintenance of rehabilitation centre.
 Remains in liaison with Site Controller / Incident Controller.
 Ensures availability of necessary cash for rescue / rehabilitation and emergency
expenditure.
 Controls rehabilitation of affected areas at the end of emergency.
 Makes available diesel/petrol for transport vehicles engaged in emergency operation.
7.4.3.5.5 EMERGENCY COORDINATOR – ESSENTIAL SERVICES

He would assist Site Controller and Incident Controller
 Maintains essential services like Diesel Generator, Water, Fire Water, Compressed Air /
Instrument Air, Power Supply for lighting.
 Plans alternate facilities in the event of Power failure, to maintain essential services such
as lighting, etc.
 Organizes separate electrical connections for all utilities and during emergency ensures
that the essential services and utilities are not affected.
 Gives necessary instructions regarding emergency electrical supply, isolation of certain
sections etc to shift incharges and electricians.

7.35
 Ensures availability of adequate quantities of protective equipments and other

emergency materials, spares etc.
7.4.3.5.6 GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES OF EMPLOYEES DURING AN EMERGENCY

When an emergency warning is raised, the workers, if they are incharge of any process
equipment, should adopt safe and emergency shut down and attend any prescribed duty as an
essential employee. If no such responsibility has been assigned, he should adopt a safe course to
assembly point and await instructions. He should not resort to spread panic. On the other hand,
he must assist emergency personnel towards objectives of DMP.
7.4.3.6. EMERGENCY FACILITIES

7.4.3.6.1 EMERGENCY CONTROL CENTRE
During the emergency, the office block would function as Emergency Control Centre. It would
have external Telephone & Fax facility. All the Incident Controllers, Officers, senior personnel
would be available there.
The following information and equipments will be provided at the ECC.
 Intercom, telephone
 Fire suit / gas tight goggles / gloves / helmets
 Factory layout, emergency site plan
 Emergency lamp / torchlight
 Plan indicating locations of hazardous inventories, Plant control room, sources of
safety equipment, work road plan, assembly points, rescue locations, vulnerable
zones, escape routes.
 Hazard chart
 Self-contained breathing apparatus
 Hand tools, wind direction, wind velocity indications
 Public Address Megaphone, Hand bell, Telephone directories (Internal and P&T).
 Address with telephone numbers of key personnel, Emergency coordinator.
 Important addresses, telephone numbers of experts from outside, government
agencies, neighboring industries etc.
 Emergency shut down procedures.
 Nominal roll of employees.

7.36
7.4.3.6.2 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY

Plant facilities would be connected to Diesel Generator and would be placed in auto mode.
7.4.3.6.3 FIRE FIGHTING FACILITIES

First Aid and Fire Fighting equipment suitable for emergency should be maintained as per
statutory requirements/ TAC Regulations. Fire hydrant line covering major areas would be laid. It
would be maintained at 6 kg / sq.cm. pressure.
7.4.3.6.4 LOCATION OF WIND SOCK

On the top of production block and on the top of administrative block wind socks would be
installed to indicate direction of wind during emergency period.
7.4.3.6.5 EMERGENCY MEDICAL FACILITIES

Gas masks and general first aid materials for dealing with chemical burns, fire burns etc. would
be maintained in the medical centre as well as in the emergency control room. Private medical
practitioners help would be sought. Government hospital would be approached for emergency
help.
Apart from Plant first aid facilities, external facilities would be augmented. Names of Medical
Personnel, Medical facilities in Bhatapara (11.6 Kms.) & Baloda Bazar (25 Kms.) towns would be
prepared and updated. Necessary specific medicines for emergency treatment of burnt patients
and for those affected by toxicity would be maintained.
Breathing apparatus and other emergency medical equipment would be provided and
maintained. The help of near by industrial managements in this regard would also be taken on
mutual support basis.
7.4.3.7 EMERGENCY ACTIONS

7.4.3.7.1 EMERGENCY WARNING
Communication of emergency would be made familiar to the personnel inside the plant and
people outside. An emergency warning system would be established.

7.37
7.4.3.7.2 EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN

There are number of facilities which can be provided to help in dealing with hazardous conditions.
The suggested arrangements are
 Stop feed
 Deluge contents
 Remove heat
 Transfer contents
Methods of removing additional heat include removal by the normal cooling arrangements or by
the use of an emergency cooling system. Cooling facilities which vaporizes liquid may be
particularly effective, since a big increase in vaporization can be obtained by reducing pressure.
7.4.3.7.3 EVACUATION OF PERSONNEL

The area would have adequate number of exits and staircases. In the event of an emergency,
unrelated personnel have to escape to assembly point. Operators have to take emergency
shutdown procedure and escape. Time office maintains a copy of deployment of employees in
each shift at Emergency Communication Centre. If necessary, persons can be evacuated by rescue
teams.
7.4.3.7.4 ALL CLEAR SIGNAL

At the end of emergency, after discussing with Incident Controllers and Emergency Coordinators,
the site controller orders an all clear signal.
7.5 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SURVEILLANCE [Gen. TOR # 8 (i) & 8 (ii)]
Large industries where multifarious activities are involved during construction, erection, testing,
commissioning, operation and maintenance, the men, materials and machines are the basic
inputs. Along with the booms, the industrialization generally brings several problems related with
health and safety of the workmen.
7.5.1 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH

Occupational health needs attention both during construction and operation phases. However,
the problem varies both in magnitude and variety in the above phases.

7.38
7.5.2 CONSTRUCTION & ERECTION

The occupational health problems envisaged at this stage can mainly be due to constructional
activities and noise.
To overcome these hazards, in addition to arrangements required to reduce it within TLV'S,
personnel protective equipments should also be supplied to workers.
7.5.3 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

The working personnel would be given the following appropriate personnel protective
equipments.
 Industrial Safety helmets
 Crash helmets
 Face shield with replacement acrylic vision
 Zero power plain goggles with cut type filters on both ends
 Zero power goggles with cut type filters on both sides and blue colour glasses
 Welders equipment for eye and face protection
 Cylindrical type earplug
 Ear plugs
 Canister gas masks
 Self contained breathing apparatus
 Leather apron
 Boiler suit
 Safety belt / line man's safety belt
 Leather hand gloves
 Asbestos hand gloves
 Canvas cum leather hand gloves with leather palm
 Industrial safety shoes with steel toe
 Electrical safety shoes without steel toe and gum boots
7.5.4 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH HAZARDS

Anticipated Occupational & Safety Hazards
 Heat Stress & Stroke
 Dehydration

7.39
 Skin disorders
 Dust Exposure
 Metallic dust exposure
 Noise
 Illumination
 Burns and shocks due electricity
The health of workers can be protected by adopting the following measures:

 Relaxation facilities to workers in working in furnace are in separate rooms with good
ventilation & air circulation. This will help in relieving of thermal stress.
 Good Housekeeping practices
 Good ventilation & exhaust system
 Enforcement of usage of Personal Protective Devices.
 Rotation of employees in specific areas to avoid continuous exposure.
 Earplugs will be provided to employees working in noise prone areas such as STG,
 Periodic monitoring of noise levels Fugitive emissions, emissions from stack, dust
suppression system, etc.
Frequency of Periodical Examination:

For employees once in a year
Personal Protective Devices and Measures

 Industrial Safety helmets
 Fall arrestor
 Safety nets (for fall protection)
 Crash helmets
 Face shield with replacement acrylic vision
 Safety goggles
 Welders equipment for eye and face protection
 Ear plugs
 Canister gas masks
 Welding face shield
 Welding hand sleeve

7.40
 Self contained breathing apparatus

 Leather apron
 Safety belt / line man's safety belt
 Leather hand gloves
 Asbestos hand gloves
 Industrial safety shoes with steel toe
 Electrical safety shoes without steel toe and gum boots
 Protective clothing etc.
Plan of pre-placement and periodical health status of workers:

Pre-employment check up will be made mandatory and following test will be conducted:
 Plan of evaluation of health of workers
 Chest x rays
 Audiometry
 Spirometry
 Vision testing (Far & Near vision, color vision and any other ocular defect)
 ECG
 Haemogram (examination of the blood)
 Urine (Routine and Microscopic)
 Complete physical examination
 Musculo-skeletal disorders (MSD)
 Backache
 Pain in minor and major joints
 Fatigue, etc.
 Medical records of each employee is maintained separately and updated as per
finding during monitoring. Age, sex wise, department wise data on the above
parameters is maintained.
 Medical records of the employee at the end of his / her term are will be updated.
List of equipment for Occupational Health Monitoring

 ECG
 Analytical Pan Balance
 Dust Sampling devices
7.41
 Heat stress monitoring device (Personal)

 Spectrophotometer
 Noise Monitoring device (dosimeter)
 Spiro meter
 Audiometric device
 Vision screener
Budget for DMP and OHS [Gen. TOR # 8 (iv)]

 Capital cost of Rs. 1.0 Crore & Recurring cost of Rs. 30 lakhs per annum will be allocated on
Occupational health & Safety of the employees in the proposed project.
 Occupational health checkup will be outsourced by third party. However, a Primary Health
Centre (PHC) with ambulance facility will be provided within the plant, with an investment of
Rs. 30.0 Lakhs.
 Firefighting system will be provided all through the plant with an investment of Rs.2.0 Crores.
7.6 SAFETY PLAN

Safety of both men and materials during construction and operation phases is of great concern.
The preparedness of an industry for the occurrence of possible disasters is known as emergency
plan. The disaster in Project is possible due to collapse of structures and fire / explosion etc. The
details of fire fighting equipments to be installed are given below:
 Carbon dioxide type
 Foam type
 DCP type
 Soda acid type
 Fire buckets
 Fire hydrants
Keeping in view the safety requirement during construction, operation and maintenance phases,
Real Ispat & Power Limited has formulated safety policy with the following regulations:
 To take steps to ensure that all known safety factors are taken into account in the design,
construction, operation and maintenance of Plants, machinery and equipment.
 To allocate sufficient resources to maintain safe and healthy conditions of work.
 To ensure that adequate safety instructions are given to all employees.

7.42
 To provide where ever necessary protective equipment, safety appliances and clothing
and to ensure their proper use.
 To inform employees about materials, equipments or processes used in their work which
are known to be potentially hazardous to health and safety.
 To keep all operations and methods of work under regular review for making necessary
changes from the safety point of view in the light of experience and up to date knowledge.
 To provide appropriate facilities for first aid and prompt treatment of injuries and illness
at work.
 To provide appropriate instructions, training and supervision to employee’s health and
safety, first aid and to ensure that adequate publicity is given to these matters.
 To ensure proper implementation of fire preventive methods and an appropriate fire
fighting service along with training facilities for personnel involved in this service.
 To publish / notify regulations, instructions and notices in the common language of
employees.
 To prepare separate safety rules for each type of process involved.
 To ensure regular safety inspection by a competent person at suitable intervals of all
buildings, equipments, work places and operations.
7.6.1 SAFETY ORGANISATION

7.6.1.1 CONSTRUCTION AND ERECTION PHASE
A highly qualified and experienced safety officer will be appointed. The responsibilities of the
safety officer include identification of the hazardous conditions and unsafe acts of workers and
advice on corrective actions, conduct safety audit, organize training programmes and provide
professional expert advice on various issues related to occupational safety and health. In addition
to employment of safety officer, every contractor, whose employees will be more than 250,
would also be asked to employ one safety officer to ensure safety of the workers in accordance
with the conditions of the contract.
7.6.1.2 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE PHASE

After the completion of construction, the posting of safety officer would be in accordance with
the requirements of Factories Act and he will be assigned the duties and responsibilities
accordingly.

7.43
7.6.1.3 SAFETY CIRCLE

In order to fully develop the capabilities of the employees in identification of hazardous processes
and improving safety and health, safety circles would be constituted in each area of work. The
circle would consist of 5-6 employees from that area. The circle would normally meet for about
an hour every week.
7.6.2 SAFETY TRAINING

A full fledged training centre will be established at Real Ispat & Power Limited Safety training will
be provided by the safety officers with the assistance of faculty members called from professional
safety institutions and universities. In addition to regular employees, limited contractor labours
will also given safety training. To create safety awareness safety films will be shown to workers
and leaflets etc. will be distributed.
7.6.3 HEALTH AND SAFETY MONITORING PLAN

All the potential occupational hazardous work places will be monitored regularly. The health of
employees working in these areas will be monitored once in a year
7.7 SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT STUDY [Gen. TOR # 6 (xi)]

In view of the fact that the development is an ever growing process, its impact is also ever
increasing, leading to rapid deterioration in environmental conditional and human health. Impact
assessment thus ensures that the potential problems are foreseen and addressed at an early
stage in the projects plant and design. Environment Impact Assessment (EIA) & Social Impact
Assessment provides a rational approach to sustainable development.
Social Impact Assessment includes the processes of analysing, monitoring and managing the
intended and unintended social consequences, both positive and negative, of planned
interventions (policies, programs, plans, and developmental activities) on individual, social
groups and community at large and any social change processes invoked by those interventions.
7.7.1 LEGISLATIVE & REGULATORY CONSIDERATIONS

According to the Gen. TOR point no. 6 (xi), in the TOR letter issued by MOEF&CC New Delhi Vide
No. Vide No. J-11011/411/2019-IA II (I) dated 20th January 2020.

7.44
‘’The project proponent should carry out Social Impact Assessment of the project as per the Office
Memorandum No. J-11013/25/2014-IA.I dated 11.08.2014 issued by the Ministry regarding
guidelines on Environment Sustainability and CSR issues. The Social Impact assessment study so
carried should form part of EIA and EMP report’’
Towards the fulfilment of the above TOR, Functional Area Expert and his team has prepared the
Social Impact Assessment report.
7.7.2 OBJECTIVE
The primary objectives of the Social Impact Assessment study are:
 Understanding the baseline socio-economic environment obtaining in the impact zone.
 Identifying the key stakeholders who are likely to be impacted by the establishment of
 Predicting the positive and negative impacts of the project on the socio-economic
environment in the area.
 Suggesting mitigation measures to minimize the negative impacts.
7.7.3 SCOPE
In keeping with its objectives, the scope of the study extends to:
 Making a reconnaissance of the villages and human settlements within the 10 km radius
from the proposed project site.
 Understanding the overall socio-economic profile of the impact area.
 Assessing the baseline socio-economic environment prevailing in the impact area focusing
the core and buffer zones.
 Identifying key economic sectors and major sources of livelihood in the study area.
 Understanding social structures and lifestyles of people in the area who are likely to be
affected the most by the proposed project.
 Assessing physical and social infrastructure facilities accessible to inhabitants in the
project impact area.
 Predicting the likely socio-economic impacts as a consequence of establishing the project.
 Suggesting adverse impact mitigation measures in line with the felt needs, aspirations and
expectations of the project affected population.
 Preparing an appropriate Socio Economic Environment Management Plan.
7.45
7.7.4 APPROACH & METHODOLOGY

The basic approach for carrying out the SIA is focused on:
 Zeroing-in on the project impact area, covering all the villages and other habitations falling
within the 10 km radius from the project site.
 Collecting basic information with respect to constituent villages in terms of census village
code, name of the Tehsil in which a particular village falls, number of households,
population level (as per Census 2011) and growth of village population during the last
decade, distance from the proposed project site etc.
 Identifying critical knowledge/information gaps which impede an objective and reliable
assessment of the socio-economic impacts of the project.
 Zeroing-in on the data/information to be collected for a fair impact assessment and
deciding upon the sources and means to collecting the same.
 Identifying the key stakeholders and potential respondents for collecting the required
information.
 Drawing a sampling frame and sample size specifying villages and number of households
to be contacted for primary data/information collection and agencies to be contacted for
eliciting information on various aspects relevant to the study.
 Assessing the views raised in the Public Hearing and developing a plan (consisting of Cost,
Budget, Monitoring and Evaluation) to implement the needs of people as per Public
hearing outcome.
Methodology
 The Social Impact Assessment (SIA) of the proposed project is relied on a judicious mix of
Secondary (i.e. Census 2011, Govt. Dept., Maps and Literature Research) and Primary data
(i.e. Field survey and Interview / Interactions) collected from different sources.
 Various socio-economic aspects considered for impact assessment include livelihoods,
relocation and rehabilitation, incomes, employment, skills, education, health and overall
lifestyles. The cultural aspects considered are archaeological, historical, religious and
aesthetic places of importance, arts and crafts etc.
 The SIA was carried out in the three distinct stage:
i. Desktop review / research
ii. Field Survey
iii. Data Analysis & its interpretation
7.46
7.7.5 STUDY AREA

The coverage of study extends to all the 51 Census villages and towns falling within the 10 km.
radius, from the proposed project site, as mandated by Standard ToR of MoEF&CC. The study
area is 348 Sq. Km. The land utilisation pattern of the study area shows the dominance of single
crop land accounting for 72.4 %. The land under human settlement covers an area of 13.572 Sq.
Km. , which is mere 3.9 % of the total area. The detailed land use pattern of the study area is
given below:
Figure 3.8 : Pie Diagram Showing Breakup Of LULC of the Study Area
7.7.6 PROJECT IMPACT ZONES

The geographical area for impact assessment extends over 10 Kms. Radius from the project site
and comprises of 51 census Villages and towns. To facilitate a more realistic and objective
assessment, the 51 villages / towns are categorized into three zones:
 Core zone (within 0 _ 2 Kms.) Radial distance from the project site)
 Buffer zone (> 2 – 5 Kms.)
 Transition zone (> 5 – 10 Kms.)

7.47
Table No. 7.7.1:Key Demographic Features Of The Villages / Towns In The 3 Impact Zones
Distanc Population
e from Direction
Total
Project from
S.No. Village Name Househ Avg.
Site Project Total Male Female SC ST
olds Lit (%)
(In site
Kms.)
Villages within 0 - 2 Kms distance from the project site
1 Bakulahi 0.4 S 83 443 219 224 0 443 57.3%
2 Dhaurabhata 0.8 WNW 185 870 439 431 42 142 65.9%
3 Bharatpur 1.8 NNE 274 1299 647 652 831 276 60.6%
4 Kosmanda 1.8 SSW 432 1782 899 883 112 192 58.3%
Sub Total : I 974 4394 2204 2190 985 1053 60.5%
5 Semhradih 2.5 NW 287 1366 675 691 60 551 60.9%
6 Mopki 2.8 NE 270 1399 690 709 307 697 59.2%
7 Mopka 2.9 ESE 693 3510 1731 1779 611 392 56.2%
8 Nipaniya 3 N 431 2166 1104 1062 232 553 65.0%
9 Bendri 3 SSE 154 764 368 396 0 455 58.4%
10 Akaltara 3.2 SW 391 1951 975 976 709 659 58.7%
11 Achanakpur 3.8 SSW 67 337 178 159 1 246 58.5%
12 Bhothidih 4 NE 239 1214 596 618 8 445 64.0%
13 Gudeliya 4 ESE 249 1232 603 629 2 740 57.1%
14 Dhaneli 4.5 ENE 417 1953 942 1011 54 514 57.5%
15 Chandli 4.8 NE 81 439 210 229 5 286 55.6%
Sub Total : II 3279 16331 8072 8259 1989 5538 59.2%
16 Lewai 5 W 356 1725 861 864 279 493 61.2%
17 Singarpur 5 NW 806 3722 1892 1830 666 187 57.1%
18 Patan 5.2 E 321 1453 710 743 327 267 54.4%
19 Dhurrabandha 5.3 SSW 381 1908 965 943 230 409 49.6%
20 Khapri 5.5 NE 298 1374 657 717 9 461 61.5%
21 Khairi 5.6 SE 148 744 366 378 0 423 56.5%
22 Kodwa 5.8 N 499 2915 1453 1462 195 47 45.9%
23 Kalmidih 5.8 WSW 112 484 240 244 433 0 55.4%
24 Kukda 5.8 SSE 215 1188 606 582 447 260 50.0%
25 Bagbudwa 6.2 N 80 460 246 214 100 222 62.2%
26 Kadar 6.4 W 539 2656 1323 1333 368 408 55.2%
27 Mendra 6.5 NW 92 458 225 233 0 101 54.8%
28 Godhi 6.8 NW 307 1685 854 831 301 173 58.0%
29 Silwa 6.8 NE 189 972 474 498 0 542 53.0%
30 Borsi 7 SE 148 897 451 446 522 87 53.2%
31 Borsi 7 SE 340 1691 835 856 40 271 52.7%
32 Koni 7 N 279 1607 794 813 257 14 49.2%
33 Pathariya 7 ENE 143 739 361 378 0 537 55.6%
34 Chamarguda 7.2 ENE 137 867 423 444 362 218 52.2%
35 Tehka 7.2 WSW 321 1636 807 829 99 673 64.6%
7.48
Distanc Population
e from Direction
Total
Project from
S.No. Village Name Househ Avg.
Site Project Total Male Female SC ST
olds Lit (%)
(In site
Kms.)
36 Chichpol 7.3 ESE 273 1530 755 775 31 50.4%
684
37 Lamti 7.7 NW 142 805 405 400 12 55.5%
211
38 Amlidih 7.9 W 214 1037 507 530 191 55.0%
363
39 Kotmi 8 WNW 170 914 457 457 45 57.4%
293
40 Madhuban 8 WSW 156 761 380 381 11 46.5%
546
41 Datrenga 8.2 WSW 183 1037 536 501 94 58.9%
54
42 Khaira 8.2 ESE 427 2158 1054 1104 0 51.4%
594
43 Kanjee 8.2 NW 387 1974 998 976 423 59.0%
0
44 Datrengi 8.6 W 575 2877 1483 1394 553 56.3%
23
45 Akoli 8.8 WNW 188 993 511 482 0 55.3%
229
46 Paraswani 8.8 WNW 351 1501 760 741 1262 60.8%
0
47 Bitkuli 9 E 425 2036 1031 1005 361 53.3%
928
48 Kumharkhan 9.4 WNW 132 642 330 312 135 43.3%
115
49 Rajpur 9.8 E 11 53 25 28 0 47.2%
0
50 Rajpur 9.8 E 193 981 484 497 630 53.0%
19
51 Surajpura 9.9 WSW 346 1752 861 891 21 56.3%
153
Sub Total : III 9884 50232 25120 25112 8404 10005 54.5%
Total 14137 70957 35396 35561 11378 16596 58.1%
It is obvious from the above data that only 4 no. of villages fall in core impact zone, accounting
for just 6.19 % of the total population in the study area. 11 no. of villages accounting for 23.02 %
of the total population fall in buffer impact zone, while 36 no. of villages accounting for 70.79 %
of the total population fall in transition zone.
Given the nature of the project, its socio-economic impacts will be more pronounced on the
people inhabiting the core and buffer impact zones rather than on the transition zone. Hence the
study focus was more on the socio-economic conditions obtaining among the households in the
core and buffer zones.
7.7.7 BASELINE DATA AND ANALYSIS OF SURVEYED VILLAGES

7.7.7.1 DESKTOP REVIEW / RESEARCH
A fairly comprehensive desk research to understand the socio-economic setting of the project
area was the first initiative towards carrying out SIA. Accordingly, published and unpublished

7.49
information available on the subject was referred, reviewed and critical information gaps
identified by the SIA team.
It was during this stage, the key stakeholders were identified and study instruments – schedules
and checklists – prepared, tested and finalised. Similarly, the sampling frame and sample size
were also designed and finalised. The sampling frame for the study consisted of villages,
households and District and Tehsil level officials, key informants as also local opinion leaders.
A proportional random sampling technique was followed to select the sample village’s and
households. Accordingly, the sample villages were picked up at random from the three impact
zones considered – Core, Buffer and Transition. The number of households to be contacted in
each sample village was determined on the basis of the size of population of the respective
village. In the absence of household level information, the respondent households were selected
randomly during the course of visit to the respective village. However, while selecting the
respondent households, emphasis was on contacting households, who are economically poor,
susceptible to shifts in livelihood patterns and belonged to vulnerable social communities.
To ensure the accuracy of the primary data collected from the study area, all the village specific
information was verified from the data of Census 2011 and secondary information collected from
various Govt. Dept., Map, Literature etc.
Accordingly following 14 no. of villages have been selected:

1 Dhaurabhata
2 Dhaneli
3 Bharatpur
4 Bakulahi
5 Kadar
6 Kosmanda
7 Kodwa
8 Khapri
9 Lewai
10 Mopka
11 Mendra
12 Nipaniya
13 Singarpur
14 Surajpura

7.50
7.7.7.2 FIELD SURVEY

Field survey helped in collecting fairly reliable primary data with respect to the major livelihood
sources, education, health status, basic amenities and standard of living. It also helped in eliciting
information from the natives about the negative environmental impacts of industrial units
already existing in the area and the measures initiated by them (industrial units) to mitigate the
impacts.
The potential respondents in the sample households were approached personally by members
of the core study team and Field Investigators who explained the purpose of the visit and solicited
their participation by sharing the intended information unbiasedly. The study team clarified the
doubts and addressed the apprehensions expressed by the respondents. Once the respondents
were willing and ready to participate, household level socio-economic information was collected
with the help of a structured questionnaire. A number of questions were open ended to facilitate
capturing perceptions of the respondents objectively.
In addition, Participatory Rapid Assessment (PRA) tools comprising Villages / Town Transect
Walks, Focus Group Discussions (FGD), Key Informant Interviews and Local Opinion Leader
interviews were used for collecting qualitative information with regards to key socio-economic
challenges of the area.
7.7.7.3 DATA ANALYSIS & ITS INTERPRETATION
As per analysis of primary data & secondary data the distribution of population varies from place
to place. In the study area, Singarpur & Mopka are densely populated areas. Avg. Literacy rate in
surveyed villages is 58 %. The Avg. sex ratio of surveyed villages is 1015. Total household
population come out to be 26625. Average household size is 4.8. The percentage of Male
population is 49.8% and Female population is 50.2% i.e. no major difference lies between Male
and Female count.
TABLE NO. 7.7.2: DEMOGRAPHY OF THE SURVEYED VILLAGES
Population
Total Avg.
S.No. Village Name Sex
Households Total Male Female SC ST Literacy
Ratio
(%)
1 Dhaurabhata 185 870 439 431 42 142 66% 982
2 Dhaneli 417 1953 942 1011 54 514 57% 1073
3 Bharatpur 274 1299 647 652 831 276 61% 1008
4 Bakulahi 83 443 219 224 0 443 57% 1023

7.51
5 Kadar 539 2656 1323 1333 368 408 55% 1008

6 Kosmanda 432 1782 899 883 112 192 58% 982
7 Kodwa 499 2915 1453 1462 195 47 46% 1006
8 Khapri 298 1374 657 717 9 461 61% 1091
9 Lewai 356 1725 861 864 279 493 61% 1003
10 Mopka 693 3510 1731 1779 611 392 56% 1028
11 Mendra (Medra) 92 458 225 233 0 101 55% 1036
12 Nipaniya 431 2166 1104 1062 232 553 65% 962
13 Singarpur 806 3722 1892 1830 666 187 57% 967
14 Surajpura 346 1752 861 891 21 153 56% 1035
Total 5451 26625 13253 13372 3420 4362 58% 1015
Population Distribution
% of Male & Female Population in Surveyed

Villages
VULNERABLE GROUP
There are particular groups who, for various reasons, are weak and vulnerable or have
traditionally been victims of violations and consequently require special protection for the equal
and effective enjoyment of their human rights. Such groups fall into reserve category and the
Company has to take special measures to uplift the social strata in this section. The surveyed
villages have very less count of Schedule Caste and Schedule Tribe fraction is comparatively high
i.e.16%. The category falling in unreserved category shows the major occupancy in the area i.e.71
% of the total population.

7.52
TABLE NO. 7.7.3: DEMOGRAPHY OF VULNERABLE GROUPS

S.No. Village Name Population
Total SC ST Others
1 Dhaurabhata 870 42 142 686
2 Dhaneli 1953 54 514 1385
3 Bharatpur 1299 831 276 192
4 Bakulahi 443 0 443 0
5 Kadar 2656 368 408 1880
6 Kosmanda 1782 112 192 1478
7 Kodwa 2915 195 47 2673
8 Khapri 1374 9 461 904
9 Lewai 1725 279 493 953
10 Mopka 3510 611 392 2507
11 Mendra (Medra) 458 0 101 357
12 Nipaniya 2166 232 553 1381
13 Singarpur 3722 666 187 2869
14 Surajpura 1752 21 153 1578
Total 26625 3420 4362 18843
LITERACY LEVEL
Literacy denotes progress of a nation as a whole. The “multiplier effect” of literacy empowers
people, enables them to participate fully in society and contributes to enables greater
participation in the labour market; improved child and family health and nutrition; reduces
poverty and expands life opportunities. In the surveyed villages male literacy is greater than
female literacy rate. The Company will make efforts in order to fill the lacunae and indirectly
contribute to the progress of the nation. As per the survey, the literacy rate (58 %) is normal in
the surveyed villages there is still some awareness is required in terms of education & education
facilities are to be improved further. From the survey it is clear that the literacy rate of female
(41.6%) is lower as compared to male population (58.4 %). Male and female literacy rate of
7.53
villages vary from place to place. On whole, female literacy level has to be enhanced to provide
a balance in the society and pace towards economic progress of the area.
TABLE NO. 7.7.4: LITERACY RATE IN THE SURVEYED VILLAGES

Total Literac
Male Male Female
S.No Total Literate y Female
Name of Vilage Literac Literacy Literacy
. Pop. Populatio Rate Literacy
y Rate rate
n (%)
1 Dhaurabhata 870 573 65.9% 314 54.8% 259 45.2%
2 Dhaneli 1953 1122 57.5% 664 59.2% 458 40.8%
3 Bharatpur 1299 787 60.6% 451 57.3% 336 42.7%
4 Bakulahi 443 254 57.3% 152 59.8% 102 40.2%
5 Kadar 2656 1465 55.2% 838 57.2% 627 42.8%
6 Kosmanda 1782 1039 58.3% 621 59.8% 418 40.2%
7 Kodwa 2915 1337 45.9% 790 59.1% 547 40.9%
8 Khapri 1374 845 61.5% 483 57.2% 362 42.8%
9 Lewai 1725 1056 61.2% 619 58.6% 437 41.4%
10 Mopka 3510 1974 56.2% 1161 58.8% 813 41.2%
11 Mendra 458 251 54.8% 154 61.4% 97 38.6%
12 Nipaniya 2166 1408 65.0% 825 58.6% 583 41.4%
13 Singarpur 3722 2124 57.1% 1268 59.7% 856 40.3%
14 Surajpura 1752 986 56.3% 549 55.7% 437 44.3%
Total / Average 26625 15221 58.0% 8889 58.4% 6332 41.6%
Economic Activities
The economy of an area is defined by the occupational pattern and income level of the people in
the area. The occupational structure of residents in the study area is studied with reference to

7.54
work category. The population is divided occupation wise into three categories, viz., main
workers, marginal workers and non-workers. The workers include cultivators, agricultural
labourers, those engaged in household industry and other services. While the marginal workers
are those workers, engaged in some work for a period of less than 200 days during the reference
year. The non-workers include those engaged in unpaid household duties, students, retired
persons, dependents, beggars, vagrants etc. besides institutional inmates or all other non-
workers who do not fall under the above categories.
The percentage of total working population and non-working population is 47 % & 53 %
respectively in the study area.
TABLE NO. 7.7.5: WORK FORCE OF THE SURVEYED VILLAGES

Total Total Main Marginal Non
S.No. Name of Villages
Pop. Workers Workers Worker Workers
1 Dhaurabhata 870 336 300 36 534
2 Dhaneli 1953 1002 503 499 951
3 Bharatpur 1299 644 18 626 655
4 Bakulahi 443 203 202 1 240
5 Kadar 2656 1410 925 485 1246
6 Kosmanda 1782 812 759 53 970
7 Kodwa 2915 1039 920 119 1876
8 Khapri 1374 704 487 217 670
9 Lewai 1725 886 830 56 839
10 Mopka 3510 1667 1272 395 1843
11 Mendra (Medra) 458 241 223 18 217
12 Nipaniya 2166 910 483 427 1256
13 Singarpur 3722 1855 670 1185 1867
14 Surajpura 1752 755 503 252 997
Total 26625 12464 8095 4369 14161

7.55
It is evident from the above on the basis of information obtained from surveyed villages that the
percentage of total working population is low and dependent population is high. This indicator
shows that the economic conditions in the area are not good.
They require livelihood opportunities to upgrade their economic status and fulfil basic needs. Due
to the implementation of proposed project of Real Ispat & Power Ltd. will certainly have some
direct / indirect employment to the local people based on the qualification and will also provide
training opportunity for self-employment generation.
7.7.8 SOCIO ECONOMIC STATUS BASED ON FIELD OBSERVATION

EDUCATION:
Observations
 The Primary & Secondary data reveals that literacy levels in all the villages is varying from
43.3 to 65.9 %.
 Most of the students in Villages in the study area are going to Bilaspur town for their studies,
which is about 50 Kms. from the plant.
 School facility exists in the study area, however school are not having proper infrastructure
facilities.
 College facility is available in Bilaspur & Raipur.
Suggestions:
 Industries should come forward & need to provide the infrastructure facilities by providing
School Benches & if possible, Library at least in High schools under Social Economic
development program.
 Industry requires manpower and that comes from education institutions, therefore it should
get more and more involved in the process of education.
 Industries should support the education system by giving Scholarships to the merit students
at least in High School range.
 Industries should support the education system by paying better Monthly salaries to the
School Teachers under Social Economic development activities which ultimately will help in
increase in strength of School teachers.

7.56
Health & Sanitation:

Observations
 The Primary & secondary data reveals that there are only 2 no. of Hospitals, 2 nos. of Sub
Health Centers & 2 nos. of PHC’s in the Study area.
 During FGD villagers made various issues in health care facilities, such as health facilities
available at PHCs, Laboratory testing and Delivery facilities at Government Health Centers,
availability of clean toilet and drinking water at PHCs, and distance of the nearest health
center from the Village.
 To control the spread of diseases (Malaria & Dengue cases) and reduce the growing rates of
mortality due to lack of adequate health facilities, special attention needs to be given to the
health care in rural areas. The key challenges in the healthcare sector are low quality of care,
poor accountability, lack of awareness, and limited access to facilities.
Suggestions:
 Various organizations such as NGOs also need to come together for improvements in health
care and technology plays a crucial role to facilitate this. Information and communications
Technology provide hosts of solutions for successful implementation of these changes.
 Industries should provide the sanitation facilities in all the PHCs in phased manner. Indirectly
this will benefit the Industry & the management also.
 Industries should conduct regular Medical camps & Health camps once in Month.
 Industries in consultation with State Govt. should contribute to develop proper drainage
facilities and avoid water logging to prevent waterborne diseases.
 Awareness programs shall be conducted in all the villages about the adverse effects on the
growth of Children.
 24-hour Ambulance facility shall be provided by the Project Proponent to the villagers on
demand during emergency.
DRINKING WATER, SANITATION & INFRASTRUCTURE:

Observations
 It was observed that only 44 villages have Pucca Road facilities. It means nearly 86 % of the
villages have road facility. However, village road got damaged.

7.57
 It is observed that the source of water for Drinking & Agriculture in most of the Villages is
groundwater. And the remaining villages which are proximate to the River use that as source
of drinking water & for Agriculture.
 It was observed that most of the Houses in the villages are not having sanitation facilities
including in several schools.
 It was observed that now a day’s Internet is playing major role in society, but in the study
area only few Internet shop is available in Nipania.
Suggestions:
 Industries in consultation with State Govt. should may come forward for maintenance of
village roads.
 Industries may contribute in establishment of Mineral water plants in the Villages in a phased
manner to prevent any waterborne diseases to the villagers.
 State Govt. should conduct awareness programs on sanitation and need to provide subsidy
for construction of Toilets in their Houses. Sanitation facilities shall be established in the
schools by the Project proponent under Socio Economic development activity in a phased
manner.
 There is need of Vocational training centres to train the un-employed youth in Computer skills
& other IT skills. It can be taken up under Socio Economic development program it can
indirectly promotes the establishment of more Internet Centers in the study area at least in
Towns.
EMPLOYMENT, SPORTS & SOCIAL AILMENT ISSUES:

Observations
 It is observed that the Baloda Bazar-Bhatapara District is having huge scope for employment
as industrialization is increasing in the area. But due to lack of Vocational training centers in
the area the Industries are outsourcing some of the key employees from other areas.
 Social ailment issues like child marriage, alcoholism among poor.
 It is observed during FGD that there are only a few people got the benefit of Self-employment
scheme and needs substantial improvement.
 It is observed that there is no encouragement for sports as there are less Schools & Colleges
in the Study area. Raipur is the only place where Sports training facilities are available in entire
District.

7.58
Suggestions:
 The study area has ample potential of generating employment / self-employment
opportunities.
 Management may facilitate youth to join Vocational Training centre, which will enable the
Industries to recruit the Local people & it will cost minimization for the Industries also.
 Industries in consultation with State Govt. should may come forward to establish training
institutes for unemployed youth as per their qualification such as Computer skills,
Administration skills, Communication skills etc.
 Setting up the infrastructure along with other industries will result in generation of
employment opportunities.

7.59
7.7.9 INTERPRETATION ON SOCIO-ECONOMIC STUDY

Table no. 7.3.6: Interpretation of Socio-Economic Study
S.No. Impact Parameter Predicted Impacts Budget Allocation /
Positive Negative Remark
1. Human Settlement  No displacement of people or Nil ----
habitations would occur
2. Livelihoods  No loss of existing livelihoods. Direct A moderate influx of people in project Priority will be given local
or indirect is expected to occur. construction and operation phases. people in employment
 Additional non-agricultural livelihood
opportunities are expected both
directly and as spinoffs.
3. Employment  No loss of existing employment Nil ----
Generation due to the proposed project is
expected.
 Creation of additional employment
for about 1000 skilled, semi-skilled &
unskilled workers during project
operation.
 Indirect employment to about 1000
persons as a sequel to income
multiplie effect and induced growth
during construction & operation
phases of the project.
 Majority of them will be local women
and youth.
4. Incomes  Improvement of money incomes of Nil ----
and locals engaged in tertiary businesses
Revenues by an average 12 % through induced
spending.

7.60

 Improved tax revenues of Gram
Panchayat.
 The successful commissioning and
running of the proposed project will
attract more industrial investments
which in turn will benefit the society
and the nation.
5. Demographics  The population levels of the Nil ---
neighbouring villages are not likely to
change in any significant manner.
 The lifestyles of people are expected
to improve in tune with the rise in
incomes and improvement in
infrastructure facilities.
 The skill sets of the local residents are
expected to improve in keeping with
the emerging employment
opportunities.
6. Community Health Health of people residing in all the three If Emission Control Systems are not  Budget of Rs. 41.9 Crores
impact zones is not likely to be impacted operated & proper dust suppression has been earmarked for
adversely considering the nature of systems not adopted for control of Air emission
emissions and the state-of-the-art Particulate emissions from Stack & management, Rs. 5.7
Emission control systems planned. Fugitive emissions from Raw material Crores for solid &
handling areas, it may raise community hazardous waste
health issues. management.
 Also, Rs. 1.0 Crores is
earmarked for PHC with
ambulance facility with

7.61

emergency equipment.
7. Physical Road and power network in the area is  If massive Increase in vehicular traffic Priority will be given to local
Infrastructure expected to be strengthened as a sequel may lead to higher incidence of road people in employment in
to industrial development around. accidents. the proposed project.
 If influx of workers from outside areas
then there will be an increased
pressure on water supply and
sanitation in the neighbourhood
during construction phase.
8. Social Improvement in housing stock and If influx of workers from outside areas ---
Infrastructure educational facilities could be expected then there will be an increased pressure
in the long run as industrialization in the on residential accommodation the
area gains acceleration. neighbourhood during construction
phase.

7.62
7.7.10 CONCLUSION
The Social Impact Assessment of the study area for the surveyed village gives an idea of its
population, average household size, literacy rate and sex ratio. Literacy rate is average. A part of
population is suffering from lack of regular job to run their day to day life and get basic facilities.
The infrastructure and amenities available in the area denote the economic well-being of the
region. The study area as a whole possesses average infrastructural facilities. The proposed
enhancement & installation will contribute towards the improvement of the socioeconomic
status of the surrounding areas.
Mahendra Sponge & Power Limited [Unit-II] is committed to contribute in the development of
basic need of the local area in order to uplift the social and economic structure of the area. Based
on the Socio-Economic Impact assessment study (SIA) the company is proposed will carry out
various activities under Socio Economic development program in the nearby local area like
community & infrastructure development programs, Skill Development Centres, Self Help
Groups, Education, Health, Women empowerment etc. Rs. 9.68 Crores is earmarked for Socio &
Infrastructure Development activities. Detailed break up of activities to be carried out under
Socio Economic development is incorporated in Chapter – 8 of EIA report.
Based on SIA Study, following activities are proposed under Socio Economic development:
i. Community & Infrastructure Development Programmes:
 Construction of public toilets
 Providing LED Street light with solar panel
 Providing proper drainage and sanitation facilities
 Providing Garbage collection van in the village
 Relaying of Road
 Deepening of wells in the villages
 Construction of RWH pits and de-siltation of ponds
ii. Skill Development
 Facilitating the youth for Skill Development Centre for various vocational training
centre
 Soft skills development and coaching classes for under privilege students
iii. Education, scholarship programmes & others
 Providing infrastructure support facilities i.e. furniture, computers, library, sports
equipments etc. along with Digital Class Room

7.63
 Financial assistance to the Self Help Group (SHG) of women and elderly persons
 Renovation of school buildings
 Construction of multiple toilets for Boys & Girls in the schools
 Distribution of tricycle to handicapped students
 Financial support to farmers in villages & provide fertilizers to improve the soil
supplement such as N,P,K
7.8 R & R ACTION PLAN

There is no habitation in the proposed site. Hence no Rehabilitation & Resettlement Action Plan
will be required.

7.64
CHAPTER – 8
PROJECT BENEFITS
8
8.1 PHYSICAL INFRASTRUCTURE
Once the proposed activity is commissioned, the socio-economic status of the local people will
improve and there by infrastructure facilities like communication systems will improve.
8.2 SOCIAL INFRASTRUCTURE

With the implementation of the proposed plant, the socio-economic status of the local people will
improve substantially. The land rates in the area will improve in the nearby areas due to the
proposed activity. This will help in upliftment of the social status of the people in the area.
Educational institutions will also come-up and will lead to improvement of educational status of
the people in the area. Primary health and medical facilities will certainly improve due to the
proposed plant.
8.3 EMPLOYMENT POTENTIAL [Gen.TOR # 3 (vii)]

The proposed project will generate direct employment 1000 nos. which will be employed officials,
staff, skilled, semi -skilled labour & 1000 nos. indirectly employed in contract works & transport.
Table No. 8.3.1: Man Power Requirement
S.No. Department Manager Supervisor Skilled Un-skilled Total
1 I/O beneficiation plant 5 10 30 80 125
2 Pellet plant 10 20 50 80 160
3 DRI Plant 10 20 40 50 120
4 Captive Power Plant 10 20 40 50 120
5 Steel melt shop 6 10 50 80 146
6 Rolling mills 6 10 60 100 176
7 Coal Gasifier + PCI 3 5 5 10 23
8 Ferro Alloy unit 5 10 20 40 75
9 General Administration 10 5 20 20 55
Total 65 110 315 510 1000

8.1
8.4 SOCIO-ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENTAL ACTIVITIES PROPOSED [Gen.TOR # 11(i)]

Real Ispat & Power Limited will actively contribute to improve the socio-economic conditions of
the area by providing assistance for local persons preferable from the nearby villages. The
continuing commitment by business to have ethically and contribute to economic development
while improve the quality of life of workforce and their families as well as that of the local
community and society at large.
As per MoEF&CC Office Memorandum vide F.No.22-65/2017-IA.III dt. 30th September 2020,
following is budgetary allocation for commitment made by Project Proponent to address the
concern raised during public hearing, issues raised from Social Impact Assessment (SIA).
Budgetary allocation for Social Development activities : Rs.9.68 Crores

8.2
Table No. 8.4.1: Break-Up of Budget for Social Development Activities as per MoEF&CC dt. 30.09.2020
Year of implementation Total

Physical activity and action
S.No. Expenditure
plan 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th (Rs. In Crores)
A Based on need based & SIA study
1 Community & Infrastructure Development Programmes
2 nos. in 2 nos. in 2 nos. in
2 nos. in Bakulahi
Bharatpur Semradih 2 nos. in Akaltara
Physical Village
Village Village Mopka Village Village
No. & 2 nos. in
 Construction Villages Dhaurabhata
2 nos. in 2 nos. in 2 nos. in 2 nos. in
Kosmanda Nipaniya Bendri Village Bhothidih 0.6
of Public Toilets Village
Village Village Village
Budget in
0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.12
Rs. Crores
15 nos. in 15 nos. in 15 nos. in
15 nos. in
Bharatpur Semradih 15 nos. in Akaltara
Physical Bakulahi Village
Village & 15 Village & 15 Mopka Village Village & 15
 Providing LED No. & & 15 nos.
nos. in nos. in & 15 nos. in nos. in
Street light with Villages Dhaurabhata 0.33
Kosmanda Nipaniya Bendri Village Bhothidih
solar panel Village
Village Village Village
Budget in
0.06 0.06 0.07 0.07 0.07
Rs. Crores
Physical 2 nos. in 2 nos. in
 Providing No. & -- -- Dhaurabhata -- Bakulahi
proper drainage Villages Village Village 0.2
& sanitation
facilities Budget in
0 0 0.1 0 0.1
Rs. Crores

8.3
Physical 1 no. in 1 no. in 1 no. in

 Providing 1 no. in Bakulahi 1 no. in
No. & Nipaniya Dhaurabhata Bharatpur
Grabage Village Mopka Village
Villages Village Village Village 0.25
collection van in
villages Budget in
0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05
Rs. Crores
Physical 0.8 Kms. in

1.0 Km. in 0.9 Km. in
No. & --- Dhaurabhata ---
 Re-Laying of Bakulahi Village Mopka Village
Villages Village 0.5
Road
Budget in
0.2 0 0.14 0 0.16
Rs. Crores
Physical 1 no.
1 no. Nipaniya 1 no. Akaltara
 Deepning of No. & --- --- Kosmanda
Village Village
wells in the Villages Village 0.15
villages Budget in
0 0.05 0 0.05 0.05
Rs. Crores
Physical 1 No. of Pond 1 No. of Pond
 Construction of 1 No. of Pond in
No. & --- in Dhourabhata --- in Semradih
RWH pits & Bakulahi Village
Villages Village Village 0.3
Desiltation of
Budget in
Ponds 0.1 0 0.1 0 0.1
Rs. Crores

8.4
Vocational Vocational Vocational Vocational Vocational

 Skill & training to training to training to training to training to
Entrepreneur unemployed unemployed unemployed unemployed unemployed
Development youth 25 nos. youth 25 nos. youth 25 nos. youth 25 nos. youth 25 nos.
Program in from Bakulahi from Bakulahi from Bakulahi from Bakulahi from Bakulahi
accordance with Village, Village, Village, Village, Village,
guidelines issued Physical 25 nos. from 25 nos. from 25 nos. from 25 nos. from 25 nos. from
by National Skill No. & Dhaurabhata Dhaurabhata Dhaurabhata Dhaurabhata Dhaurabhata
Development Villages 25 nos. from 25 nos. from 25 nos. from 25 nos. from 25 nos. from 1.5
Corporation, Bharatpur, Bharatpur, Bharatpur, Bharatpur, Bharatpur,
Govt. of India 25 nos. from 25 nos. from 25 nos. from 25 nos. from 25 nos. from
(DISHA Centre) Kosmanda Kosmanda Kosmanda Kosmanda Kosmanda
for imparting Village, Village, Village, Village, Village,
training to local 25 nos. from 25 nos. from 25 nos. from 25 nos. from 25 nos. from
villagers for skill Kosmanda Kosmanda Kosmanda Kosmanda Kosmanda
development Budget in
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Rs. Crores
Education & Sports programmes
 Providing
infrastructure
support facilities
i.e. furniture,
computers, Bharatpur
@ Village Bakulahi Village --- --- Mopka Village
2 library, sports Village
0.15
equipment etc.
along with
Digital Class
Room
Budget in
 0.05 0 0.05 0 0.05
Rs. Crores

8.5
 Financial 20 nos. in
Physical 20 nos. in 20 nos. in
assistance to the Bakulahi &
No. & --- Dhaurabhata & --- Kosmanda
Self Help Group Dhaurabhata
Villages Senridhi Village Village 1.0
(SHG) of women Village
and elderly
Budget in
persons 0.4 0 0.4 0 0.2
Rs. Crores
1 No. of School
Physical 2 no.s of Schools 2 no.s of
in
No. & in Nipaniya --- --- Schools in
 Renovation of Dhourabhatha
Villages Village Mopka Village 0.5
school buildings Village
Budget in
0.2 0 0.1 0 0.2
Rs. Crores
Physical 4 no.s in 2 No.s in 2 nos. in
 Construction of No. & Nipaniya Village --- Dhourabhatha --- Mopka Village
multiple toilets Villages School Village School School 0.2
for Boys and Girls
in the schools Budget in
0.1 0 0.05 0 0.05
Rs. Crores
5 nos. of 5 nos. of
5 nos. of tricycles
tricycles in tricycles in
Physical in Bakulahi & 5
 Distribution of Semradhi & 5 Bharatpur & 5
No. & nos. of tricycles --- ---
tricycles to nos. of tricycles nos. of tricycles
Villages inDhourabhatha 0.03
handicapped in Nipaniya inKosmanda
Village
students Village Village
Budget in
0.01 0.01 0.01 0 0
Rs. Crores
4 Agricultural related activities

8.6
 Financial
support to
farmers in Farmers of Farmers of Farmers of
Farmers of Farmers of
Jogihalli & @ Village Dhourabhatha Kosmonda Bharatpur
Bakulahi Village Mopka Village
Devarahalli Village Village Village
0.75
Village & Provide
fertilizers to
improve the soil
Budget in
supplement such 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15
Rs. Crores
as N,P,K
B Based on Public Consultation / Hearing
Drinking water Drinking water
Physical Drinking water
facility in facility in
 Providion of No. & facility in --- ---
Bharatpur Dhourabhatha
1 drinking water Villages Bakulahi Village 0.12
Village Village
facility
Budget in
0.04 0.04 0.04 0 0
Rs. Crores
Physical
 Providing 1 nos. --- --- --- ---
No.
2 Playing Ground 0.30
with equipments Budget in
0.30 0 0 0 0
Rs. Crores
PHC with
 Primary Health PHC with
Physical Ambulance
Center (PHC) Ambulance
No. & --- --- facility in ---
with Ambulance facility in
3 Villages Nipaniya 1.0
facility with Bakulahi Village
Village
emergency
Budget in
equipments 0.5 0 0 0.5 0
Rs. Crores

8.7
 Providing
Model Physical 1 no. in 1 no. in
1 no. in Bakulahi
Anganwadi No. & --- Dhourabhatha --- Nipaniya
Village
Centre in Villages Village Village
consultations
4 0.9
with State
Women and Budget in
Child 0.3 0 0.3 0 0.3
Rs. Crores
Development
Department
Physical
Providing proper 1 nos. --- --- --- ---
No.
5 place for 0.2
Budget in
graveyard 0.2 0 0 0 0
Rs. Crores
Total 3.18 0.93 2.13 1.39 2.05 9.68
C Recurring expenditure under CSR as per Companies Act 2014
Health checkup & distribution of general medicines will be carried out periodically in surrounding villages @ Rs. 5.0 Lakhs
1
every year

8.8
CHAPTER – 9
ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS
9
No specific TOR has been stipulated regarding Cost benefit analysis.
All the required environmental protection measures will be implemented in the proposed
project and will be operated to comply with the MoEF&CC / CPCB / SPCB norms.

9.1
CHAPTER – 10
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN
10
10.1 INTRODUCTION
The major objective and benefit of utilising Environmental Impact Assessment in project
planning stage itself, is to prevent avoidable losses of environmental resources and values as a
result of Environmental Management. Environmental Management includes protection /
mitigation / enhancement measures as well as suggesting post project monitoring programme.
Environmental management may suggest revision of project site or operation, to avoid adverse
impacts or more often additional project operations may have to be incorporated in the
conventional operation.
The industrial development in the study area needs to be intertwined with judicious utilization
of non-renewable resources of the study area and with in the limits of permissible assimilative
capacity. The assimilative capacity of the study area is the maximum amount of pollution load
that can be discharged in the environment without affecting the designated use and is governed
by dilution, dispersion, and removal due to physico-chemical and biological processes.
Environment Management Plan (EMP) is required to ensure sustainable development in the
study area of the plant due to the proposed project. Hence it should be an all encompassive plan
for which the proposed industry, Government, Regulating agencies like SPCB and more
importantly, the affected population of the study area, need to extend their cooperation and
contribution.
It has been evaluated that the study area will not be affected adversely and is likely to get new
economical fillip. The affected environmental attributes in the region are air quality, water
quality, soil, land use, ecology and public health.
The Management Action Plan aims at controlling pollution at the source level to the possible
extent with the available and affordable technology followed by treatment measures before
they are discharged.
Environmental Management aims at the preservation of ecosystem by considering the pollution

abatement facilities at the plant since inception. In the upcoming modern integrated steel
10.1
plants, pollution abatement has become an integral part of planning and design along with
Techno economic factors.
10.2 MANAGEMENT DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE [Gen. TOR # 10]

Environmental pollution is inevitable during the construction phase. The project proponent will
take appropriate steps to control pollution during construction phase. The following are the
factors requiring control during construction phase.
10.2.1 SITE PREPARATION

At the time of construction, there will be some quantity of soil and debris. The disturbed slopes
shall be well stabilized before the on set of the monsoon. The leveling operation will also involve
piling up of backfill materials. Use of dust suppressant spraying to minimize fugitive dust during
construction activities is recommended.
10.2.2 WATER SUPPLY AND SANITATION

The employees at the plant shall be provided with water for their requirement and for the
construction activities. The proposed plant shall be provided with sufficient and suitable sanitary
facilities to maintain proper standards of hygiene. These facilities would preferably be
connected to a septic tank and shall be maintained properly to have least environmental impact.
10.2.3 FUEL & REST ROOMS FACILITY

Fuel will be supplied to construction labour for cooking during construction period. This will
prevent usage of fire wood for cooking. Rest rooms will be provided to construction labour
during construction period and operational stage.
10.2.4 NOISE
Noise pollution is anticipated during the construction phase due to the usage of various
construction equipment such as mechanical vibrator and mixers etc. The noise effect on the
nearest inhabitations due to construction activity will be negligible.
However, as advised the onsite workers working near the noise generating equipments shall be
provided with noise protection devices like earplugs.

10.2
10.2.5 MAINTENANCE OF VEHICLES

One should be very careful in selecting the site for vehicle maintenance, so as to prevent the
ground water contamination due to the spillage of oil. Both diesel and petrol engine vehicles
shall be maintained properly. Unauthorized dumping of waste oil will be prohibited. Wastes will
be disposed off to the SPCB approved vendors.
10.2.6 WASTE
The solid waste shall be collected and disposed off as per norms.
10.2.7 STORAGE OF HAZARDOUS MATERIAL

The following hazardous materials need to be stored at the site during construction.
a. Gas for welding purpose
b. LDO
c. Painting materials
All these materials would be stored as per international safety standards.
10.2.8 LAND ENVIRONMENT

The proposed project will not create any major impact on land environment. After the
completion of construction activity, the surplus earth will be utilized to fill up low lying areas,
the rubbish will be cleared and all in- built surfaces will be reinstated. Appropriate vegetation
will be planned and all such areas shall be landscaped. 21.1 Ha. (52.0 acres) of extensive
greenbelt will be developed within the premises.
10.3 POST CONSTRUCTION PHASE
10.3.1 AIR EMISSION MANAGEMENT [Gen.TOR # 7 (v)]

The following pollution control systems are proposed:
Table No. 10.3.1: Air Pollution Control Systems Proposed
outlet
bag filters
PTFE bag filters

10.3

outlet
Rolling Mill
System
3
will be provided
10.3.1.1 DUST EXTRACTION AND DUST SUPPRESSION SYSTEM

The following are the details of dust extraction system & dust suppression system proposed in
the plant:
Table No. 10.3.2: Dust Extraction & Dust Suppression System
S.No Location Pollution control system proposed
1.  Coal screen House These areas will be provided with Dust extraction
 Crusher House systems - each comprising of pulse jet type bag filter,
 Junction houses and surge hopper centrifugal fan and motor, duct work including
 Iron ore screen house and bins suction hoods, duct supports, stack, dust hopper,
 Product discharge rotary air lock valves etc.
 Junction House & SMS bins
2. Junction houses and truck hoppers Dust suppression system with plain water -
comprising of spray nozzles, piping network, valves,
pumps, instrumentation & controls, water tank etc.
3. Stock piles in DR route Dust suppression system with plain water -
comprising piping network, valves, pumps,
instrumentation & control, water tank etc.
SOURCES OF AIR POLLUTION (DRI Kilns)

Table No. 10.3.3: Sources of Air Pollution (DRI Kilns)
1. Raw Material Handling 1. All vibrating screens will be totally covered, to prevent the
leakages of dust.
2. Throughout the length, the conveyor is covered with G.I.
Sheets to prevent the dust pollution

10.4

3. All the material handling systems will be connected with de
dusting system. All the discharge points and feed points
wherever the possibility of dust generation is there, a de
4. DUST SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
It is the most effective and successful system to prevent the
fly-off of dust. Dust suppression system will be adopted to
control the fugitive dust emanated during raw material
unloading operations.
2. Raw Material Storage System 1. All conveyors will be covered with G.I. Sheets to control the
dust.
2. All bins will be totally packed and covered, so that there will
not be any chance of dust leakage.
i. Weigh feeders will be kept below the hopper and used
to feed the known quantity of raw material per hour; it
also seals the discharge area.
ii. All discharge and feed points wherever the possibility
of dust generation is there, will be provided with dust
suppression system.
iii. All material transfer points will be connected with dust
suppression water nozzles to avoid the fugitive dust
emission.
3. Kiln Feed System The raw material will be fed into the kiln through a double
pendulum valve, which seals the false air entry into the rotary
kiln and gas leakage from the kiln. The chute will be sealed with
a double pendulum flap.
4. Main Processing System Kiln Sealed system to avoid false air entry as well as exit. So that
the desired quality can be produced.
Hence no dust escapes outside.
5. Kiln Cooler Transfer Building The transfer point between kiln to coolers is completely sealed
to avoid the false air entry and gas leakages.
6. Rotary Cooler 1. The water will be circulated again and again. Hence there
will not be any water pollution problem
2. There will be slip seals at cooler inlet & cooler outlet. The
seals are also being lubricated to avoid false air entry and
gas leakages.
3. Cooler discharge and feed points wherever the possibility
of dust generation is there, will be provided with de dusting
system.
7. Waste Gas Cleaning System AFTER BURNING CHAMBER (POST COMBUSTION CHAMBER)
The waste gas passes through the after burning chamber
where the combustion of carbon monoxide and un burnt
carbon takes place in presence of air supplied. The basic
purpose of after burning chamber is to reduce the carbon
monoxide content in waste flue gases.
ELECTRO STATIC PRECIPITATOR

10.5

The flue gas from DRI kilns, after heat recovery, will pass
through an electro static precipitator where it is cleaned to
contain < 30 mg/Nm3 particulate matter. The clean gas will be
emitted into the atmosphere through the chimney whose
height is calculated on the basis of CPCB guidelines. The total
conveying of gas from kiln to chimney is done by the induced
draft fan located between ESP and chimney.
8. Product Separation System 1. All conveyors will be covered with G.I. Sheets, to control
the dust emission.
2. All bins will be totally packed and covered, so that there
will not be any chance for dust leakage.
3. Telescopic chutes will be provided below the hopper to
discharge the product directly into the truck for dispatch to
avoid the pollution.
4. All the above material handling system will be connected
with de-dusting system
5. All discharge points and feed points wherever the
possibility of dust generation is there, a de-dusting suction
point will be provided to collect the dust.
6. The collected dust will be taken by pneumatic conveying
7. Bag housing system
In the bag house, the dry dust will be collected in an enclosed
housing containing fabric filter bags which are suspended
inside the unit. The dust ladden air will pass through bag filters
forming a dust cake to separate the particulate from the clean
air.
The collected dust will be taken by a pneumatic conveying
10.3.1.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF CONTROL SYSTEMS

Table No. 10.3.4: Tech. Spec. for ESP attached to Pellet Plant (2 x 0.8 MTPA)
1 No. of ESP’s 2
3
3

10.6
1 No. of ESP’s 2
0

1 No. of ESP’s 2
3
4 Inlet dust concentration, gm/Nm 21
Table No. 10.3.7: Tech. Spec. for ESP attached to WHRB of 1 x 200 TPD DRI Kiln
1 No. of ESP’s 1
3
3

10.7
Table No. 10.3.8: Tech Spec. for ESP attached to For CFBC Boiler (160 TPH Boiler)
1. Gas flow rate, m3/hr 4,30,000
2. Flue gas temperature (0C) 170
3. Inlet dust concentration, gm/nm3 45
4. Guaranteed outlet dust Concentration, mg/nm3 < 30
(at max. flow conditions)
5. Design pressure, mm wg 300
6. Number of fields Three (1 standby)
7. Pressure drop across the ESP, mm wg 25 (max)
8. Collection efficiency 99.92 %
1. Capacity of Bag Filter (m3/hr) 1,37,000
PTFE
a) Raw Gas Casing 3.15 mm thk. MS sheet
b) Clean Gas Casing 3.15 mm thk. MS sheet
c) Hopper 3.15 mm thk. MS sheet
d) Cage Plate 4 mm thk. MS sheet
e) Diffuser at inlet To be Provided
f) Cage MS
g) Venturies MS

10.8
Table No. 10.3.10: Tech. Spec. for Bag filter attached to 2 x 9 MVA Submerged Electric Arc Furnaces
PTFE
h) Raw Gas Casing 3.15 mm thk. MS sheet
i) Clean Gas Casing 3.15 mm thk. MS sheet
j) Hopper 3.15 mm thk. MS sheet
k) Cage Plate 4 mm thk. MS sheet
l) Diffuser at inlet To be Provided
m) Cage MS
n) Venturies MS
10.3.2 ACTION PLAN FOR CONTROL AND MONITORING OF FUGITIVE EMISSIONS
Control of Fugitive Emissions from Sponge Iron Plant [Gen. TOR # 7 (vi)]
Fugitive dust emissions are likely in the unloading areas, material transfer point, cooler discharge
area, product separation area, etc. Fugitive emission in the material unloading area can be
avoided by providing dust suppression system. Fugitive emission from material unloading
operations, material transfer points will be controlled fully with total enclosure and all the
transfer emission will be connected with extractor inlet point and will pass through a high
efficiency Bag Filter before discharging into the atmosphere. All internal roads will be asphalted.

10.9
Control of Secondary Fugitive Emissions from Induction Furnace

 The secondary emissions from the Induction furnaces will be extracted and treated in a fume
extraction & cleaning system.
 Fumes will be evacuated directly from induction furnaces through hoods with swiveling
mechanism and ducting.
 Clean gases having less than 30 mg/Nm3 of dust content will be exhausted through a Stack of
adequate height.
A line diagram of Fume extraction & cleaning system shown in Figure No. 10.1
Fig. 10.1 : Fume Extraction & Cleaning System (for Ind. Furnace)
Control of Fugitive Emissions Ferro Alloys

The primary & secondary fugitive emissions from the Submerged Electric Arc Furnace will be
extracted through a 4th hole extraction & cleaning system and these gases will then pass through
a bag house and after treatment these gases will be discharged into the atmosphere through a
stack of 30 m height. The outlet dust emission from the exhaust flue gases will be limited to 30
mg/Nm3. A line diagram of the 4th Hole Fume extraction & cleaning system shown as Figure no.
10.2.

10.10
Fig. 10.2 : 4th hole Fume Extraction & Cleaning System (for Ferro Alloys)
10.3.2.1 MONITORING OF SECONDARY FUGITIVE EMISSIONS

Sponge Iron plant
As per MoEF notification vide no. G.S.R. 414 (E) dated 30th May 2008, fugitive emissions will be
monitored at a distance 10 m from their source as per following:
Table No. 10.3.9: Fugitive emission monitoring location for Sponge Iron plant
S.No. Area Monitoring Location
1. Raw material handling Screen area, Transfer Points, Stock Bin area
area
2. Crusher area Crushing plant, vibrating screen, transfer points
3. Raw material feed area Feeder area, Mixing area, transfer points
4. Cooler discharge area Over size discharge area, Transfer Points
5. Product processing area Intermediate stock bin area. Screening plant, Magnetic
Separation unit, Transfer Points, Over size discharge
area, Product separation area, Bagging area
6. Other areas Areas as specified by State Pollution Control Board
The fugitive emissions will be maintained below the MoEF&CC norm of 2000 µg/m3.
10.3.2.2 DUST SUPPRESSION SYSTEM

Water sprinklers will be provided at the unloading areas of the raw materials for dust
suppression. Dust suppression system will be provided with plain water - comprising of piping
network, valves, pumps, instrumentation & control, water tank etc.

10.11
10.3.2.3 INTERNAL ROADS

All internal roads will be asphalted to prevent the fugitive dust emission due to vehicular
movement.
10.3.2.4 INTERLOCKING SYSTEM

All ESPs will have interlocking system. Whenever the ESP fails, there will be no production in the
unit till the ESP is rectified.
10.3.3 COMPLIANCE ON CREP RECOMMENDATIONS [Addl.ToR # 6]

All the CREP recommendations will be implemented & followed strictly. The following will be the
compliance of CREP recommendations.
 Continuous stack monitoring system is proposed for stack attached to all the Stacks.
 Online Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations will be established in consultation with SPCB
during operation of the plant.
 Fugitive emission monitoring will be carried out as per CPCB norms.
 Energy meters will be installed for all the pollution control systems.
 Rain water harvesting pits will be constructed in consultation with CGWB.
Recommendations
a) The proposed air pollution control equipment will be installed prior to commissioning of the
plant.
b) Pressure drop measuring system will be installed to measure the pressure drop across the bag
filters.
c) All the internal roads shall be asphalted to reduce the fugitive dust due to truck movement.
10.3.4 WASTEWATER MANAGEMENT [Gen.TOR # 3 (vi) & 7 (iv)]

SMS & Ferro Alloy unit as closed-circuit cooling system will be adopted.
 Thickener overflow from Iron ore beneficiation process will be recycled along with makeup

10.12
cooling system.
development.

mixed with Cooling Tower blowdown in a Central Monitoring Basin (CMB). Service water will be
treated in an oil separator and after treatment it will be taken to CMB. The treated effluent will
be utilized for dust suppression, ash conditioning and for Green belt development. No effluent
will be let out of the plant premises. Hence Zero discharge concept will be implemented.
TREATED EFFLUENT DISPOSAL

21.1 Ha. (52.0 Acres) of greenbelt will be developed within the plant premises by using the
treated effluent. A dedicated pipe distribution network will be provided for using the treated
effluent for greenbelt development. During monsoon period, when there is no requirement of
water for greenbelt development, the treated effluent will be used as make up water for Rolling
Mill. The characteristics of the treated effluent will comply with the SPCB Standards for onland
irrigation. Hence there will not be any adverse impact on ground water / surface water due to
the proposed project. Effluent Treatment plant flow diagram is shown below.

10.13
Fig. 10.3: Schematic diagram showing Effluent Treatment Plant
Table No. 10.3.10: Characteristics of Treated Process Effluent

S.No. Parameter : Max. Permissible Conc.
1. pH : 6.5-8.5
2. Free available chlorine (mg/l) : <1.0
3. Copper (mg/l) : <1.0
4. Iron (mg/l) : <1.0
5. Zinc (mg/l) : <0.2
6. Oil & Grease (mg/l) : <10
7. TSS (mg/l) : <100
8. Total Chromium (mg/l) : <0.2
9. Phosphates (mg/l) : <5.0
Table No. 10.3.11: Characteristics of Treated Process Effluent

S.No. Parameters : Max. Permissible Conc.
1. pH : 6.5 – 8.0
2. BOD (mg/ L) : <10
3. COD (mg/ L) : <50
4. TSS (mg/ L) : <20
5. NH4-N (mg/ L) : <5
6. N-Total (mg/ L) : <10
7. Fecal Coliform (MPN/100 ml) : <100

10.14
10.3.5 SOLID WASTE GENERATION & ITS DISPOSAL

The following will be the solid waste generation & proposed method of disposal.
Table No. 10.3.12: Solid Waste Generation & its Disposal
(in TPA)
Pellet plant
manufacturers.
Mill Pellet plant.
Mill
Rolling Mill)
Gasifiers
dolochar)
dolochar)

10.15
 Letter from Cement plant for Expression of Interest for utilization of Fly Ash generated from
proposed plant is enclosed as ANNEXURE- 3.
 Letter from Road Contractor for Expression of Interest for utilization of Slag & Tar generated
from proposed plant from is enclosed as ANNEXURE-4.
Note: [Addl. ToR # 6]

Solid wastes such as Tailings, dolochar, accretion slag, granulated slag will be stored in
designated storage yard. Ash generated will be stored in silos only. There will not be any open
storage of fly ash.
Table No. 10.3.13: Solid Waste and its Composition
S.No DESCRIPTION CHEMICAL COMPOSITION
1. Dolo Char (% by weight)
Carbon : 25.0 %
Hydrogen : 0.75 %
Nitrogen : 0.74 %
Sulpher : 0.30 %
Moisture : 9.50 %
Ash : 60.0 %
GCV : 2,200 Kcals/Kg
2. Dust from Bag filters Fe + Fe2 O3 : 20 to 25 %
Fixed Carbon + Coal Char : 20 to 40 %
CaO + SiO2 : 35 to 50 %
3. Ash Silica - 60.08%
Alumina - 29.50%
Iron oxide - 4.82%
Titania - 1.70%
Phospheric Anhydride - 0.53%
Lime - 1.70%
Magnesia - 0.75%
Sulphuric Anhydride - 0.27%
K2O(By difference) & Na2O(By difference)- 0.65 %
4. Kiln Accretion Slag (% by weight)
Feo – 11.78 %
SiO2 – 31.0 %
Al2O3 – 24.45 %
CaO – 4.5 %
MgO – 0.16 %
5. SMS Slag Trace Element Analysis (mg/kg)
Al : 1.6
Cr(III) : 760
Mo : 26
Pb : 24
10.16
Cd : <0.3
Ni : 83
Co : 14
V : 634
Be : 2.6
Ba : 30
Sr : 147
Sn : <3.3
Sb : 144
Hazardous waste generation, storage & disposal

1. Waste oil: 1.5 KL / Annum
This will be stored in covered HDPE drums in a designated area and will be given to SPCB
approved vendors.
2. Used Batteries
Used batteries will be given back to the supplier under buy back agreement with supplier.
MUNICIPAL SOLID WASTE GENERATION & ITS DISPOSAL

Type of Municipal solid waste Proposed method of disposal
Construction debris Used for landfill within the plant site to the extent
(generated during construction phase) possible and recyclables will be given to authorised
recyclers.
Canteen waste Used in composting / Vermiculture
Used as manure for greenbelt development within
the premises.
Recyclables Given to SPCB authorised dealers
10.3.6 NOISE LEVEL MANAGEMENT

The major noise generating sources in the plant are Turbines, Boilers, DG set & Compressors. All
equipment’s will be of internationally reputed make and the same will be manufactured in
accordance of the MOEF&CC, OSHA & other international guidelines by the supplier. Acoustic
enclosure will be provided to Turbines. Silencers will be provided to DG set. The major noise
levels will be confined to the working zones of the plant. The L eq of eight hours will be within the
prescribed standards. Community noise levels are not likely to be effected due to the proposed
thick green belt and attenuation due to the physical barriers. The ambient noise levels will be
less than 75 dBA during day time & less than 70 dBA during night time. Hence there will not be
any adverse impact on habitations due to the proposed activities.

10.17
Recommendations
a) Acoustic enclosures to turbines.
b) The impact can be reduced by adopting shock absorbing techniques.
c) The Noise absorption will improve by using hollow concrete blocks in the construction of
the proposed Plant.
d) Ear plugs shall be provided to the workers and this shall be enforced strictly.
e) Extensive greenbelt shall be developed for further attenuating the noise levels.
10.3.7 LAND ENVIRONMENT

All the required Air Emission Control systems will be provided in the proposed activities. The
treated effluent will confirm to the SPCB’s standards for onland irrigation. Hence there will not
be any impact on land environment due to the proposed plant. The solid waste generated from
the project will be reused / disposed as per norms. Hence there will not be any adverse impact
on land environment due to the solid waste generated from the proposed activities. Extensive
greenbelt development will have positive impact on land environment.
Recommendations
Landscaping can be done around the administrative building, raw material storage sheds etc.
This will help in preserving the ecological conditions.
10.3.8. MEASURES FOR IMPROVEMENT OF ECOLOGY

There are no National Parks, Wildlife sanctuaries, Bird sanctuaries, Reserved Forests exists
within 10 Km. radius of the plant. No significant vegetation occurs in and around the project site.
No significant fauna exists in the area. Hence there will not be any adverse impact on flora &
fauna due to the proposed project.
Recommendations
Plantation programme should be undertaken at several areas. They should include plantation,
along the internal and external roads and along the administrative buildings and the stacking
yards.
People should be educated and trained in social forestry activities by local governmental and
non-governmental organizations.

10.18
10.3.8.1 GREEN BELT DEVELOPMENT [Gen. TOR # 7 (ix)]

The greenbelt shall be developed simultaneously with the plant construction. This will further
mitigate the pollution impacts. 10 to 85 m wide greenbelt will be developed all around the plant
as per CPCB guidelines in consultation with local DFO.
Greenbelt plantation
Greenbelt will be developed in a set of rows of trees planted in such a way that they form an
effective barrier between the plant and the surroundings. The main purpose of greenbelt
development is to contribute to the following factors.
 To maintain the ecological homeostatus.
 To attenuate the air emissions from the kiln and the fugitive dust emissions.
 To prevent the soil erosion.
 To attenuate the noise levels.
Plantation of grass, flowers, bushes and trees will be taken up to reduce the generation of dust
from the bare earth and to enhance the aesthetic value.
Plantation species
Plantation species will be considered based on the following.
 Suitable to the Geo-climatic conditions of the area.
 Mix of round, spreading, oblong and conical canopies.
 Ever green trees.
 Different heights ranging from 4m to 20m.
Plantation for arresting dust

Trees particularly having compact branching closely arranged leaves of simple elliptical and hairy
structure, shiny or waxy leaves and hairy twigs are efficient filters of dust. The following species
are suggested to arrest the dust
 Alstonia Scholaris
 Bauhinia purpurea
 Cassia siamea
 Peltoferrum ferrugineum
 Butea monosperma
 Tamarindus indica
10.19
 Azadirachta indica
Plantation to absorb SO2 emissions

The following plants are suggested for plantation to absorb SO 2 in the air.
 Albizia lebbeck
 Alstonia scholaris
 Lagerstroemia flosregineae
 Melia azedarach
 Minusops elangi
 Poloyalthia longifloia
Plantation to reduce noise pollution

Trees having thick and flushy leaves with petioles are suitable. Heavier branches and trunks of
trees also deflect the sound waves. The following plant species are suggested to reduce noise
pollution.
 Melia monosperma
 Grevillea peridifolia
 Tamarindus indica
Plantation along the roads (Avenue plantation)

 Cassia fistula
 Bauhinia purpurea
 Mimusops elangi
 Pongamia pinnata
 Polyalthia longifolia
 Poluferrum ferrugineum
 Lagerstroemia flosreginea
 Cassia siamea

10.20
GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT PLAN

 Local DFO will be consulted in developing the green belt.
 Greenbelt of 21.1 ha. (52 Acres) will be developed in the plant premises.
 10 to 85 m wide greenbelt will be developed all around the plant.
 The tree species to be selected for the plantation are pollutant tolerant, fast growing,
wind firm, deep rooted. A three-tier plantation is proposed comprising of an outer most
belt of taller trees which will act as barrier, middle core acting as air cleaner and the
innermost core which may be termed as absorptive layer consisting of trees which are
known to be particularly tolerant to pollutants.
 Greenbelt will be developed as per CPCB guidelines.
 Local and native species will be planted with a density of 2500 trees per hectare.
Table No.10.3.14: Details of Proposed Plantation

S.No. Scientific name Common name No. of saplings Time bound
1. Azadirachta indica Neem 5000
2. Poloyalthia longifloia Ashok 6000
3. Tamarindus indica Tamarind 5000
4. Butea monosperma Palas 5000
5. Alstonia scholaris Saptaparni 5000 Within 3 year
6. Ficus religiosa Pipal 5000 from the date
7. Prunus dulcis Almond 5000 of receipt of
8. Millettia pinnata Karanja 3500 EC
9. Cassia siamea Kassod 4000
10. Peltophorum ferrugineum Yellow Flame 2500
11. Lagerstroemia flosregineae Jarul 2000
12. Melia azedarach Bakain 5000
Total 53000
10.3.9 RAINWATER HARVESTING [Gen.TOR # 7 (x)]

Rainwater harvesting structures will be constructed to harvest the run-off water from roof tops
by laying a separate storm water drainage system for recharging of ground water.
Rainwater harvesting structures will be provided in the plant to recharge the precious ground
water. Rain harvesting pits will be constructed in consultation with Central Ground Water Board.
The following is the Plan for rainwater harvesting measure at plant site.
Average annual rainfall = 1225 mm

10.21
Quantum of Rainwater that can be harvested from the premises

a) Average annual rainfall = 1.225 m
b) Runoff co-efficient
Runoff co-efficient for Roof area = 90%
Runoff co-efficient for Roads and Paved area = 80%
Runoff co-efficient for Open area = 40%
Runoff co-efficient for Green belt area = 20%
Runoff co-efficient for Water Reservoir = 100%
Table No.10.3.15: Details of Rainwater harvesting potential

Rainwater
Total Area Runoff Rainfall
S.No. Area Collection
(m2) Co-efficient in m
Potential (m3)
1 Roof top area 116553.6 0.90 1.225 128500.34
2 Internal roads 64752 0.80 1.225 63456.96
3 Storage areas 62728.5 0.90 1.225 69158.17
4 Greenbelt 210444 0.20 1.225 51558.78
5 Water Reservoir & RWH 12141 1.00 1.225 14872.73
Parking area + Switch Yard + Admin.
6 90689.223 0.40 1.225 44437.72
Area + Other Misc. areas
Total 557308.32 371984.70
The potential rainwater that can be reused to meet the plant water requirement is 371984.70
m3 / year.
10.3.10 ENERGY & WATER CONSERVATION [Gen.TOR # 7 (vii)]

 In the proposed project, flue gases generated from DRI kilns will be taken to WHRB and after
heat recovery it will be used for Power Generation. A total of 66 MW will be generated
through flue gases from the proposed DRI units.
 Dolochar generated from the DRI Plant will be used as fuel in the CFBC Boiler.
 Instead of making billets separately and cooling then and again reheating in RHF followed by
rolling, we are proposing to adopt Direct Hot Charging route in which hot billets are directly
taken to Rolling Mill without reheating Furnace.
 Air cooled condensers will be provided to Power Plant which reduces the water consumption
significantly.
 Rooftop Solar Panel, Solar Powered Street Lights etc. will be installed wherever possible.
 In the proposed project regenerative type burners will be installed in reheating furnaces.

10.22
 It is proposed to provide LED lights in the offices and common areas.

 It is proposed to provide Energy Efficient Motors as per NEMA Premium® Efficiency Electric
Motor specification or equivalent classifications and will use Variable Frequency Drives VFD
for control of electric motors.
 All Electrical Motor of 3 KW or above will be provided with Variable Frequency Drive (VFD).
10.4 POST PROJECT MONITORING STRATEGY [Gen. TOR # 7 (xii)]

The monitoring of various environmental parameters is necessary which is part of the
environmental protection measures. Monitoring is an important feature because the efficiency
of control measures can only be determined by monitoring. A comprehensive monitoring
programme is given here under. PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NOX and CO are monitored as per Ministry
notification vide G.S.R. No. 826(E) dated 16th November, 2009.
Locations and frequency of monitoring as per the guidelines of SPCB and MOEF&CC are
tabulated below.
TABLE NO. 10.4.1: Monitoring Schedule for Environmental Parameters
1. Water & Wastewater quality
quarterly basis.
(24 hourly)
2. Air Quality
A. Stack Monitoring Online monitors --- PM, SO2 & NOx
(all stacks)
(CAAQMS)
Quarterly Once 24 hours PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NOx
& CO
speed.
10.23

hours with 1 hour
interval
Infrastructure for Environmental Protection

Man Power
The project proponent shall provide a fully equipped laboratory to carry out the analysis. The
following manpower shall be provided on regular basis.
Environmental Engineer / Safety Officer

He will be a graduate engineer with adequate experience, responsible for implementing and
monitoring the environmental impacts and all the safety aspects. He will act as a liaison officer
between the proposed plant and regulatory agencies like SPCB, CPCB etc.
Chemist
He will be a qualified chemist to carry out the analysis of various samples.
Monitoring equipment and Consumables

Environmental monitoring during the operation phase of the plant will be entrusted to a third
party. Monitoring will be carried out as per CPCB/SPCB norms. A budgetary allocation of Rs. 20.5
Lakhs has been earmarked for Environmental monitoring.
Noise levels
A sound level meter shall be purchased to record noise levels in different scales like A, B and C
with slow and fast response options at various generating source from D.G set which will be used
only when there is an interruption in the power supply of State Electricity Board.

10.24
10.5 COSTS FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION [Gen. TOR # 7 (xi) & 8 (iv)]
Capital Cost for Environment Protection for proposed plant : Rs. 65.23 Crores
Recurring Cost per annum for Environmental protection : Rs.191.60 Lakhs/annum
Table No. 10.5.1: Break-Up of Budget for Environmental Protection Measures

Capital Cost (Rs.in Crores) Recurring Cost /
S.No. Particulars 2022 - 2024 - 2026 - Annum
2024 2026 2028 (Rs.in Lakhs)
1. Air Emission Management
ESP 11.50 4.50 `--- 100.00
4th Hole (for SEAF) & Fume
Extraction Systems with Bag 2.40 5.60 2.40 50.00
filters (for SMS)
Scrubber for Gasifier 0.04 0.10 `--- 1.00
Other APCS (SOx & NOx control)
6.00 2.00 `--- 1.00
& Conveyer’s systems
Stacks / Chimney (12 No.s) 2.32 2.16 1.24 2.00
CEMS (21 sources) 0.55 0.45 0.15 1.00
CAAQMS (4 nos.) 0.16 `--- `--- 1.00
Mechanical Dust Sweepers
0.03 `--- `--- 1.50
(3 nos.)
Water Sprinklers 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.50
Environment Monitoring `--- `--- `--- 20.50
Sub Total 23.10 14.91 3.89 178.50
2. Wastewater Management
ETP & STP 1.00 1.00 `--- 4.00
Garland drains 0.30 0.20 `--- 1.00
Settling Ponds 0.15 0.15 `--- 0.50
Sub Total 1.45 1.35 5.50
3. Solid waste Management
Ash Handling & Disposal
3.00 1.00 `--- 4.00
(Pneumatic converyer system)
Slag Handling & Disposal 0.20 0.10 `--- 1.00
Hazardous waste storage &
0.10 0.10 `--- 1.00
disposal
Muncipal Solid waste storage &
0.10 0.10 `--- 0.50
Disposal
Constrution of Pucca platorm for
0.50 0.50 `--- 0.50
storage
Sub Total 3.90 1.80 7.00
4 Greenbelt development 0.50 0.50 0.20

10.25
RWH Pits (Inside & Outside the

5 0.30 0.20 0.10
plant)
6 Fire Safety Systems 2.50 0.10
7 Occupational Health & Safety
Primary Health Center (PHC) 0.70 `--- `---
Personal Protective Equipment’s 0.20 0.10 `---
0.20
Ambulance 0.15 `--- `---
Sub Total 1.05 0.10
Budget for Social &
8 Infrastructure Development 4.23 3.21 2.24 `---
Activities
37.03 22.07 6.13
TOTAL 65.23 191.60
10.6 CORPORATE ENVIRONMENT POLICY [Gen. ToR # 9 (i), (ii), (iii) & (iv)]
Following is the compliance to TOR point pertaining to Corporate Environment Policy in the TOR
letter issued by MoEF&CC, New Delhi.
Corporate Environment Policy
i. Does the company have a well laid down The company has well laid down Environment
Environment Policy approved by its Board of Policy, approved by Managing Director. Plant
Directors? If so, it may be detailed in the EIA Head will be authorized by the Board to sign,
report. issue & modify the Environment Policy.
ii. Does the Environment Policy prescribe for The organization has developed procedure
standard operating process / procedures to detailing compliance with all aspects of
bring into focus any infringement / deviation Environmental norms including the process of
/ violation of the environmental or forest corrective actions for its improvement.
norms / conditions? If so, it may be detailed The policy provides a framework for setting and
in the EIA. reviewing environmental objectives, which
includes a commitment to fulfil its compliance
obligations, to the protection of the
environment, including prevention of pollution
and other specific commitment(s) relevant to
the context of the organization.
iii. What is the hierarchical system or An Environmental Officer will look all the
Administrative order of the company to deal environmental issues and ensure the
with the environmental issues and for compliance with Environmental Clearance
ensuring compliance with the environmental conditions and will report to the Head of
clearance conditions? Details of this system Department, who will report to the Plant Head
may be given. and ultimate reporting would be to the
Managing Director. Subsequently it will be
discussed in the Board meeting.

10.26
iv. Does the company have system of reporting An Environmental Officer will look all the
of non-compliances / violations of environmental issues and ensure the
environmental norms to the Board of compliance with Environmental Clearance
Directors of the company and / or conditions and will report to the Head of
shareholders or stakeholders at large? This Department, who will report to the Unit Head
reporting mechanism shall be detailed in the and ultimate reporting would be to the
EIA report Managing Director. Subsequently it will be
discussed in the Board meeting.

10.27

10.28
CHAPTER – 11
SUMMARY & CONCLUSION 11
(As per Appendix - III A of EIA notification) [Gen. ToR # 1]
11.1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

Real Ispat & Power Limited has proposed to establish Steel Plant, a Greenfield Project, at
Chhattisgarh.
• Earlier MoEF has accorded EC for the Integrated Steel Plant vide letter no. J-11011 / 170
/ 2009 – IA II (I) dated 25th March 2010 in the same location with 300 Acres of land.
scenario.
• EC validity of 7 years has been expired on 25th March 2017 and could not submit the
period.
• Now fresh proposal has been submitted to MoEF&CC for grant of EC as per the provisions
of EIA notification dated 14-09-2006 and its amendments thereof.
• For the present proposal (with revised plant configuration) 63.52 ha. (156.909 Acres) of
land is envisaged and same is already acquired by the Project Proponent.
Present proposal of Greenfield project comprises of establishment of Iron ore beneficiation
plant (2.0 MTPA), Pellet Plant (1.6 MTPA), Sponge Iron Plant (7,60,000 TPA), Steel Melting Shop
with CCM (Billets / Ingots / Hot Billets) (7,50,000 TPA), Ladle Refining Furnace (7,50,000 TPA),
Rolling Mill with Standby Reheating Furnace 50 TPH (Rolled products / TMT Bars / Structural
Steel) (7,00,000 TPA), Coal Gasifier + PCI for Pellet Plant & Rolling Mill (80000 Nm3/hr), Ferro
Alloy Plant 2 x 9 MVA (SiMn – 36,000 TPA / FeMn – 66,000 TPA / FeSi – 18,000 TPA / Pig Iron –
72,000 TPA), WHRB based Power Plant – 66 MW & CFBC based Power Plant – 40 MW. Total
land envisaged for the proposed project 63.52 ha. (156.909 Acres).
As per the Ministry of Environment, Forests & Climate Change, New Delhi, EIA notification
dated 14th September, 2006 & its subsequent amendments, all Primary metallurgical
processing industries are listed under S.No. 3(a), under Category ‘A’.

11.1
In order to obtain Environmental Clearance for the proposed Steel plant, Form-I, proposed TOR
along with Pre-Feasibility Report were submitted to the Honourable Ministry of Environment,
Forests & Climate Change (MoEF&CC), New Delhi on 27th November 2019 vide Proposal no.
IA/CG/IND/127880/2019. Presentation was made before the 14th meeting of the Re-
Constituted Expert Appraisal Committee (Industry - 1) held on 23rd December 2019 for the
approval of TOR (Terms of Reference) for EIA study. Subsequently TOR letter was issued vide
letter No. J-11011 / 411 / 2019 – IA II (I), dated 20th January 2020. Draft EIA report has been
prepared incorporating the Terms of Reference & submitted to Chhattisgarh Environment
Conservation Board (CECB) for conducting Public hearing / consultation. Public Hearing /
Consultation was conducted on 4th February 2021 by Chhattisgarh Environment Conservation
Board (CECB). Final EIA report has been prepared incorporating reply to issued raised in Public
Hearing / Consultation by the Management.
Pioneer Enviro Laboratories & Consultants Private Limited, Hyderabad, which is accredited by
NABET, Quality Council of India, vide certificate No. NABET/ EIA/ 1922/ RA 0149, for preparing
EIA report for Metallurgical Unit, have prepared Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) report
for the proposed project by incorporating the TOR approved by Ministry of Environment,
Forests & Climate Change, New Delhi.
This report furnishes the details of location of Site, Description of the project, prevailing
baseline status w.r.t Air Environment, Water Environment, Noise Environment, Land
Environment, Flora & Fauna and Socio-economic environment. This report also helps in
identification of environmental impacts and suggesting mitigation measures to be followed
during Construction and Operation of the proposed project as a part of Environmental
Management Plan. This report also acts as guidance manual for the proponent for following
the Environmental Management Plan (EMP) and for adopting post project Environmental
Monitoring Program as per statutory norms.

11.2
11.1.1 ENVIRONMENTAL SETTING WITHIN 10 Km. RADIUS OF THE PLANT SITE

The following is the environmental setting within the 10 Km. radius of the Plant site:
Table No. 11.1.1: Environment Setting within 10 Kms. radius of the site
S.No. Salient Features / Environmental features Distance w.r.t. site / Remarks
1. Type of Land Private Barren Uncultivated land
2. Type of Land (Study Area) As per LULC the land use within 10 Km. is as follows:
Settlements – 3.9 %; Industrial Area-1.1%; Tank /
River, etc. – 6.3 %; Single crop – 72.4 %; Double
crop – 7.2 %; Land with scrub – 4.1%; Land without
scrub – 4.6 %; Aquaculture – 0.4%
3. National Park/ Wild life sanctuary / Nil
Biosphere reserve / Tiger Reserve /
Elephant Corridor / migratory routes for
Birds
4. Historical places / Places of Tourist Nil
importance / Archeological sites
5. Critically polluted area as per MoEF&CC None
Office Memorandum dated 13th January And also the Plant area does not fall in the areas
2010 given in Hon’ble NGT order issued vide dated 10th
July 2019.
6. Defence Installations Nil
7. Nearest village Bakulahi (0.15 Kms. – SE direction) & Dhourabhata
(0.35 Kms. – NW direction)
8. No. of Villages in the Study Area 51 nos.
9. Nearest Hospital Mopka – 2.0 Kms.(SEE direction)
10. Nearest School Mopka – 1.9 Kms.(SEE direction)
11. Forests Nil with in 10 Km. radius
12. Water body Shivnath River (5.9 Kms. - NW Direction), Jamuniya
Nadi (5.8 Kms. - SSE Direction), Bhatapara Branch
of Mahanadi Canal (0.18 Kms. – SSE Direction)
13. Nearest Highway SH # 10 (Bhatapara to Baloda Bazar) – 9.0 Kms.
(South Direction) - Aerial Distance
14. Nearest Railway Station Nipania Railway Station (2.3 Kms. – North
Direction) – Aerial Distance
15. Nearest Port facility Nil
16. Nearest Airport Nil
17. Nearest Interstate Boundary Nil
18. Seismic zoneas per IS-1893 Seismic zone – II
19. R&R There is no rehabilitation and resettlement issue,
as there are no habitations present in the site area.
20. Litigation / court case is pending against the Nil
proposed project / proposed site and or any
direction passed by the court of law against
the project

11.3
11.1.2 PLANT CONFIGURATION AND PRODUCTION CAPACITY

Following is the proposed plant configuration and proposed production capacities
(Beneficiated ore)
(Pellet)
3. Coal Gasifier + PCI For Pellet Plant 10 x 8000 Nm3/hr 80,000 Nm3/hr
& Rolling Mill
4. DRI Kilns 2 x 650 TPD + 2 x 350 7,60,000 TPA
(Sponge Iron) TPD
+ 1 x 200 TPD *
5. Steel Melt Shop with CCM 5 x 30 T + 5 x 20 T + 7,50,000 TPA
(Billets / Ingots / Hot Billets) twin Caster
7. Rolling Mill with Standby 2 x 3,50,000 TPA 7,00,000 TPA
Reheating Furnace 50 TPH
(Rolled products / TMT Bars /
Structural Steel)
(85 % Hot charging with Hot Billets
and remaining 15% through RHF
with LDO as fuel)
8. Ferro Alloys Unit 2 x 9 MVA FeSi- 18,000 TPA / FeMn-
(FeSi / FeMn / SiMn / Pig Iron) 66,000 TPA / SiMn- 36,000 TPA
/ Pig Iron – 72,000 TPA
CFBC 40 MW 40 MW
Note :
* as per Specific ToR (xi), instead of 2 x 100 TPD DRI Kilns it is proposed to install only 1 x 200 TPD Kiln
to reduce no. of Kilns in the proposal.
11.1.3 RAW MATERIAL REQUIRMENT

The following will be the raw material requirement for the proposed project:
Table No. 11.1.3: Raw Material Requirement, Source & Mode of Transport
1. For Iron Ore beneficiation plant (2.0 MTPA – throughput capacity)
a) Iron ore fines 20,00,000 Chhattisgarh/ Orissa By Rail & Road
2. For Pellet Plant (Pellets) - 1.6 MTPA

11.4

a) Iron ore Concentrate 17,00,000 Own generation Covered Conveyor
b) Bentonite 21,000 Gujarat By Rail & Road

c) Lime Powder 22,500 Chhattisgarh/ MP By Rail & Road
d) Coke breeze 54,000 Indonesia / South By Sea, Rail & Road
e) Coal (Gasifier) Indian 1,67,200 SECL/ Orissa By Rail & Road
40,000 NM3) (through covered trucks)
+ PCI Imported 97,280 Indonesia / South By Sea, Rail & Road
f) LDO 30,300 KL Chhattisgarh By Road
through tanker
3. For DRI Kilns (Sponge Iron) – 7,60,000 TPA
a) Iron Ore Pellets 11,40,000 Own generation Covered Conveyor
b) Dolomite 38,000 Chhattisgarh By Road

c) Coal Indian 9,88,000 SECL/ Orissa By Rail & Road
Imported 6,32,350 Indonesia / South By Sea, Rail & Road
4. For Steel Melting Shop (MS Billets/ Ingots/Hot Billets) – 7,50,000 TPA
a) Sponge Iron 7,60,000 Own generation Covered Conveyor
b) Pig Iron 72,000 Own generation Covered Conveyor
c) Scrap 38,000 Chhattisgarh By Road
d) Ferro Alloys 37,500 Own generation Covered Conveyor
5. For Rolling Mill through Hot charging (Rolled Products / TMT bars / Structural Steel) – 7,00,000 TPA
a) Billets / Ingots 7,50,000 Own generation Covered Conveyor
b) Coal for Indian 1,29,600 Chhattisgarh/ Orissa By Rail & Road
Gasifier (through covered trucks)
(40000 Nm3)+ Imported 83,000 Indonesia / South By Sea, Rail & Road
PCI Africa / Australia (Covered trucks)
c) LDO 35,100 KL Chhattisgarh By Road through tanker
6. For Ferro Alloys : 2 x 9 MVA (FeSi / SiMn / FeMn / Pig Iron)
6. (i) For manufacturing Ferro Silicon – 18,000 TPA
a) Quartz 27,360 Chhattisgarh/ Andra By Rail & Road
b) Mill Scale 14,040 Own generation Covered Conveyor
c) M.S. Scrap 630 Chhattisgarh By Road
d) LAM Coke 10080 Chhattisgarh By Road

11.5

6. (ii) For manufacturing Silico Manganese - 36,000 TPA
b) FeMn Slag 22248 Own generation Covered Conveyor
c) LAM Coke 13860 Chhattisgarh By Road
d) Quartz 7200 Chhattisgarh/ Andra By Rail & Road
6. (iii) For manufacturing Ferro Manganese – 66,000 TPA
b) LAM Coke 27375 Chhattisgarh By Road
c) Quartz 2250 Chhattisgarh/ Andra By Rail & Road
d) Bag filter dust 12,750 Own generation Pipeline
6. (iv) For manufacturing Pig Iron – 72,000 TPA
a) HG Iron ore 1,06,200 Chhattisgarh/ Orissa By Rail & Road
b) LAM Coke 35,280 Chhattisgarh By Road
c) Lime stone 29,520 Chhattisgarh/ MP By Rail & Road
7. For FBC Boiler [Power Generation 1 x 40 MW]
a) Indian Coal (100%) 2,48,400 SECL Chhattisgarh / By Rail & Road
MCL Odisha (through covered trucks)
OR
b) Imported Coal (100 %) 1,58,980 Indonesia / South By Sea, Rail & Road
OR
c) Dolochar Dolochar 1,52,000 Own Generation By Covenyers
+ Indian 1,72,400 SECL Chhattisgarh / By Rail & Road
Indian Coal Coal MCL Odisha (through covered trucks)
OR
d) Dolochar + Dolochar 1,52,000 Own Generation By Covenyers
Imported Coal Imported 1,10,340 Indonesia / South By Sea, Rail & Road
Coal Africa / Australia (Covered trucks)
11.1.4 MANUFACTURING PROCESS

11.1.4.1 Iron Ore Beneficiation
Beneficiation is a process which removes the gang particle like Alumina, Silica from the Iron
Ore. Basically, it separates Fe2O3 or Fe3O4 from other impurities in the iron ore. In this process
the Fe content is improve to maximum possible extent. The highest can be 70% i.e. purest form.
11.6
11.1.4.2 Pelletization
Iron ore fines will be grinded in Ball mills. The concentrate will be fed to thickener and
subsequently to filtering unit. The filter cake will be sent to pellet plant comprising of Travelling
grate kiln. Green pellets will be produced from this process. The flue gases from grate kiln will
be treated in ESP and discharged through a stack.
11.1.4.3 Manufacturing of Sponge Iron (DRI)

The proposal consists of 2x650 TPD, 2x350 TPD & 1x200 TPD of DRI kilns to produce 7,60,000
TPA of Sponge iron with 2x20 MW, 2x10 MW & 1x6 MW WHRB facility. Refractory lined rotary
kilns will be used for reduction of iron ore in solid state. A central Burner located at the
discharge end will be used for initial heating of the kiln.
Iron ore will be continuously fed into the kiln along with coal which has dual role of fuel as well
as reductant. Dolomite will be added to scavenge the sulphur from the coal. A number of air
tubes will be provided along the length of the kiln. The desired temperature profile will be
maintained by controlling the volume of the combustion air through these tubes. The Carbon
monoxide generated due to the combustion of coal, reduces the iron ore and converts it into
sponge iron. The rotary kiln is primarily divided into two zones viz. the pre heating zone and
the reduction zone. The preheating zone extends over 30 to 50 % of the length of the kiln and
in this the moisture in the charge will be driven off and the volatile matter in the coal will be
burnt with the combustion air supplied through the air tubes. Heat from the combustion raises
the temperature of the lining and the bed surface. As the kiln rotates, the lining transfers the
heat to the charge. Charge material, pre-heated to about 10000C enters the reduction zone.
Temperature of the order of 10500C will be maintained in the reduction zone, which is the
appropriate temperature for solid state reduction of iron oxide to metallic iron.
This hot material will be transferred to Heat exchanger. In Heat exchanger the material will be
cooled to 1600C. The cooler discharge material consists of sponge iron lumps, sponge iron fines
and char. Magnetic and non-magnetic material will be separated through magnetic separators
and stored in separate bins. The hot flue gases will be taken to a Waste Heat Recovery Boilers
and after heat recovery they will be treated in high efficiency ESP and discharged into the
atmosphere through stack whose height will be in accordance with CPCB norms.

11.7
11.1.4.4 Steel Melting Shop

In Steel Melting Shop (SMS), Sponge Iron will be melted along with melting scrap and fluxes to
make pure liquid steel and then to mould it in required size billets. The SMS will consist of
Induction furnace, Ladles, Cranes & Continuous Casting Machine (CCM). There will be 5x30 T &
5 x20 T Induction furnaces to manufacture Hot Metal / M.S. Billets / Ingots of 7,50,000 TPA
instead of M.S. Billets / Ingots. Either the Hot Metal produced from LRF will be directly sent to
Rolling Mill without using Re-heating Furnace through Hot charging method (or) M.S. Billets /
M.s. Ingots will be sent to Re-heating Furnace to reheat the Billets and then sent to Rolling Mill
to manufacture Rolled Products.
11.1.4.5 Manufacturing of Rolled products through Rolling Mill

The Hot Metal produced from Induction Furnaces will be directly sent to Rolling Mill to produce
Rolled Products (OR) if M.S. Billets / M.s. Ingots produced in Induction Furnace will be sent to
3 nos. of 50 TPH reheating furnaces for the heating and will be sent to Rolling Mill. Furnace will
be heated with Prodcuer Gas / LDO. A bar and round mill will be installed in the plant to produce
7,00,000 TPA of Rolled Products /TMT Bars / Structural Steels.
11.1.4.6 Manufacturing of Ferro Alloys through SEAF

2 no. of Submerged Electric Arc Furnaces each of 9 MVA will be setup in the proposed plant.
Ferro manganese, silicon-manganese will be produced using manganese ore as main raw
material, Ferro silicon will be produced using Quartz as main raw material as main raw material
in a sub-merged arc furnace using reducer (Coke) under high voltage.
11.1.4.7 Producer Gas plant (Gasifier)

Producer gas plant is proposed to be established for supply fuel to Pelletization Plant & Rolling
Mill units. Coal is lifted to the coal storage bin by lifting system; the coal is added in the
carbonation stage of two-stage coal gasifier by a programmable control feeding system. Air is
blown in the bottom of furnace by air blower, at the same time, low pressure steam goes
through the blending bin and blends with air, becomes the gasification agent, which will carry
on the gasification reaction with 1200 Celsius degree semi coke in the gasification stage.

11.8
11.1.4.8 Power Generation

Through WHRB Boiler
The hot flue gases from proposed 2x650 TPD, 2x350 TPD & 1x200 TPD of DRI kilns will pass
through waste heat recovery Boiler to recover the heat and to generate 66 MW (2x20 MW,
2x10 MW & 1x6 MW) electricity. The gases after heat recovery will pass through ESP and then
discharged through chimneys into the atmosphere for effective dispersion of emissions into
the atmosphere through stacks of adequate height.
Through CFBC Boiler

Coal (Imported / Indian) along with dolochar will be used in CFBC Boiler to generate 40 MW
electricity. The flue-gases will be treated in high efficiency ESP and then discharged through a
stack of adequate height into the atmosphere.
11.1.5 Water Requirement

The water requirement for the proposed project will be 5,640 KLD. This includes Make-up water
for I/O Beneficiation, Pellet Plant, DRI Kiln, Induction Furnace, Rolling Mill, Ferro Alloy Plant,
Power Plant & for Domestic purpose.
Air cooled condensers will be provided in Captive power plant. Hence the net water
requirement will be substantially reduced. The water required for the proposed project will be
sourced from Shivnath River which is at 7.8 Kms. from the project site. Water allocation has
been recommended from Selva Anicut of Shivnath River from Water Resource Department,
Govt. of Chhattisgarh, vide 50th meeting of State Water Resource Utilization Committee,
Chhattisgarh dt. 13.07.2021 and same is enclosed as Annexure - 1.
Table No. 11.1.4: Break-Up of Water Requirement
2. Pellet Plant 500
5. Rolling Mill 850
7. Ferro Alloys 250
8. Power Plant (WHRB & CFBC) 800

11.9

Total 5640
11.1.6 Wastewater Generation

 The total net wastewater generation from the proposed project will be 255 KLD.
development.
The following will be the total wastewater & it’s break-up.
Table No. 11.1.5: Breakup of Wastewater Generation
S.No. Source Generation (KLD)
1. Power Plant 183
a) Cooling Tower blowdown 126
b) Boilers blowdown 27
c) D.M. plant regeneration water 30
2. Sanitary Wastewater 72
Total 255

11.10
11.1.7 Wastewater Characteristics

The following are the Characteristics of wastewater
Table No. 11.1.6: Characteristics of Effluent
PARAMETER CONCENTRATION
Cooling Tower DM Plant Boiler Sanitary
blowdown Regeneration Blowdown waste water
pH 7.0 – 8.0 5.0 – 10.0 9.5 – 10.5 7.0 – 8.5
BOD (mg/l) -- -- -- 200 – 250
COD (mg/l) -- -- -- 300 – 400
TDS (mg/l) 1000 5000 – 6000 1000 mg/l 800 – 900
Oil & Grease (mg/l) -- 10 -- 5 - 10
TSS (mg/l) -- -- -- 150-200
11.2 DESCRIPTION OF ENVIRONMENT

Base line data has been collected on ambient air quality, water quality, noise levels, flora and
fauna and socio-economic details of people within 10 km radius of the plant.
11.2.1 Ambient air quality

Ambient air quality was monitored for PM 2.5, PM10, SO2, NOx & CO at 8 stations including
project site during 1st October 2019 to 31st December 2019. The following are the
concentrations of various parameters at the monitoring stations:
Table No.11.2.1 : AAQ Data Summary
S.No. Parameter Concentration
1. PM2.5 : 20.2 to 32.1 g/m3
2. PM10 : 34.5 to 54.5 g/m3
3. SO2 : 6.5 to 11.6 g/m3
4. NO2 : 6.4 to 15.2 g/m3
5. CO : 325 to 718 g/m3
11.2.2 Water Quality

11.2.2.1 Surface Water Quality
Shivnath River, Jamuniya Nadi, Bhatapara Branch of Mahanadi Canal are flowing at a distance
of 5.9 Kms. 5.8 Kms. & 0.18 Kms. from the plant. 2 no. of Samples from Shivnath River i.e. 60m
Upstream & 60 m Downstream, 1 no. of Sample from Jamuniya Nadi, 1 no. of sample from Pond
near Bakulahi Village, Pond near Semradih & Pond near Mopka Village have been collected and
analyzed for various parameters. No other surface water samples have been collected as the

11.11
study period. The analysis of samples shows that all the parameters are in accordance with BIS-
2296 specifications.
11.2.2.2 Ground Water Quality

8 No. of ground water samples from open wells / bore wells were collected from the nearby
villages to assess ground water quality impacts and analyzed for various Physico-Chemical
parameters. The analysis of samples shows that all the parameters are in accordance with BIS:
10500 specifications.
11.2.3 Noise Levels

Noise levels were measured at 8 locations during day-time & Night-time. The noise levels at
the monitoring stations are ranging from 41.26 dBA to 57.57 dBA.
11.3 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES

11.3.1 Prediction of impacts on air quality
The predicted max. Incremental PM10 concentrations (24 hourly) due to the emissions from
The predicted incremental rise in PM concentration due to the Vehicular emission will be 1.75
g/m3.
Hence the total predicted incremental rise in Particulate Matter concentration due to the
emission from proposed project and due the vehicular emissions will be 1.20 g/m3 + 1.75
g/m3 = 2.95 g/m3.
The predicted max incremental SO2 concentrations (24 hourly) due to the emissions from
The predicted max incremental NOx concentrations (24 hourly) due to the emissions from
The predicted incremental rise in NOx concentration due to the Vehicular emission will be 5.16
g/m3.

11.12
Hence the total predicted incremental rise in NOx concentration due to the emission from
project and due the vehicular emission will be 2.67 g/m3 + 5.16 g/m3 = 7.83 g/m3
The predicted incremental rise in CO concentration due to the Vehicular emission will be 6.16
g/m3.
Table No. 11.2.2: NET RESULTANT MAXIMUM CONCENTRATIONS DURING THE OPERATION OF THE
PROPOSED PROJECT (APCS WORKING SCENARIO)
Item PM10 SO2 NOX CO
3
(g/m ) (g/m ) (g/m ) (g/m3)
3 3
concentration due to proposed project (Point source)
emissions)
Net resultant concentrations during operation of the 57.45 20.0 23.03 724.16
plant
not working is exceeding the NAAQS. If APCS is not working, then raw material feed will be
stopped. Consequently, there will be no production in the unit till APCS is rectified.
11.3.2 Prediction of impacts on Noise quality

The major sources of noise generation in the proposed project will be STG, boilers,
compressors, DG set, etc. Acoustic enclosures will be provided to the STG. The ambient noise
levels will be within the standards prescribed by MoEF vide notification dated 14-02-2000
under the Noise Pollution (Regulation & Control), Rules 2000 i.e. the noise levels will be less
than 75 dBA during day time and less than 70 dBA during night time. 52 acres (21.1 Ha.) of
extensive greenbelt will be developed to further attenuate the noise levels. Hence there will
not be any adverse impact due to noise on population in surrounding areas due to the proposed
project.
11.3.3 Prediction of impacts on Water Environment

Closed loop cooling water system will be adopted in Pellet Plant, DRI, SMS, and Rolling Mill
units. The effluent generated from I/O Beneficiation, Rolling Mill will be sent to settling tank &
clear water will be recycled back. Effluent from power plant will be treated and after ensuring

11.13
compliance with SPCB norms, it will be utilized for dust suppression, ash conditioning and for
greenbelt development. Sanitary wastewater will be treated in STP. There will not be any
effluent discharge outside the premises. ZLD will be followed. Hence there will not be any
adverse impact on environment due to the proposed project.
11.3.4 Prediction of Impacts on Land Environment

The effluent will be treated to achieve SPCB standards. Zero effluent discharge will be adopted.
All the required air pollution control systems will be provided to comply with CPCB / SPCB
norms. All solid wastes will be disposed / utilized as per CPCB / SPCB norms. 52 acres (21.1 Ha.)
of extensive greenbelt will be developed as per guidelines. Hence, there will not be any adverse
impact on land environment due to the proposed project.
11.3.5 Socio - Economic Environment

There will be certain upliftment in Socio Economic status of the people in the area &
development of the area due to the proposed project.
Due to this the economic conditions, the educational and medical standards of the people living
in the study area will certainly move upwards which will result in overall economic
development, improvement in general aesthetic environment and increase in business
opportunities.
11.4 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME

Post project monitoring will be conducted as per the guidelines of SPCB and MoEF&CC are
tabulated below:
Table No. 11.4.1: Monitoring Schedule for Environmental Parameters
1. Water & Waste water quality
quarterly basis.
(24 hourly)
2. Air Quality
A. Stack Monitoring Online monitors --- PM, SO2 & NOx

11.14
(all stacks)
(CAAQMS)
Quarterly Once 24 hours PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NOx
& CO
speed.
hours with 1 hour
interval
11.5 ADDITIONAL STUDIES

No Rehabilitation and Resettlement is involved in the proposed project as there are no
habitations in the land proposed for the project. Hence no R & R study has been carried out.
11.6 PROJECT BENEFITS

With the establishment of the proposed project employment potential will increase. Land
prices in the area will increase. The economic status of the people in the area will improve due
to the proposed project. Periodic medical checkups will be carried out. Top priority will be given
to locals in employment.
11.7 ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PLAN

11.7.1 Air Environment
The following are air emission control systems proposed in the proposed project:
Table No. 11.7.1: Pollution Control Systems Proposed
outlet
bag filters
PTFE bag filters
Rolling Mill

11.15

outlet
System
3
will be provided
Apart from the above the following air emission control systems/ measures are proposed in
the Plant:
 All conveyors will be completely covered with G.I. sheets to control fugitive dust.
 All bins will be totally packed and covered so that there will not be any chance for dust leakage.
 All the dust prone points material handling systems will be connected with de-dusting system
with bag filters.
 All discharge points and feed points, wherever the possibility of dust generation is there a de-
11.7.2 Water Environment

 Thickener over flow from Iron ore beneficiation process will be recycled along with makeup
cooling system.

11.16
development.
 Sanitary wastewater will be treated in STP and the treated sewage will be utilized for dust

mixed with Cooling Tower blowdown in a Central Monitoring Basin (CMB). Service water will
be treated in an oil separator and after treatment it will be taken to CMB. The treated effluent
will be utilized for dust suppression, ash conditioning and for Green belt development. No
effluent will be let out of the plant premises. Hence Zero discharge concept will be
implemented.
TREATED EFFLUENT DISPOSAL
52 Acres (21.1 Ha.) of greenbelt will be developed within the plant premises by using the
treated effluent. A dedicated pipe distribution network will be provided for using the treated
effluent for greenbelt development. During monsoon period, when there is no requirement of
water for greenbelt development, the treated effluent will be used as make up water for Rolling
Mill.
11.7.3 Noise Environment
The major sources of noise generation in the proposed project will be STG, boilers,
compressors, DG set, etc. Acoustic enclosure will be provided. All the machinery will be
manufactured in accordance with MoEF&CC norms on Noise levels. The employees working

11.17
near the noise generating sources will be provided with earplugs. The extensive greenbelt
development proposed within the plant premises will help in attenuating the noise levels
further. Noise barriers in the form of trees are recommended to be grown around
administrative block and other utility units.
11.7.4 Land Environment

The wastewater generated from the proposed project will be treated in the Effluent Treatment
Plant to comply with the SPCB standards and will be used for dust suppression, ash conditioning
and for greenbelt development. All the required Air emission control systems will be installed
and operated to comply with SPCB norms. Solid wastes will be disposed off as per norms.
Extensive greenbelt will be developed in the plant premises. Desirable beautification and
landscaping practices will be followed. Hence there will not be any impact due to the proposed
project.
Table No. 11.7.2 : Solid Waste Generation & Method Of Disposal
(in TPA)
Pellet plant
manufacturers.
Mill Pellet plant.
Mill
11.18

(in TPA)
Rolling Mill)
Gasifiers
dolochar)
dolochar)
11.7.5 Greenbelt Development

Greenbelt of 52 acres (21.1 Ha.) of extensive greenbelt will be developed in the plant premises.
10 to 85 m wide greenbelt will be developed all around the plant.
11.7.6 Cost for Environment Protection

Capital Cost for Environment Protection for proposed plant : Rs. 65.23 Crores
Recurring Cost per annum for Environmental protection : Rs.191.60 Lakhs/annum
11.7.7 Implementation of CREP Recommendations

All the CREP recommendations will be strictly followed.

11.19
Baloda Bazar – Bhatapara (D), Chhattisgarh
CHAPTER – 12
DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANT ENGAGED
12
12.1 DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANT ENGAGED [Gen. TOR # 2 (i)]
Pioneer Enviro Laboratories & Consultants Pvt. Ltd. is QCI-NABET accredited EIA Consultant,
vide certificate No. NABET/ EIA/ 1922/ RA 0149. It is one of the leading Environmental
Consultancy organizations in South India and Chhattisgarh. Established in 1996 PIONEER
ENVIRO has an excellent track record of serving several well-established Group companies
across the Country.
PIONEER ENVIRO is a team of professionals in various disciplines such as Environmental
Engineering & Environmental Management. The team is slated to double in next two years.
Our goals are to provide all of our clients with quality services at a fair, competitive price.
By offering a turnkey service (excepting some specific areas), we can maximize the
efficiency of data collection so that our clients pay one time for similar services. The
technologies deployed at PIONEER ENVIRO are current and leading edge, duly validated.
PIONEER ENVIRO has an exceptional team of Environment professionals. PIONEER ENVIRO
has the expertise to assess the impact of various industrial activities such Coal Washery,
Power Plants, Steel Plants, Distilleries, Cement Plants etc., on the environment. These
assessments will help the industry to install the best Environmental Management Systems
and to maintain the plant in accordance with the norms stipulated for ISO-14001 & ISO-
18000. PIONEER ENVIRO services range from site assessments, environmental audits,
environmental impact statements and risk assessments to waste management.
Following are some of the services which are PIONEER ENVIRO core competency:
 Helping the client to select the suitable site as per the norms of Ministry of
Environment and Forest, Govt. of India and State Pollution Control Boards in India.
 Environmental Impact assessment studies carried out as per the guidelines issued
by Ministry of Environment and Forest, Govt. of India and State Pollution Control
Boards in India.
 Environment Audits.
 Risk Assessment and Disaster Management Studies.
 Occupational health & industrial hygiene.

12.1
Baloda Bazar – Bhatapara (D), Chhattisgarh
 Solid waste management.
 Environmental baseline studies covering the fields of ambient Air, Surface water,
Ground water, Soil, Noise and Biological Environment (Flora & Fauna).
 Stack Emission Monitoring, Effluent Analysis, Ground water analysis.
 Design of Effluent Treatment Plant
 Design of Sewage Treatment Plant

12.2

EIA Report

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

EIA Report

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Real Ispat and Power Limited

UID: PELCPL/EIA/IND-1/2020/04 ISSUE-02

Title of EIA Report Proposed Greenfield Project comprising of establishment

Declaration by the Head of the accredited consultant organization/ authorized person:

Date and Sign of EIA Coordinator:

Name: Y. Maheshwara Reddy

Designation: Managing Director

Date and Sign of Head of Accredited Organization:

Chapter – 2 : Project Description

2.9.1.1 Dust Extraction and Dust Suppression System 2.50

Chapter – 3 : Description of Environment

EIA Report - Index

3.6.3 Description of the Project Site & Study Area 3.47

CHAPTER – 4 : Anticipated Environmental Impacts & Mitigation Measures

CHAPTER – 5 : Analysis of Alternatives [Technology & Site]

CHAPTER – 6 : Environmental Monitoring Programme

CHAPTER – 7 : Additional Studies

EIA Report - Index

7.2.3 Public Hearing Photographs 7.3

7.6.1 Safety Organization 7.43

CHAPTER – 8 : Project Benefit

CHAPTER – 9 : Environmental Cost Benefits

CHAPTER – 10 : Environmental Management Plan

EIA Report - Index

EIA Report - Index

11.3.5 Socio – Economic Environment 11.14

CHAPTER – 12 : Disclosure of Consultant

EIA Report - Index

EIA report – TOR Compliance

TOR No. TOR point raised TOR Compliance

TOR No. TOR point raised TOR Compliance

GENERIC TORs IN RESPECT OF INDUSTRY SECTOR

EIA report – TOR Compliance

TOR No. TOR point raised TOR Compliance

EIA report – TOR Compliance

TOR No. TOR point raised TOR Compliance

Kindly refer to page 2.45 of Chapter # 2 of EIA report for

EIA report – TOR Compliance

TOR No. TOR point raised TOR Compliance

For the present proposal (with revised plant configuration)

Hence Not Applicable.

Kindly refer to page no. 5.1 of Chapter # 5 of EIA report for

EIA report – TOR Compliance

TOR No. TOR point raised TOR Compliance

EIA report – TOR Compliance

TOR No. TOR point raised TOR Compliance

TOR No. TOR point raised TOR Compliance

EIA report – TOR Compliance

TOR No. TOR point raised TOR Compliance

EIA report – TOR Compliance

TOR No. TOR point raised TOR Compliance

TOR No. TOR point raised TOR Compliance

TOR No. TOR point raised TOR Compliance

9. Corporate Environment Policy

TOR No. TOR point raised TOR Compliance

Kindly refer to page No. 10.26 to 10.28 of Chapter # 10 of

EIA report – TOR Compliance

TOR No. TOR point raised TOR Compliance

ADDITIONAL TORS FOR INTEGRATED STEEL PLANTS – [ANNEXURE - 2]

EIA report – TOR Compliance

TOR No. TOR Points TOR Compliance

Solid wastes such as dolochar, accretion slag, granulated slag will be

TOR No. TOR Points TOR Compliance

Water allocation has been recommended from Selva Anicut of